Iso 14224 2016 PDF

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
BSI Standards Publication
Petroleum, petrochemical
and natural gas industries —
Collection and exchange of
reliability and maintenance
data for equipment
(ISO 14224:2016)
BS EN ISO 14224:2016 BRITISH STANDARD
National foreword
This British Standard is the UK implementation of EN ISO
14224:2016. It supersedes BS EN ISO 14224:2006 which is
withdrawn.
The UK participation in its preparation was entrusted to Technical
Committee PSE/17/67, Reliability engineering and technology
committee.
A list of organizations represented on this committee can be
obtained on request to its secretary.
This publication does not purport to include all the necessary
provisions of a contract. Users are responsible for its correct
application.
© The British Standards Institution 2016.
Published by BSI Standards Limited 2016
ISBN 978 0 580 90387 8
ICS 75.200; 75.180.01
Compliance with a British Standard cannot confer immunity from
legal obligations.
This British Standard was published under the authority of the
Standards Policy and Strategy Committee on 31 October 2016.
Amendments/corrigenda issued since publication
Date Text affected
EUROPEAN STANDARD EN ISO 14224
NORME EUROPÉENNE
EUROPÄISCHE NORM October 2016
ICS 75.180.01; 75.200 Supersedes EN ISO 14224:2006
English Version
Petroleum, petrochemical and natural gas industries -

Collection and exchange of reliability and maintenance
data for equipment (ISO 14224:2016)
Industries du pétrole, de la pétrochimie et du gaz Erdöl-, petrochemische und Erdgasindustrie -
naturel - Collecte et échange de données de fiabilité et Sammlung und Austausch von Zuverlässigkeits- und
de maintenance des équipements (ISO 14224:2016) Wartungsdaten für Ausrüstungen (ISO 14224:2016)
This European Standard was approved by CEN on 22 July 2016.
CEN members are bound to comply with the CEN/CENELEC Internal Regulations which stipulate the conditions for giving this
European Standard the status of a national standard without any alteration. Up-to-date lists and bibliographical references
concerning such national standards may be obtained on application to the CEN-CENELEC Management Centre or to any CEN
member.
This European Standard exists in three official versions (English, French, German). A version in any other language made by
translation under the responsibility of a CEN member into its own language and notified to the CEN-CENELEC Management
Centre has the same status as the official versions.
CEN members are the national standards bodies of Austria, Belgium, Bulgaria, Croatia, Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia,
Finland, Former Yugoslav Republic of Macedonia, France, Germany, Greece, Hungary, Iceland, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Lithuania,
Luxembourg, Malta, Netherlands, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Romania, Slovakia, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, Turkey and
United Kingdom.
EUROPEAN COMMITTEE FOR STANDARDIZATION

COMITÉ EUROPÉEN DE NORMALISATION
EUROPÄISCHES KOMITEE FÜR NORMUNG
CEN-CENELEC Management Centre: Avenue Marnix 17, B-1000 Brussels
© 2016 CEN All rights of exploitation in any form and by any means reserved Ref. No. EN ISO 14224:2016 E
worldwide for CEN national Members.
BS EN ISO 14224:2016
EN ISO 14224:2016 (E)
European foreword
This document (EN ISO 14224:2016) has been prepared by Technical Committee ISO/TC 67 “Materials,
equipment and offshore structures for petroleum, petrochemical and natural gas industries” in
collaboration with Technical Committee CEN/TC 12 “Materials, equipment and offshore structures for
petroleum, petrochemical and natural gas industries” the secretariat of which is held by NEN.
This European Standard shall be given the status of a national standard, either by publication of an
identical text or by endorsement, at the latest by April 2017, and conflicting national standards shall be
withdrawn at the latest by April 2017.
Attention is drawn to the possibility that some of the elements of this document may be the subject of
patent rights. CEN [and/or CENELEC] shall not be held responsible for identifying any or all such patent
rights.
This document supersedes EN ISO 14224:2006.
According to the CEN-CENELEC Internal Regulations, the national standards organizations of the
following countries are bound to implement this European Standard: Austria, Belgium, Bulgaria,
Croatia, Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, Former Yugoslav Republic of Macedonia,
France, Germany, Greece, Hungary, Iceland, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta,
Netherlands, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Romania, Slovakia, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland,
Turkey and the United Kingdom.
Endorsement notice
The text of ISO 14224:2016 has been approved by CEN as EN ISO 14224:2016 without any modification.
3
BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Contents Page
Foreword...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................v
Introduction................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. vi
1 Scope.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 1
2 Normative references....................................................................................................................................................................................... 2
3 Terms and definitions...................................................................................................................................................................................... 2
4 Abbreviated terms............................................................................................................................................................................................18
5 Application...............................................................................................................................................................................................................20
5.1 Equipment coverage......................................................................................................................................................................... 20
5.2 Time periods........................................................................................................................................................................................... 20
5.3 Users of this International Standard.................................................................................................................................. 20
5.4 Limitations................................................................................................................................................................................................ 21
5.5 Exchange of RM data........................................................................................................................................................................ 22
6 Benefits of RM data collection and exchange........................................................................................................................23
7 Quality of data.......................................................................................................................................................................................................25
7.1 Obtaining quality data.................................................................................................................................................................... 25
7.1.1 Definition of data quality........................................................................................................................................ 25
7.1.2 Planning measures....................................................................................................................................................... 25
7.1.3 Verification of quality................................................................................................................................................ 26
7.1.4 Limitations and problems...................................................................................................................................... 27
7.2 Data collection process.................................................................................................................................................................. 27
7.2.1 Data sources....................................................................................................................................................................... 27
7.2.2 Data collection methods.......................................................................................................................................... 28
7.2.3 Organization and training...................................................................................................................................... 28
8 Equipment boundary, taxonomy and time definitions...............................................................................................29
8.1 Boundary description..................................................................................................................................................................... 29
8.2 Taxonomy.................................................................................................................................................................................................. 30
8.3 Timeline issues..................................................................................................................................................................................... 32
8.3.1 Surveillance and operating period................................................................................................................. 32
8.3.2 Data collection periods............................................................................................................................................. 33
8.3.3 Maintenance times....................................................................................................................................................... 34
9 Recommended data for equipment, failures and maintenance........................................................................35
9.1 Data categories..................................................................................................................................................................................... 35
9.2 Data format.............................................................................................................................................................................................. 35
9.3 Database structure............................................................................................................................................................................ 36
9.3.1 Description.......................................................................................................................................................................... 36
9.3.2 Logical structure............................................................................................................................................................ 36
9.3.3 Database architecture............................................................................................................................................... 37
9.4 Equipment data.................................................................................................................................................................................... 38
9.5 Failure data.............................................................................................................................................................................................. 40
9.6 Maintenance data............................................................................................................................................................................... 42
9.6.1 General................................................................................................................................................................................... 42
9.6.2 Maintenance categories........................................................................................................................................... 42
9.6.3 Reporting maintenance data............................................................................................................................... 43
Annex A (informative) Equipment-class attributes............................................................................................................................46
Annex B (normative) Interpretation and notation of failure and maintenance parameters.............. 176
Annex C (informative) Guide to interpretation and calculation of derived reliability and
maintenance parameters...................................................................................................................................................................... 205
Annex D (informative) Typical requirements for data................................................................................................................ 229
© ISO 2016 – All rights reserved iii

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Annex E (informative) Key performance indicators (KPIs) and benchmarking............................................... 238

Annex F (informative) Classification and definition of safety critical failures................................................... 251
Bibliography.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 260
iv © ISO 2016 – All rights reserved

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Foreword
ISO (the International Organization for Standardization) is a worldwide federation of national standards
bodies (ISO member bodies). The work of preparing International Standards is normally carried out
through ISO technical committees. Each member body interested in a subject for which a technical
committee has been established has the right to be represented on that committee. International
organizations, governmental and non-governmental, in liaison with ISO, also take part in the work.
ISO collaborates closely with the International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) on all matters of
electrotechnical standardization.
The procedures used to develop this document and those intended for its further maintenance are
described in the ISO/IEC Directives, Part 1. In particular the different approval criteria needed for the
different types of ISO documents should be noted. This document was drafted in accordance with the
editorial rules of the ISO/IEC Directives, Part 2. www.iso.org/directives
Attention is drawn to the possibility that some of the elements of this document may be the subject of
patent rights. ISO shall not be held responsible for identifying any or all such patent rights. Details of
any patent rights identified during the development of the document will be in the Introduction and/or
on the ISO list of patent declarations received. www.iso.org/patents
Any trade name used in this document is information given for the convenience of users and does not
constitute an endorsement.
For an explanation on the meaning of ISO specific terms and expressions related to conformity
assessment, as well as information about ISO’s adherence to the WTO principles in the Technical
Barriers to Trade (TBT) see the following URL: Foreword - Supplementary information
The committee responsible for this document is Technical Committee ISO/TC 67, Materials, equipment
and offshore structures for petroleum, petrochemical and natural gas industries.
This third edition cancels and replaces the second edition (ISO 14224:2006), which has been technically
revised. The main changes are:
— Clause 3 — several new definitions;
— Clauses 8 and 9 — changes in some figures and tables;
— Annex A — new equipment classes;
— Annex B — associated new and aligned failure modes;
— Annex C — some changes and new subclauses, e.g. C.3.4 and C.7;
— Annex D — new subclause D.5;
— Annex E — new KPIs;
— Annex F — alignment with ISO/TR 12489:2013.
This corrected version of ISO 14224:2016 incorporates various editorial corrections.
© ISO 2016 – All rights reserved v

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Introduction
This International Standard has been prepared based on the previous edition (ISO 14224:2006),
experience gained through its use, and know-how and best practices shared through the international
development process.
In the petroleum, petrochemical and natural gas industries, great attention is being paid to safety,
availability, reliability and maintainability of equipment. The industry annual cost of equipment
unavailability is very large, although many plant owners have improved the availability of their
operating facilities by addressing this challenge. A stronger emphasis has recently been put on cost-
effective design and maintenance for new plants and existing installations among more industrial
parties. In this respect, data on failures, failure mechanisms and maintenance related to these industrial
facilities and its operations have become more important. It is necessary that this information is used
by, and communicated between, the various parties and its disciplines, within the same company or
between companies. Various analysis methodologies are used to estimate the risk of hazards to people
and environment, or to analyse plant or system performance. For such analyses to be effective and
decisive, equipment reliability and maintenance (RM) data are vital.
These analyses require a clear understanding of the equipment’s technical characteristics, its operating
and environmental conditions, its potential failures and its maintenance activities. It can be necessary
to have data covering several years of operation before sufficient data have been accumulated to
give confident analysis results and relevant decision support. It is necessary, therefore, to view data
collection as a long-term activity, planned and executed with appropriate goals in mind. At the same
time, clarity as to the causes of failures is key to prioritizing and implementing corrective actions that
result in sustainable improvements in availability, leading to improved profitability and safety.
Data collection is an investment. Data standardization, when combined with enhanced data-
management systems that allow electronic collection and transfer of data, can result in improved
quality of data for reliability and maintenance. A cost-effective way of optimizing data requirements
is through industry co-operation. To make it possible to collect, exchange and analyse data based on
common viewpoints, a standard is required. Standardization of data collection practices facilitates the
exchange of information between relevant parties e.g. plants, owners, manufacturers and contractors
throughout the world.
vi © ISO 2016 – All rights reserved

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
INTERNATIONAL STANDARD ISO 14224:2016(E)
Petroleum, petrochemical and natural gas industries —

Collection and exchange of reliability and maintenance
data for equipment
1 Scope
This International Standard provides a comprehensive basis for the collection of reliability and
maintenance (RM) data in a standard format for equipment in all facilities and operations within the
petroleum, natural gas and petrochemical industries during the operational life cycle of equipment. It
describes data collection principles and associated terms and definitions that constitute a “reliability
language” that can be useful for communicating operational experience. The failure modes defined in
the normative part of this International Standard can be used as a “reliability thesaurus” for various
quantitative as well as qualitative applications. This International Standard also describes data quality
control and assurance practices to provide guidance for the user.
Standardization of data collection practices facilitates the exchange of information between parties, e.g.
plants, owners, manufacturers and contractors. This International Standard establishes requirements
that any in-house or commercially available RM data system is required to meet when designed for
RM data exchange. Examples, guidelines and principles for the exchange and merging of such RM data
are addressed. This International Standard also provides a framework and guidelines for establishing
performance objectives and requirements for equipment reliability and availability performance.
Annex A contains a summary of equipment that is covered by this International Standard.
This International Standard defines a minimum amount of data that is required to be collected, and it
focuses on two main issues:
— data requirements for the categories of data to be collected for use in various analysis methodologies;
— standardized data format to facilitate the exchange of reliability and maintenance data between
plants, owners, manufacturers and contractors.
The following main categories of data are to be collected:
a) equipment data, e.g. equipment taxonomy, equipment attributes;
b) failure data, e.g. failure cause, failure consequence;
c) maintenance data, e.g. maintenance action, resources used, maintenance consequence, down time.
NOTE Clause 9 gives further details on data content and data format.
The main areas where such data are used are the following:
1) reliability, e.g. failure events and failure mechanisms;
2) availability/efficiency, e.g. equipment availability, system availability, plant production availability;
3) maintenance, e.g. corrective and preventive maintenance, maintenance plan, maintenance
supportability;
4) safety and environment, e.g. equipment failures with adverse consequences for safety and/or
environment.
This International Standard does not apply to the following:
i. data on (direct) cost issues;
© ISO 2016 – All rights reserved 1

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

ii. data from laboratory testing and manufacturing (e.g. accelerated lifetime testing), see also 5.2;
iii. complete equipment data sheets (only data seen relevant for assessing the reliability performance
are included);
iv. additional on-service data that an operator, on an individual basis, can consider useful for operation
and maintenance;
v. methods for analysing and applying RM data (however, principles for how to calculate some basic
reliability and maintenance parameters are included in the annexes).
2 Normative references
The following documents, in whole or in part, are normatively referenced in this document and are
indispensable for its application. For dated references, only the edition cited applies. For undated
references, the latest edition of the referenced document (including any amendments) applies.
ISO 20815:2008, Petroleum, petrochemical and natural gas industries — Production assurance and
reliability management
3 Terms and definitions

For the purposes of this document, the following terms and definitions apply.
NOTE Some derived RM parameters, which can be calculated from collected RM data covered by this
International Standard, are contained in Annex C. References to Annex C are given as deemed appropriate.
3.1
active maintenance time
duration of a maintenance action, excluding logistic delay
Note 1 to entry: Technical delays are included in the active maintenance time.
Note 2 to entry: See Figure 4 and Annex C for a more detailed description and interpretation of maintenance
times. See also ISO/TR 12489:2013, Figure 5.
Note 3 to entry: A maintenance action can be carried out while the item is performing a required function.
[SOURCE: IEC 60050-192:2015, 192-07-04, modified – Notes 2 and 3 to entry have been added.]
3.2
active repair time
effective time to achieve repair of an item
Note 1 to entry: See also ISO/TR 12489:2013, Figures 5 and 6.
Note 2 to entry: See also definition of “mean active repair time (MART)” in ISO/TR 12489:2013, 3.1.34, that is
defined as “expected active repair time”.
3.3
availability
ability to be in a state to perform as required
Note 1 to entry: See Annex C for a more detailed description and interpretation of availability.
Note 2 to entry: Further terms are given in ISO/TR 12489:2013.
3.4
boundary
interface between an item and its surroundings
2 © ISO 2016 – All rights reserved

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

3.5
common cause failures
failures of multiple items, which would otherwise be considered independent of one another, resulting
from a single cause
Note 1 to entry: Common cause failures can also be common mode failures.
Note 2 to entry: The potential for common cause failures reduces the effectiveness of system redundancy.
Note 3 to entry: It is generally accepted that the failures occur simultaneously or within a short time of each other.
Note 4 to entry: Components that fail due to a shared cause normally fail in the same functional mode. The term
common mode is therefore sometimes used. It is, however, not considered to be a precise term for communicating
the characteristics that describe a common cause failure.
Note 5 to entry: See also ISO/TR 12489:2013, 3.2.14 and 5.4.2.
Note 6 to entry: See also C.1.6
[SOURCE: IEC 60050-192:2015, 192-03-18, modified – Notes 3-6 to entry have been added.]
3.6
common mode failures
failures of different items characterized by the same failure mode
Note 1 to entry: Common mode failures can have different causes.
Note 2 to entry: Common mode failures can also be common cause failures (3.5).
Note 3 to entry: The potential for common mode failures reduces the effectiveness of system redundancy.
[SOURCE: IEC 60050-192:2015, 192-03-19, modified]

3.7
condition-based maintenance
CBM
preventive maintenance based on the assessment of physical condition
Note 1 to entry: The condition assessment can be by operator observation, conducted according to a schedule, or
by condition monitoring of system parameters.

3.8
corrective maintenance
maintenance carried out after fault detection to effect restoration
Note 1 to entry: Corrective maintenance of software invariably involves some modification
Note 2 to entry: See also ISO/TR 12489:2013, Figures 5 and 6, which illustrate terms used for quantifying
corrective maintenance.
[SOURCE: IEC 60050-192:2015, 192-06-06, modified – Note 2 to entry has been added.]

3.9
critical failure
failure of an equipment unit that causes an immediate cessation of the ability to perform a required
function
Note 1 to entry: Includes failures requiring immediate action towards cessation of performing the function, even
though actual operation can continue for a short period of time. A critical failure results in an unscheduled repair.
Note 2 to entry: See also definition of “critical dangerous failure” and “critical safe failure” in ISO/TR 12489:2013,
3.2.4 and 3.2.7, respectively.

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

3.10
cycle
operation and subsequent release/reset
[SOURCE: IEC 60050-444:2002, 444-02-11]
3.11
degraded failure
failure that does not cease the fundamental function(s), but compromises one or several functions
Note 1 to entry: The failure can be gradual, partial or both. The function can be compromised by any combination
of reduced, increased or erratic outputs. An immediate repair can normally be delayed but, in time, such failures
can develop into a critical failure if corrective actions are not taken.
3.12
demand
activation of the function (includes functional, operational and test activation)
Note 1 to entry: See C.1.3 for a more detailed description.
Note 2 to entry: Annex F.3 gives a list of safety critical equipment which are subject to periodic testing.
Note 3 to entry: See also relevant definitions in ISO/TR 12489:2013: “mean time to demand (MTTD)” is defined
in 3.1.38, “failure due to demand” is defined in 3.2.13, and “demand mode of operation safety system” is defined
in 3.3.1.
3.13
design life
planned usage time for the total system
Note 1 to entry: It is important not to confuse design life with the ‘mean time to failure’ (MTTF), which is
comprised of several items that might be allowed to fail within the design life of the system as long as repair or
replacement is feasible.
[SOURCE: ISO 20815:2008, 3.1.5]

3.14
detection method
method or activity by which a failure is discovered
Note 1 to entry: A categorization of detection methods (e.g. periodic testing or continuous condition monitoring)
is shown in Table B.4.
3.15
down state
unavailable state
internally disabled state
internal disabled state
<of an item> state of being unable to perform as required, due to internal fault, or preventive
maintenance
Note 1 to entry: Down state relates to unavailability of the item.
Note 2 to entry: The adjectives “down” or “unavailable” designate an item in a down state.
Note 3 to entry: See also Table 4 and Figure 4.
Note 4 to entry: See also ISO/TR 12489:2013, Figures 5 and 6.

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

3.16
down time
time interval during which an item is in a down state
Note 1 to entry: The down time includes all the delays between the item failure and the restoration of its service.
Down time can be either planned or unplanned (see Table 4).
Note 2 to entry: Mean downtime is in IEC 60050-192, 192-08-10, defined as the ‘expectation of the down time’.
[SOURCE: IEC 60050-192:2015, 192-02-21, modified - Notes 1 and 2 to entry have been added.]
3.17
downstream
business category most commonly used in the petroleum industry to describe post-production
processes
EXAMPLE Refining, transportation and marketing of petroleum products
Note 1 to entry: See also A.1.4 for further details.
3.18
equipment class
class of similar type of equipment units (e.g. all pumps)
Note 1 to entry: Annex A contains equipment-specific data for the equipment covered in this International
Standard.
3.19
equipment data
technical, operational and environmental parameters characterizing the design and use of an
equipment unit
3.20
equipment type
particular feature of the design which is significantly different from the other design(s) within the same
equipment class
3.21
equipment unit
specific equipment within an equipment class as defined by its boundary
Note 1 to entry: Equipment unit is given at level 6 of the equipment taxonomy classification with taxonomic levels
shown in Figure 3.
3.22
error
discrepancy between a computed, observed or measured value or condition and the true, specified or
theoretically correct value or condition
Note 1 to entry: An error within a system can be caused by failure of one or more of its components, or by the
activation of a systematic fault.
Note 2 to entry: An error can be caused by a faulty item, e.g. a computing error made by faulty computer
equipment.
Note 3 to entry: In this International Standard, error is also specifically used for software and human errors.

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

3.23
failure
<of an item> loss of ability to perform as required
Note 1 to entry: A failure of an item is an event that results in a fault of that item: see fault (3.22).
Note 2 to entry: A failure of an item is an event, as distinct from a fault of an item, which is a state [source:
ISO/TR 12489:2013].
Note 3 to entry: This concept as defined does not apply to items consisting of software only.
Note 4 to entry: See Table B.1, and also F.2 and F.3.
[SOURCE: IEC 60050-192:2015, 192-03-01, modified – Notes 2 through 4 to entry have been added.]
3.24
failure cause
root cause
set of circumstances that leads to failure
Note 1 to entry: A failure cause can originate during specification, design, manufacture, installation, operation or
maintenance of an item.
Note 2 to entry: See also B.2.3 and Table B.3, which define failure causes for all equipment classes.

3.25
failure data
data characterizing the occurrence of a failure event
Note 1 to entry: See also Table 6.
3.26
failure due to demand
failure occurring on demand
Note 1 to entry: See further details in ISO/TR 12489:2013, 3.2.13.
[SOURCE: ISO/TR 12489:2013, modified – Note 1 to entry has been added.]

3.27
failure frequency
unconditional failure intensity; conditional probability per unit of time that the item fails between t and
t + dt, provided that it was working at time 0
Note 1 to entry: Another term used for failure frequency is “rate of occurrence”.
Note 2 to entry: See also ISO/TR 12489:2013, 3.1.22 and 3.1.23.
[SOURCE: ISO/TR 12489:2013, modified – Notes 1 and 2 to entry have been added.]

3.28
failure impact
effect of a failure on an equipment’s function(s) or on the plant
Note 1 to entry: On the equipment level, failure impact can be classified in three classes (critical, degraded,
incipient); see definitions of “critical failure” (3.9), “degraded failure” (3.11) and “incipient failure” (3.40).
Classification of failure impact on taxonomy levels 3 to 5 (see Figure 3) is shown in Table 3.
Note 2 to entry: Classification of failure impact on taxonomy levels 4 and 5 (see Figure 3) is shown in Table 3. See
also C.1.10.

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

3.29
failure mechanism
process that leads to failure
Note 1 to entry: The process can be physical, chemical, logical, or a combination thereof.
Note 2 to entry: See also B.2.2 and Table B.2, which define failure causes for all equipment classes.

3.30
failure mode
manner in which failure occurs
Note 1 to entry: See also the tables in B.2.6, on the relevant failure modes which defines failure modes to be used
for each equipment class
Note 2 to entry: Analysis might require data collection to be established on different taxonomy levels, see Table 3.
3.31
failure on demand
failure likely to be observed when a demand occurs
Note 1 to entry: Failure on demand includes the failures occurred before the demand and the failures due to
the demand.
Note 2 to entry: See also C.6 on testing for hidden failures in safety systems.
Note 3 to entry: See also definition on failure due to demand (3.26).
Note 4 to entry: See ISO/TR 12489:2013, 3.1.15 for definition of the probability of failure on demand (PFD).
Note 5 to entry: Different failure modes are used to reflect failure on demand (see the tables in B.2.6).
[SOURCE: ISO/TR 12489:2013, modified – Notes 1 through 5 to entry have been added.]

3.32
failure rate
conditional probability per unit of time that the item fails between t and t + dt, provided that it has been
working over [0, t]
Note 1 to entry: See also definition of failure rate in ISO/TR 12489:2013, 3.1.18.
Note 2 to entry: See also definition of failure rate in IEC 60050-192:2015, 192-05-06 (instantaneous failure rate).
[SOURCE: ISO/TR 12489:2013, modified – Notes 1 and 2 to entry have been added.]

3.33
fault
inability to perform as required, due to an internal state
Note 1 to entry: A fault of an item results from a failure, either of the item itself, or from a deficiency in an earlier
stage of the life cycle, such as specification, design, manufacture or maintenance. See latent fault (3.44).
Note 2 to entry: A fault is often a result of a failure of the item itself but the state can exist without a failure (see
ISO 20815:2008, 3.1.14).
Note 3 to entry: See also ISO/TR 12489:2013, 3.2.2.

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

3.34
generic reliability data
reliability data covering families of similar equipment
Note 1 to entry: See Annex D.5 and Table D.5.
3.35
hidden failure
failure that is not immediately evident to operations and maintenance personnel
Note 1 to entry: Equipment failures that occurred at an earlier point of time, but were first observed at demand,
fall into this category. Such failures are first revealed when the relevant functionality is tested (activated).
Note 2 to entry: See definition with notes to entry in ISO/TR 12489:2013, 3.2.11.
Note 3 to entry: See also latent fault (3.44).
3.36
human error
discrepancy between the human action taken or omitted and that intended
EXAMPLE Performing an incorrect action; omitting a required action.
Note 1 to entry: Discrepancy with intention is considered essential in determining human error (see [303]).
Note 2 to entry: The term “human error” is often attributed in hindsight to a human decision, action or inaction
considered to be an initiator or contributory cause of a negative outcome such as loss or harm.
Note 3 to entry: In human reliability assessment human error is defined as any member of a set of human actions
or activities that exceeds some limit of acceptability, this being an out of tolerance action or failure to act where
the limits of performance are defined by the system (see [298]).
Note 4 to entry: See also IEC 62508:2010 for further details.
[SOURCE: IEC 60050-192:2015, 192-03-14, modified – Notes 1 through 5 to entry have been added.]
3.37
human fatigue
loss of physiological and psychological function as a result of extended wakefulness, heavy work,
excessive stimulation, illness or stress
Note 1 to entry: Human fatigue can be related to some of the failure causes in Table B.3, e.g. operating error.
[SOURCE: Moore-Ede M.:2009, modified – Note 1 to entry has been added.]

3.38
idle state
non-operating up state during non-required time
Note 1 to entry: The adjective “idle” designates an item in an idle state.
Note 2 to entry: In some applications, an item in an idle state has some functioning subsystems, and is therefore
considered to be operating.
Note 3 to entry: The non-operating time comprises the idle time, the stand-by time and the externally disabled time

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

3.39
idle time
time interval for which the item is in an idle state
[SOURCE: IEC 60050-192:2015, 192-02-15]
3.40
incipient failure
imperfection in the state or condition of an item so that a degraded or critical failure might (or might
not) eventually be the expected result if corrective actions are not taken
Note 1 to entry: The recording of incipient failure requires some criteria for when a fault of this nature requires
registration as opposed to a state/condition where no corrective actions are required.
3.41
indenture level
level of subdivision of an item from the point of view of maintenance action
3.42
integrity
ability of a barrier to function as required when needed
Note 1 to entry: See 3.1.2 in ISO/TR 12489:2013 for definition of safety integrity.
Note 2 to entry: There are different definitions of integrity: plant, asset, system, pipeline, well (see ISO 16530-1:—
, 2.73), mechanical, safety (see ISO/TR 12489:2013, 3.1.2), structural and technical.
3.43
item
subject being considered
Note 1 to entry: The item can be an individual part, component, device, functional unit, equipment, subsystem,
or system.
Note 2 to entry: The item may consist of hardware, software, people or any combination thereof.
Note 3 to entry: In this International Standard, the common term “item” is used on all taxonomy levels 6 to 9 in
Figure 3. See also 3.30, which defines a specific item level.

3.44
latent fault
undetected fault
<of an item> fault that has not become apparent
Note 1 to entry: A latent fault can eventually be revealed by preventive maintenance or by a system failure.

3.45
life cycle
series of identifiable stages through which an item goes, from its conception to disposal
Note 1 to entry: See 5.2 for the purpose of data collection.
Note 2 to entry: See also ISO 20815:2008, Table 2 for the purpose of production assurance.
[SOURCE: IEC 60050-192:2015, 192-01-09, modified – Notes 1-2 to entry have been added.]

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

3.46
logistic delay
delay, excluding administrative delay, incurred for the provision of resources needed for a maintenance
action to proceed or continue
Note 1 to entry: Logistic delays can be due to, for example, travelling to unattended installations, pending
arrival of spare parts, specialists, test equipment and information, and delays due to unsuitable environmental
conditions (e.g. waiting on weather).
Note 2 to entry: See also ISO/TR 12489:2013, Figure 5.
3.47
maintainability
<of an item> ability to be retained in, or restored to a state to perform as required, under given
conditions of use and maintenance
Note 1 to entry: Given conditions would include aspects that affect maintainability, such as: location for
maintenance, accessibility, maintenance procedures and maintenance resources.
Note 2 to entry: Maintainability can be quantified using appropriate measures. See IEC 60050-192:2015,
192-07-Maintainability and maintenance support: measures.
Note 3 to entry: See Annex C for a more detailed definition and interpretation of maintainability.

3.48
maintainable item
item that constitutes a part or an assembly of parts that is normally the lowest level in the equipment
hierarchy during maintenance
3.49
maintenance
combination of all technical and management actions intended to retain an item in, or restore it to, a
state in which it can perform as required
Note 1 to entry: See also definition of “maintenance” in ISO/TR 12489:2013, 3.4.1.

3.50
maintenance concept
definition of the maintenance objectives, line of maintenance, indenture levels, maintenance levels,
maintenance support, and their interrelationships
Note 1 to entry: The maintenance policy provides the basis for maintenance planning, determining supportability
requirements, and developing logistic support.

3.51
maintenance data
data characterizing the maintenance action planned or done
Note 1 to entry: Refers to the type of data dealt with in this International Standard.
Note 2 to entry: See also 9.6.3, Table 8.
Note 3 to entry: See also ISO/TR 12489:2013, Clause 3.

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

3.52
maintenance impact
effect of the maintenance on the plant or equipment’s function(s)
Note 1 to entry: On the equipment level, two classes of impact are defined: critical and non-critical. On plant level,
three classes are defined: total, partial or zero impact.
3.53
maintenance man-hours
accumulated duration of the individual maintenance times used by all maintenance personnel for a
given type of maintenance action or over a given time interval
Note 1 to entry: Maintenance man-hours are expressed in units of hours.
Note 2 to entry: As several people can work at the same time, man-hours are not directly related to other
parameters like the “mean time to repair” and “mean down time”.
3.54
maintenance plan
structured and documented set of tasks that include the activities, procedures, resources and the time
scale required to carry out maintenance
[SOURCE: EN 13306:2010, 2.5, modified – Note 1 to entry has been added.]

3.55
maintenance record
part of maintenance documentation that contains all failures, faults and maintenance information
relating to an item
Note 1 to entry: This record can also include maintenance costs, item availability or up time and any other data
where relevant.
3.56
maintenance supportability
supportability
<of an item> ability to be supported to sustain the required availability with a defined operational
profile and given logistic and maintenance resources
Note 1 to entry: Supportability of an item results from the inherent maintainability (3.47), combined with factors
external to the item that affect the relative ease of providing the required maintenance and logistic support.
Note 2 to entry: See Annex C for further details regarding the interpretation of maintainability.

3.57
mean cycles to failure
MCTF
expected number of cycles before the item fails
Note 1 to entry: See also C.3.4.
Note 2 to entry: Refer to definition of cycle (3.10).
3.58
mean number of cycles
expected number of cycles per time unit
Note 1 to entry: See also C.3.4.
Note 2 to entry: Refer to definition of cycle (3.10).

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

3.59
mean active repair time
MART
expected active repair time
Note 1 to entry: The MART is the expected effective time to repair.
Note 2 to entry: See also definition of active repair time
[SOURCE: ISO/TR 12489:2013, 3.1.34, modified – Note 2 to entry has been added.]

3.60
mean elapsed time between failures
METBF
expected elapsed time between successive failures of a repairable item
Note 2 to entry: IEC 60050-192:2015, 192-05-13 defines mean operating time between failures (abbreviated by
MTBF or MOTBF) as “expectation of the duration of the operating time between failures”.
Note 3 to entry: See also Annex C.
3.61
mean overall repairing time
MRT
expected time to achieve the following actions:
• the time spent before starting the repair; and,
• the effective time to repair; and,
• the time before the item is made available to be put back into operation
Note 1 to entry: See ISO/TR 12489:2013, Figures 5 to 7.
[SOURCE: ISO/TR 12489:2013, 3.1.33]

3.62
mean time to failure
MTTF
expected time before the item fails
Note 2 to entry: IEC 60050-192:2015, 192-05-11, defines MTTF as ”expectation of the operating time to failure”.
[SOURCE: ISO/TR 12489:2013, 3.1.29, modified – Notes 1 through 3 to entry have been added.]
3.63
mean time to repair
MTTR
expected time to achieve the repair of a failed item
Note 2 to entry: IEC 60050-192:2015 defines the term as “expectation of the time to restoration”.
Note 3 to entry: See also definition of ‘mean time to restoration’ in ISO/TR 12489:2013, 3.1.32.
Note 4 to entry: In actual life the detection time is either 0 (immediately revealed failures) or unknown (failures
detected by tests). Only MRT and MART can be collected.

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Note 5 to entry: See also C.5.5.2.
3.64
mean time to restoration
MTTRes
expected time to achieve the following actions:
a) the time to detect the failure; and,
b) the time spent before starting the repair; and,
c) the effective time to repair; and,
d) the time before the component is made available to be put back into operation
Note 2 to entry: See also ISO/TR 12489:2013, Figures 5 to 7.
Note 3 to entry: See also definition of “mean overall repairing time” and “mean active repair time” in
ISO/TR 12489:2013, 3.1.33 and 3.1.34, respectively.
Note 4 to entry: Mean time to restoration is abbreviated as MTTR in IEC 60050-192:2015, 192-07-23.
[SOURCE: ISO/TR 12489:2013, 3.1.32, modified – Notes 1 through 4 to entry have been added.]
3.65
midstream
business category involving the processing, storage and transportation sectors of the petroleum
industry
EXAMPLE Transportation pipelines, terminals, gas processing and treatment, LNG, LPG and GTL.
3.66
mobilization time
time to get all necessary resources available to execute maintenance
Note 1 to entry: Time spent before starting the maintenance is dependent on access to resources e.g. spare parts,
tools, personnel, subsea intervention and support vessels.
Note 2 to entry: See also ISO/TR 12489:2013, Figure 5 and Figure 7.
3.67
modification
combination of all technical and administrative actions intended to change an item
Note 1 to entry: Modification is not normally a part of maintenance, but is frequently performed by maintenance
personnel.
Note 2 to entry: Care is needed in the collection and analysis of RM data to distinguish between maintenance due
to failures and maintenance due to equipment modification.
Note 3 to entry: See also Table B.5.
3.68
non-critical failure
failure of an equipment unit that does not cause an immediate cessation of the ability to perform its
required function
Note 1 to entry: Non-critical failures can be categorized as “degraded” or “incipient” (see separate definitions on
degraded failure and incipient failure).

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Note 2 to entry: The term “critical” does not have the same meaning in ISO/TR 12489:2013 as in this International
Standard; see further details in F.4.1.
3.69
operating state
<of an item> state of performing as required
Note 2 to entry: In some applications, an item in an idle state is considered to be operating.

3.70
operating time
time interval during which an item is in an operating state
Note 1 to entry: The duration of operating time can be expressed in units appropriate to the item concerned, e.g.
calendar time, operating cycles, distance covered, and the units should always be clearly stated.
Note 2 to entry: Operating time includes actual operation of the equipment or the equipment being available for
performing its required function.
Note 4 to entry: The point in time of start-up time can differentiate depending on item subject to data collection,
and could start from time of installation, time of commissioning, or time of start of service/production/injection.
[SOURCE: IEC 60050-192:2015, 192-02-05, modified – Note 1 to entry has been amended and notes 2
through 4 to entry have been added.]
3.71
opportunity maintenance
maintenance of an item that is deferred or advanced in time and is performed when an unplanned
opportunity becomes available
3.72
performance objective
indicative level for the desired performance
Note 1 to entry: See further details in ISO 20815:2008, 3.1.32 and Annex F.
[SOURCE: ISO 20815:2008, 3.1.32, modified – Note 1 to entry has been added.]

3.73
performance requirement
required minimum level for the performance of a system
Note 1 to entry: Requirements are normally quantitative but can also be qualitative.
[SOURCE: ISO 20815:2008, 3.1.33, modified]

3.74
periodic test
proof test
planned operation performed at constant time intervals in order to detect the potential hidden failures
which can have occurred in the meantime
Note 1 to entry: The unsafe hidden failures of a safety system which are not detected by the diagnostic tests can
be detected by periodic tests. Such tests are named “proof tests” in the standards dealing with functional safety
(e.g. IEC 61508-4:2010, 3.8.5).
Note 2 to entry: See ISO/TR 12489:2013, 3.4.8, 3.4.9 and 3.4.10 for further details.

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

[SOURCE: ISO/TR 12489:2013, 3.4.8, modified – Note 2 to entry has been added.]

3.75
petrochemical
business category producing chemicals derived from petroleum and used as feedstock for the
manufacture of a variety of plastics and other related products
EXAMPLE Methanol and polypropylene.
Note 1 to entry: See A.1.4 for further details.
3.76
planned maintenance
scheduled maintenance
planned preventive maintenance
maintenance carried out in accordance with a specified time schedule
Note 1 to entry: Scheduled maintenance can identify the need for some corrective maintenance action.

3.77
predictive maintenance
PdM
maintenance based on the prediction of the future condition of an item estimated or calculated from a
defined set of historic data and known future operational parameters
Note 1 to entry: See 9.6, Table B.4 and B.5, and also Table E.3.
3.78
preventive maintenance
PM
maintenance carried out to mitigate degradation and reduce the probability of failure
Note 1 to entry: See also condition-based maintenance, and planned (scheduled) maintenance.
[SOURCE: IEC 60050-192:2015, 192-06-05]

3.79
random failure
failure, occurring in a random way
[SOURCE: ISO/TR 12489:2013]
3.80
redundancy
existence of more than one means for performing a required function of an item
Note 1 to entry: See C.1.2 for further details, where passive (cold), active (hot) standby and mixed redundancy
are described.
Note 2 to entry: Redundancy in IEC 61508 is called “fault tolerance”.
Note 3 to entry: IEC 60050-192:2015, 192-10-02 defines redundancy as “provision of more than one means for
performing a function”.
3.81
reliability
ability of an item to perform a required function under given conditions for a given time interval
Note 1 to entry: The term “reliability” is also used as a measure of reliability performance and can also be defined
as a probability; see ISO/TR 12489:2013, 3.1.8.

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Note 3 to entry: IEC 60050-192:2015, 192-01-24 defines reliability as “ability to perform as required, without
failure, for a given time interval, under given conditions”.
Note 4 to entry: The examples of equipment specific data in Annex A list technical and operational conditions
that can cause differences in equipment reliability performance.
3.82
reliability data
data for reliability, maintainability and maintenance support performance
[SOURCE: ISO 20815:2008, 3.1.42]
3.83
required function
function or combination of functions of an item that is considered necessary to provide a given service
3.84
safety critical equipment
equipment and items of permanent, temporary and portable equipment playing an important role in
safety systems/functions
3.85
safety critical failure
critical dangerous failures that are undetected
EXAMPLE Failures revealed by periodic tests.
Note 1 to entry: Critical dangerous failures are in ISO/TR 12489:2013, 3.2.4 defined as “dangerous failure leading
to the complete inhibition of the safety action (i.e., leading to a dangerous situation for the protected system)”.
Note 2 to entry: See also Annex F, and specifically F.4.1. regarding the indicator “failure fraction”.
[SOURCE: ISO/TR 12489:2013, notes 1 and 2 to entry have been added.]

3.86
safety system
system which is used to implement one or more safety functions
Note 1 to entry: Safety function is in ISO/TR 12489:2013, 3.1.6 defined as “function which is intended to achieve
or maintain a safe state, in respect of a specific hazardous event’.
Note 2 to entry: Systems with safety functions are defined in ISO/TR 12489:2013, Annex A. These systems are
also cross-related in Table A.3.
[SOURCE: ISO/TR 12489:2013, 3.1.7, modified – Notes 1 and 2 to entry have been added.]
3.87
software error
erroneous result produced by the use of software product
EXAMPLE Bad code in a computer program resulting in an error.
Note 1 to entry: See Table B.2 for list of relevant equipment failure mechanisms.
Note 2 to entry: See also ISO/TR 12489:2013, B.3, and Note 5 to entry 3.2.17 (Systematic failure) in
ISO/TR 12489:2013.
Note 3 to entry: See also definition of “error” (3.22).

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

3.88
subunit
assembly of items that provides a specific function that is required for the equipment unit within the
main boundary to achieve its intended performance
3.89
surveillance period
interval of time (calendar time) between the start date and end date of RM data collection
Note 1 to entry: See Annex C for further details.
Note 2 to entry: Surveillance time in data collection is a part of the total accumulated operating time (see
definition of operating time).
3.90
systematic failure
failure that consistently occurs under particular conditions of handling, storage or use
Note 1 to entry: See also Annex F.
Note 2 to entry: See also further details in ISO/TR 12489:2013, 3.2.17.
Note 3 to entry: Reliability data covers random and systematic failures as described in ISO/TR 12489:2013,
Figure B.5.
[SOURCE: ISO/TR 12489:2013, 3.2.17, modified – Notes to entry 1 to 3 have been added.]

3.91
tag number
unique code that identifies the equipment function and its physical location
Note 1 to entry: See Annex C for more detailed definitions and interpretations.
Note 2 to entry: Normally includes the system for which it belongs. The systems covered are shown in Table A.3.
Note 3 to entry: Also entitled “functional location” in some CMMIS.
Note 4 to entry: The equipment is allocated to a tag for only so long as it occupies that function and location. See
also footnote b in Table 5.
3.92
taxonomy
systematic classification of items into generic groups based on factors possibly common to several of
the items
3.93
trip
shutdown of machinery from normal operating condition to full stop
Note 1 to entry: Trip: The shutdown is activated automatically by the control/monitoring system:
• real trip The shutdown is effectuated as a result of a monitored (or calculated) value in the control system
exceeding a pre-set limit;
• spurious trip Unexpected shutdown resulting from failure(s) in the control/monitoring system or
error(s) imposed on the control/monitoring system originating from the environment or people.

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

3.94
turnaround
revision shutdown
planned event wherein an entire process unit is taken off stream for revamp or renewal
Note 1 to entry: See also ISO 20815:2008, Table G.1.
3.95
uncertainty
<of a quantity> inability to determine accurately what is or will be the true value of a quantity
Note 1 to entry: Uncertainty can have different meanings within reliability data collection and exchange. It can be
used as a measure of variability within a population, which is a type of uncertainty often referred to as stochastic
(or aleatory) uncertainty. Uncertainty can also have a subjective meaning (epistemic uncertainties).
3.96
up state
available state
<of an item> state of being able to perform as required
Note 1 to entry: Up state relates to the availability performance of the item.
3.97
up time
time interval during which an item is in an up state
Note 2 to entry: Mean up time is defined in IEC 60050-192:2015 as “expectation of the up time”.
3.98
upstream
business category of the petroleum industry involving exploration and production
EXAMPLE Offshore oil/gas production facility, drilling rig, intervention vessel.
4 Abbreviated terms
NOTE Some specific abbreviations used for equipment types (e.g. BOP) and units (e.g. kW) are not included
in this clause, but covered within each clause/sub-clause where they are used. There are also some abbreviations
used in the document (see e.g. Table D.1), which are not included in this clause.
CAPEX capital expenditure
CBM condition-based maintenance
CDF cumulative distribution function
CM condition monitoring
CMMIS computerized maintenance-management information system
DHSV downhole safety valve
ESD emergency shutdown

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

FTA fault tree analysis
FMECA failure mode, effect and criticality analysis
HIPPS high integrity pressure protection system
KPI key performance indicators
LCC life cycle cost
LEL lower explosive limit
MART mean active repair time
MCTF mean cycles to failure
MEG monoethylene glycol
MI maintainable item
METBF mean elapsed time between failures
MTTF mean time to failure
MTTR mean time to repair
MTTRes mean time to restoration
MUT mean up time
MDT mean down time
MRT mean overall repairing time
NCR non-compliance reporting
NDT non-destructive testing
OPEX operational expenditure
PdM predictive maintenance
PM preventive maintenance
PFD probability of failure on demand
P&ID piping and instrumentation diagram
PSD process shutdown
PSV pressure safety valve
QA quality assurance
QN quality notification
QRA quantitative risk assessment
RAM(S) reliability, availability, maintainability (and safety)
RBI risk-based inspection
RCM reliability-centred maintenance

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

RM reliability and maintenance
SCSSV surface-controlled subsurface safety valve
SIS safety instrumented system
SIF safety instrumented function
SIL safety integrity level
SSIV subsea isolation valve
TEG triethylene glycol
TTF time to failure
TTR time to repair
WO work order
5 Application
5.1 Equipment coverage

This International Standard is applicable to equipment types used in the petroleum, natural gas and
petrochemical industry including, but not limited to, equipment categories such as process equipment and
piping, safety equipment, subsea equipment, pipeline systems, loading/unloading equipment, downhole
well equipment and drilling equipment. The equipment can be permanently installed at the facilities
or used in conjunction with installation, maintenance or modification phases. The principles of this
International Standard can also be relevant for the pre-production phases, e.g. how experience is gained
and systematized during technology qualification, fabrication and associated testing (QN, NCR, etc.).
Annex A contains examples of how this International Standard should be used for specific equipment
types. The users are expected to define taxonomies for additional equipment classes as needed based
on the principles given by this International Standard.
Some principles for RM data collection at equipment level can be applied for monitoring and analysing
performance at plant and system levels constituted by various equipment classes. However, facility-
and plant‑performance monitoring also requires other types of data not covered by this International
Standard.
5.2 Time periods

This International Standard is applicable to data collected during the operational life cycle of
equipment, including installation, start-up, operation, maintenance and modification. Laboratory
testing, manufacturing and fabrication phases are not specifically addressed in this International
Standard. Many of the principles in this standard can however be used by equipment manufacturer
to collect and systematize failures occurring on equipment during fabrication and detected during
acceptance testing, e.g. for non-compliance reporting (NCR). In addition, it is, emphasized that analysis
of relevant historic RM data shall be used in the dimensioning of such testing prior to operation.
Technology qualification and development require also, and benefit from, past reliability knowledge to
reveal potential improvement areas (see 8.3).
5.3 Users of this International Standard

This International Standard is intended for users such as the following.

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Installation/plant/facility: Operating facility, e.g. maintenance and engineering personnel logging

equipment failures or recording maintenance events into facility infor-
mation management systems.
Owner/operator/company: Reliability staff or others creating (generic) equipment reliability data-

bases for equipment located in company facilities; reliability engineers
requiring data or maintenance engineers preparing maintenance plans.
This International Standard provides a format for analysing any RM
data element as appropriate associated with an analysis (as described
in Annex D); e.g. root-cause analysis, analysis of historic performance,
prediction of future performance, use in a design process, etc.
Industry: Groups or companies exchanging equipment RM data or joint industry

reliability database project co-operation. Improved communication of
equipment reliability performance requires the principles in this Inter-
national Standard to be adhered to (as a “reliability language”).
Manufacturers/designers: Use of RM data to improve equipment designs and learn from past ex-
perience.
Authorities/regulatory bodies: A format for communicating any RM data on an individual event basis or
as otherwise required from the operating company. This International
Standard is, for example, vital for authorities addressing safety equipment
reliability.
Consultant/contractor: A format and quality standard for data collection projects and analyses
of safety, reliability or maintenance aspects commonly performed by
contractors/consultants for the asset owners (e.g. oil companies).
While others, such as developers of computer-maintenance-management software, can find this
International Standard to be useful, the primary users are expected to be owners and/or operators
who should find the data to be collected readily available within their operating facilities.
5.4 Limitations
Through analysis of data, RM parameters can be determined for use in design, operation and
maintenance. This International Standard does not provide detailed descriptions of methods for
analysing data. However, it does give recommendations for defining and calculating some of the vital
RM parameters (Annex C) and reviews the purposes and benefits of some analytical methodologies
for which data can be used. Such analytical methodologies and application areas can be found in other
International Standards, and relevant International Standards have been exploited for the purpose of
identifying and co-ordinating the RM data requirements (see Annex D).
Although cost data are important in establishing priorities for improvement opportunities and are
frequently included in the analysis of reliability performance, cost data (parameters) are not specifically
included in this International Standard. Most facilities track the costs of maintenance (man-hours),
equipment replacements, capital improvements, business interruption and environmental events. These
data may be maintained in the computerized maintenance management information system (CMMIS).
When costs are required for setting the analysis of reliability in an economic perspective or performing
calculation of life cycle costing, the user should obtain that information from the appropriate sources
within the operating facility or company.
Due to the variety of uses for RM data, requirements for data in a data collection programme should be
adapted to the expected application(s). Credible analysis results are directly related to the quality of
the data collected. While this International Standard does not specify detailed quality measures, data
quality control and assurance practices are outlined to provide guidance for the user.
The technical information gathered to describe the equipment and its location within a plant, facility
or system is, in this International Standard, not meant to be exhaustive and complete like the overall

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

plant technical information system, but rather used to identify and explain variables for the purposes
of the analytical functions. Use of common technical terms is, however, recommended and linked to life
cycle information-system and equipment technical standards. Even though this International Standard
describes how to record maintenance activities for the purpose of equipment reliability and availability
optimization, this International Standard is not meant to act as a standard to specify in detail how
maintenance programmes are documented.
The technical status of equipment and degradation of equipment performance can be recorded through
condition-monitoring systems, which requires details beyond the equipment data covered in this
International Standard. However, this International Standard contains RM data elements that can be
used in such condition-monitoring systems.
This International Standard is not meant to be a software specification of such database systems but
can, in general, be complied with to facilitate and improve the industry RM data exchange.
5.5 Exchange of RM data

A major objective of this International Standard is to make it possible to exchange RM data in a common
format within a company, between companies, within an industrial arena or in the public domain.
Measures for ensuring the quality of data are discussed in Clause 7. Some additional aspects to be
considered with respect to exchange of RM data are the following.
• Detailed versus processed data: Data can be exchanged on various levels from the actual failure
and maintenance records to data on a more aggregated level. For example, if only the number of
failures of a certain category is required, it is necessary to exchange only the failure quantity for
these failures. This sort of information is commonly given in public data sources (e.g. reliability data
books). For exchanging data on the overall performance of a unit or a plant (benchmarking), the so-
called key performance indicators (KPI) may be used. Examples of KPIs are given in Annex E.
• Data sensitivity: Some data fields can be of a certain sensitive character and/or possibly be used
for purposes for which they were not intended (e.g. to obtain commercial advantages, non-qualified
communication of plant/equipment experience). To avoid this, two options can be utilized:
— “blank” such data;
— make such data anonymous.
The latter can be achieved by defining some anonymous codes representing the data element where
only a few authorized persons know the conversion between the codes and the actual data. This is
recommended if these data fields are essential for the data taxonomy.
It is important to recognize the potential commercial sensitivity of exchanging reliability and other
performance data. Competition law prohibits “collective boycott” agreements or arrangements between
competitors where competitors agree not to deal with certain suppliers/contractors. A benchmarking
study where competitors exchange information so that suppliers/contractors can be “ranked” incurs
a real risk that the parties to the benchmarking study will arrive at a common conclusion not to use
particular suppliers/contractors and this should be avoided. Collective boycott arrangements are
violations of competition law and can leave individuals and companies exposed to criminal actions.
It is necessary, therefore, that any exchange complies with the national and international laws governing
anti-competitive practices. Hence, it is recommended that prior to embarking upon such an exercise,
clarification of the local guidelines is sought to avoid possible infringement.
• Data security: Systematized operational-equipment performance (i.e. quality RM data that have
a cost to obtain) is an asset generally of great value, and data not open to the public domain shall
be treated with appropriate security measures to avoid misuse and not affect the reputation of
associated parties. This relates to storage of data (e.g. safe location), transmission of data (e.g.
Internet), access to data for authorized users (e.g. password), etc.

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

• Value of data: In some cases, it is useful to define a “value measure” for an amount of reliability
data. This can be the case in joint industry projects where several contributors are supposed to
contribute with an equal “value” of data. Two approaches may be used:
— calculating the actual cost of collecting the data;
— value the data by combining the population with aggregated surveillance time.
6 Benefits of RM data collection and exchange

Although many plant owners have improved the availability of their operating facilities, lost production
and maintenance costs from poor equipment reliability still represent a high annual industrial cost.
Even though most failure events are not catastrophic, increased clarity as to the causes of failure events
is key to prioritizing and implementing corrective maintenance actions. This results in sustainable
improvements in reliability, leading to improved profitability and safety.
Benefits of reliability data analysis are wide-ranging, including the opportunity to optimize the timing
of equipment overhauls and inspections, the content of maintenance procedures, as well as the life cycle
costing of sparing and upgrade programmes in operating facilities world-wide. Other benefits resulting
from the collection and analysis of RM data include improvements in decision-making, reductions in
catastrophic failures, reduced environmental impacts, more effective benchmarking and trending
of performance, and increased process unit availability. The data collection and exchange principles
outlined in this International Standard require the production assurance given in ISO 20815:2008,
Table 2 (e.g. “performance data tracking and analysis”).
Improvement of equipment reliability is dependent on experiences from real-life usage. The collection,
analysis and feedback of performance data to equipment designers and manufacturers are, therefore,
paramount. Also, when purchasing new equipment, RM data are key parameters to take into account.
In order to merge data from several equipment units, plants or across an industry arena, it is required
that parties agree on what data are useful to collect and exchange and that those data are contained in
a compatible format.
Recently, several nations with oil and gas industries have issued regulations requiring the companies
to have a system for the collection, analysis and implementation of corrective and preventive actions,
including improvement of systems and equipment. Some of these regulations refer to International
Standards, including this International Standard.
Collecting RM data is costly and therefore it is necessary that this effort be balanced against the
intended use and benefits. Commonly one would select equipment for RM data collection where the
consequences of failures have an impact on safety, production, environment or high repair/replacement
cost as indicated below.
A typical feedback loop for potential uses of data and describing a continuous improvement process is
shown in Figure 1.

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Figure 1 — Typical feedback of analysis from collected reliability and maintenance data
Industry and business value elements of utilizing this International Standard are summarised below:
• economic aspects:
— cost-effective design to optimize CAPEX,
— cost-effective operation to optimize OPEX,
— improved profitability (reduced revenue loss),
— LCC/whole-life management,
— reduced cost of insurance;
• general aspects:
— “being able to operate” (operatorship license),
— life extension of capital equipment,
— improved product quality,
— better (data-based) equipment purchase,
— better resource planning;
• safety and environmental aspects:
— improved personnel safety,
— reduced catastrophic failures,
— reduced environmental impact,
— improvement of safety procedures and regulations (e.g. extend test interval based on RM
performance),
— compliance with authority requirements;
• analytical:
— higher-quality data,
— larger population of data,
— improved decision-making,

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

— reduced uncertainty in decision-making,

— qualified benchmarking,
— exchange of experience in industrial collaboration,
— creation of a common “reliability” language (understanding, various disciplines),
— verification of analysis techniques,
— better predictability,
— basis for a risk-based inspection and reliability-availability-maintainability studies.
7 Quality of data
7.1 Obtaining quality data
7.1.1 Definition of data quality
Confidence in the collected RM data, and hence any analysis, is strongly dependent on the quality of the
data collected. High-quality data are characterized by the following:
a) completeness of data in relation to specification;
b) compliance with definitions of reliability parameters, data types and formats;
c) accurate input, transfer, handling and storage of data (manually or electronic);
d) sufficient population and adequate surveillance period to give statistical confidence;
e) relevance of the data to the need of the users.
7.1.2 Planning measures
The following measures shall be emphasized before the data collection process starts.
— Define the objective for collecting the data in order to collect data relevant for the intended use.
Examples of analyses where such data may be used are quantitative risk analysis (QRA); reliability,
availability and maintainability analysis (RAM); reliability-centred maintenance (RCM); life cycle
cost (LCC); safety integrity level (SIL) analysis. (See also Annex D.)
— Investigate the source(s) of the data to ensure that relevant data of sufficient quality are available.
Sources cover inventory/technical equipment information, RM event data and associated plant
impacts.
— Define the taxonomical information to be included in the database for each equipment unit (see
Clause 8).
— Identify the installation date, population and operating period(s) for the equipment from which
data can be collected.
— Define the boundaries for each equipment class, indicating what RM data are to be collected (see
Clause 8).
— Apply a uniform definition of failure and a method of classifying failures (see Clause 9).
— Apply a uniform definition of maintenance activities and a method of classifying maintenances (see
Clause 9).

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

— Define the checks used in data quality verification (see 7.1.3 and 7.1.9). At a minimum, the following
shall be verified.
1) The origin of the data is documented and traceable.
2) The data originate from similar equipment type, technology and operating conditions.
3) The equipment is relevant for the purpose (e.g. not outdated models).
4) The data comply with definitions and interpretation rules (e.g. definition of failure).
5) Recorded failures are within the defined equipment boundary and surveillance period.
6) The information is consistent (e.g. consistency between failure modes and failure impact).
7) Data are registered in the correct format.
8) Sufficient data are collected to give acceptable statistical confidence, e.g. not biased by outliers.
(See recommendations for calculating confidence limits in C.3.2.)
9) Operating and maintenance personnel are consulted to validate the data.
— Define a priority level for the completeness of data by a suitable method. One method of weighting
the importance of the different data to be collected is by using three classes of importance in
accordance with the following classification:
— HIGH: compulsory data (coverage ≈ 100 %)
— MEDIUM: highly desirable data (coverage > 85 %)
— LOW: desirable data (coverage > 50 %)
— Define the level of detail of RM data reported and collected and link it closely to the production and
safety importance of the equipment. Base prioritization on safety, production performance and/or
other severity measures.
— Prepare a plan for the data collection process (see 7.2), e.g. schedules, milestones, data collection
sequence for installations and equipment units, surveillance periods to be covered (see 8.3.1), etc.
— Plan how the data will be assembled and reported and devise a method for transferring the data
from the data source to the reliability data bank using any suitable method (see 7.2).
— Train, motivate and organize the data collection personnel, e.g. interpretation of sources,
equipment know-how, software tools, involvement of operating personnel and equipment experts,
understanding/ experience in analysis application of RM data, etc. Ensure that they have an in-
depth understanding of the equipment, its operating conditions, this International Standard and the
requirements given for data quality.
— Make a plan for quality assurance of the data collection process and its deliverables. This shall,
as a minimum, include procedures for quality control of the data and recording and correcting
deviations (see 7.1.3).
— It is recommended to carry out a cost-benefit analysis of the data collection by running a pilot
exercise before the main data collection phase is started and to revise the plan if necessary.
— Review the planning measures after a period of using the system (see 7.2.3).
7.1.3 Verification of quality
During and after the data collection exercise, analyse the data to verify consistency, reasonable
distributions, proper codes and correct interpretations in accordance with the planning measures (see
7.1.2). This verification-of-quality process shall be documented and may vary depending on whether

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

the data collection is for a single plant or involves several company or industry facilities. When merging
individual databases, it is imperative that each data record has a unique identification.
Assess the quality of data being collected as early as feasible in the data collection process in accordance
with the planning measures (see 7.1.2). A suitable procedure is an assessment by the data collector, who
shall be provided with guidelines for what quality measures should be focused on in accordance with
the planning measures. The main objective of this early assessment is to look for any problems that
require the planning measures to be immediately revised to avoid unacceptable data being collected.
Personnel other than those having collected the data shall verify the quality of each individual data
record and the overall reliability pattern reflected by the sum of individual events in accordance with
the planning measures (see 7.1.2).
7.1.4 Limitations and problems
Some of the problems and limitations to be aware of, when obtaining quality data are summarized in
Table 1.
Table 1 — Problems, limitations and storage

Issue Challenges
Source The data source can lack the required data and the source information can be spread over
several different systems (computers, files, books, drawings). It is recommended to carefully
evaluate this aspect in the planning measures (see 7.1.2) in order to assess data quality, col-
lection method and cost.
Interpretation Commonly, data are compiled from the source into a standardized format (database). In this
process, the source data can be interpreted differently by various individuals. Correct defini-
tions, training and quality checks can reduce this problem (see 7.1.2).
Data format The use of coded fields is fundamental to ensure data collection efficiency and consistency of
data entered (e.g. correct coding of a manufacturer). Free text should, however, be included in
addition to codes to describe unexpected or unclear situations
Data collection Most data needed for this category of data collection are today stored in computerized systems
method (e.g. CMMIS). By using state-of-the-art conversion algorithms and software, it is possible to
transfer data among different computer databases in a (semi-)automated way, thereby saving cost.
Competence and Data collection in the “normal” manual way can become a repetitive and tedious exercise.
motivation Therefore, take care to employ people with sufficient know-how to do the jobs, avoid using
personnel with low competence/experience, as data quality can suffer, and find measures to
stimulate the RM data collection staff, e.g. by training, doing plant visits and involving them
in data analyses and application of results. Other examples are feedback on data collection
results, involvement in QA processes, relevant information fields in facility CMMIS to stimulate
reporting quality, etc.
7.2 Data collection process
7.2.1 Data sources
The facility CMMIS constitutes the main source of RM data. The quality of the data that can be retrieved
from this source is dependent on the way RM data are reported in the first place. Reporting of RM data
according to this International Standard shall be allowed for in the facility CMMIS, thereby providing a
more consistent and sound basis for transferring RM data to equipment RM databases. Other sources
of information can be spread across several different systems (computers, files, books, drawings), for
example, feedback on data collection results, involvement in QA processes. Adequate or proper use of
information fields in facility CMMIS will stimulate reporting quality, etc.
Such data collection creates reliability data sources for various applications, as classified in Table D.5:
1) generic data;
2) operator/company specific data;

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

3) manufacturer data;
4) expert judgement;
5) human error data.
7.2.2 Data collection methods
The typical data collection process consists of compiling data from different sources into one database
where the type and the format of the data are pre-defined. The most common method is as follows.
a) Address all the data sources that are available, and extract the relevant “raw” data into an
intermediate storage. If the information is contained in a computerized database, use any suitable
methods for extracting the relevant information; viz. extraction of targeted information by specific
software methods or printing reports with desired information.
b) Interpret this information and translate it into the type and format desired for the target database.
In most cases, this is done by manual interpretation.
c) Transfer the data from the source(s) to the reliability data bank using any suitable method. Suitable
“off-the-shelf” software can be used to transfer data from one database to another with the desired
“language” conversion done by software algorithms. This is only feasible as long as a conversion
algorithm, sufficiently robust to make a confident conversion, can be defined. These methods do
require some extra effort upfront and, therefore, are only cost-effective for large quantities of
data or repetitive data collection of the same category. It may also be used for maintenance when
transferring data from one CMMIS to another.
d) Data collection methods significantly impact the cost-benefit analysis for data collection and shall,
therefore, be carefully planned and tested before the main data collection process is started.
7.2.3 Organization and training
Data collection may be done either within the company using internal resources or as a task done by
more specialized companies or personnel. As data are, by nature, “historical”, it evidently takes some
time before sufficient data are accumulated to draw valid conclusions based on statistics only. The
cost-benefit analysis for collecting data can take some time to become evident but annual tracking of
equipment performance captures a useful history.
Data collection can require skills from several categories, viz. IT, reliability/statistics, maintenance,
operation and data collection. Key personnel shall be familiar, in particular, with the data collection
concept and any specific software for the data collection activity, and, to a reasonable extent, know the
technical, operational and maintenance aspects of the equipment for which data are collected. Proper
training of key personnel on these issues is necessary in order to obtain quality data. The personnel
who check the quality of the data shall be different from those performing the data collection. Data
collectors shall, as a pre-requisite, know this International Standard and should give feedback as
appropriate.
Before data collection starts, it is useful to do a pilot exercise to check the available population, the
quality of source information and the feasibility of the data collection methods. This serves as a model
for what can be achieved within a given time and budget.
A system for dealing with deviations encountered in the data collection process, such as ambiguous
definitions, lack of interpretation rules, inadequate codes, etc., shall be established and problems solved
as soon as possible. It can be a major task to correct corrupt data after many data have been collected.
A data collection exercise shall also provide feedback by summarizing and evaluating all quality lessons
learned during the planning and execution of the data collection effort. Recommendations shall then be
fed back to the relevant personnel for improvement on definitions, maintenance systems (e.g. CMMIS-
systems) and the data collection process and personnel.

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

8 Equipment boundary, taxonomy and time definitions
8.1 Boundary description

A clear boundary description is imperative for collecting, merging and analysing RM data from different
industries, plants or sources. It also facilitates communication between operators and equipment
manufacturers. Otherwise, the merging and analysis is based on incompatible data.
For each equipment class, a boundary shall be defined indicating what RM data are to be collected. This
may be given by using a figure, a text definition or a combination of both.
An example of a boundary diagram is shown in Figure 2 and an example of a definition to accompany
the diagram is as follows:
EXAMPLE The boundary applies to both general-service and fire-fighting pumps. Inlet and outlet valves and
suction strainer are not within the boundary. Furthermore, the pump drivers along with their auxiliary systems
are not included. Driver units are recorded as separate inventories (electric motor, gas turbine or combustion
engine) and it is important that the failures on the driver, if recorded, be recorded as part of the driver units. A
number in the pump inventory gives a reference to the appropriate driver inventory.
Figure 2 — Example of boundary diagram (pump)
Due attention shall be paid to the location of the instrument elements. In the above example, the central
control and monitoring items are typically included within the “control and monitoring” subunit, while
individual instrumentation (trip, alarm, control) is typically included within the appropriate subunit,
e.g. lubrication system.
The boundary diagram shall show the main lower-level items and the interfaces to the surroundings.
Additional textual description shall, when needed for clarity, state in more detail what shall be
considered inside and outside the relevant boundary (see the Example associated with Figure 2 where
e.g. the driver of the pump is outside the boundary). When referring to this International Standard, it
is vital that any deviation from the boundaries given in this International Standard, or new boundaries
not given by this International Standard, be specified.

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Boundaries shall avoid overlapping among different equipment classes. For example, when collecting
data on instruments as separate equipment units, one shall avoid including those instruments that are
also included within the boundaries of other equipment units on which data are being collected. Some
overlapping can be difficult to avoid; however, such case(s) shall be identified and treated appropriately
during the data analyses.
Recommended boundary diagrams for some selected equipment units are given in Annex A.
8.2 Taxonomy
The taxonomy is a systematic classification of items into generic groups based on factors possibly
common to several of the items (location, use, equipment subdivision, etc.). A classification of relevant
data to be collected in accordance with this International Standard is represented by a hierarchy as
shown in Figure 3. Definitions of each segment are provided below, in addition to examples of different
business streams and equipment types, as illustrated in Table 2.
Figure 3 — Taxonomy classification with taxonomic levels

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Table 2 — Taxonomy examples

Main Taxonomic Taxonomy Definition Examples
category level hierarchy
Use/location 1 Industry Type of main industry Petroleum, natural gas, petrochemical
data 2 Business Type of business or process- Upstream (E and P), midstream,
category ing stream downstream (refining), petrochemical
3 Installation Type of facility Oil/gas production, transportation,
category drilling, LNG, refinery, petrochemical
(see Table A.1)
4 Plant/Unit Type of plant/unit Platform, semi-submersible, hydroc-
category racker, ethylene cracker, polyethylene,
acetic acid plant, methanol plant (see
Table A.2)
5 Section/ Main section/system of the Compression, natural gas, liquefaction,
System plant vacuum gas oil, methanol regener-
ation, oxidation section, reaction
system, distillation section, tanker
loading system (see Table A.3)
Equipment 6 Equipment Class of similar equipment Heat exchangers, compressors, piping,
subdivision class/unit units. Each equipment class pumps, gas turbines, subsea wellhead
contains comparable equip- and X-mas trees, lifeboats, extruders,
ment units (e.g. compressors). subsea BOPs (see Table A.4)
7 Subunit A subsystem necessary for the Lubrication subunit, cooling subunit,
equipment unit to function control and monitoring, heating sub-
unit, pelletizing subunit, quenching
subunit, refrigeration subunit, reflux
subunit, distributed control subunit
8 Component/ The group of parts of the Cooler, coupling, gearbox, lubrication
Maintainable equipment unit that are com- oil pump, instrument loop, motor,
item (MI) a monly maintained (repaired/ valve, filter, pressure sensor, temper-
restored) as a whole ature sensor, electric circuit
9 Part b A single piece of equipment Seal, tube, shell, impeller, gasket,
filter plate, bolt, nut, etc.
a For some types of equipment, there might not be a MI; e.g. if the equipment class is piping, there might
be no MI, but the part could be “elbow”.
b While this level can be useful in some cases, it is considered optional in this International Standard.
Levels 1 to 5 represent a high-level categorization that relates to industries and plant application
regardless of the equipment units (see level 6) involved. This is because an equipment unit (e.g. pump)
can be used in many different industries and plant configurations and, for analysing the reliability of
similar equipment, it is necessary to have the operating context. Taxonomic information on these levels
(1 to 5) shall be included in the database for each equipment unit as “use/location data” (see Table 2).
Levels 6 to 9 are related to the equipment unit (inventory) with the subdivision in lower indenture levels
corresponding to a parent-child relationship. This International Standard focuses on the equipment
unit level (level 6) for the collection of RM data and also indirectly on the lower indenture items, such
as subunits and components. The number of subdivision levels for the collection of RM data depends on
the complexity of the equipment unit and the use of the data. A single instrument might need no further
breakdown, while several levels can be required for a large compressor. For data used in availability
analyses, the reliability at the equipment-unit level can be the only data required, while an RCM analysis
and root-cause analysis can require data on failure mechanism at the component/maintainable item, or
parts, level. This International Standard does not specifically address level 9.
It is necessary that RM data be related to a certain level within the taxonomic hierarchy in order to be
meaningful and comparable. For example, a failure mode shall be related to the equipment unit, while
a failure mechanism shall be related to the lowest achievable level in the item hierarchy. Table 3 gives
guidance on this.

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Table 3 — Reliability and maintenance parameters in relation to taxonomy levels

Recorded RM data Hierarchy level a
4 5 6 7 8
Plant/Unit Section/ Equipment Subunit Component/
System unit Maintaina-
ble item
Impact of failure on safety X b
Impact of maintenance on safety X
Impact of failure on operations X (X) c
Impact of maintenance with regard X (X)
to operations
Failure impact on equipment X (X) (X)
Failure mode (X) X (X) (X)
Failure mechanism (X) (X) X
Failure cause (X) X
Detection method (X) X (X) (X)
Subunit failed X
Component/maintainable item failed X
Down time (X) (X) X
Active maintenance time X (X) (X)
a See Figure 3.
b X = default.
c (X) = possible alternatives.
Regarding items on different hierarchy levels, many items may be found on different levels in the
taxonomic hierarchy, depending on the context or the size of the item. For instance, valve and pump
are equipment classes, but may also be maintainable items in a gas turbine. The valve is typically a
maintainable item subsea and an equipment unit topside. Due care should be taken to avoid double-
counting failure events when RM data are collected on such equipment.
For some systems it may be relevant to apply RM data collection also on Level 5 (system level, see Table
A.3). Although many of the same principles as used for equipment data collection on Level 6-8 may
apply, these should be used carefully as there could be large differences between the individual systems
selected for the data collection.
8.3 Timeline issues
8.3.1 Surveillance and operating period
The equipment surveillance period is typically used as the time period for determining time-related
reliability parameters, e.g. MTTF, component life, etc. For many equipment units, the operating, or
in-service, period is less than the surveillance period due to maintenance, sparing of equipment or
intermittent operation of the equipment (e.g. tank-transfer pumps).
When equipment is in an idle state or in “hot” standby, i.e. being ready for immediate operation
when started, it is considered to be operating (or “in-service”) by the definitions in this International
Standard. Equipment on standby, which would require some activities to be performed before being
ready for operation (“cold” standby) is not considered to be in an operating state. The various time-
period definitions are illustrated in Table 4.
Data may also be collected for actual preventive maintenance if one wants the full picture of down
time caused by all maintenance actions (see Table 4). Periods when equipment is deliberately taken

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

out of service for an extended period, or is being modified, are not considered to be relevant for data
collection.
The surveillance period may also cover several states in the life of the item. For example, in the subsea
environment, equipment can be installed and functioning, i.e. a barrier to the escape of downhole
hydrocarbons, but the well might not start producing for several months. Failures can occur on the
equipment during this phase, requiring it to be repaired with a potential delay to start-up. Likewise,
equipment can fail during a refinery turnaround, which is not a “production” phase, again requiring
repair and possible delay to start-up.
Table 4 — Timeline definitions

Total time h
Down time Up time
Planned down time Unplanned down time Operating time Non-operat-

ing time
Preventive Other planned Corrective maintenance Other
maintenance outages unplanned
outages
Prepar- Active Reserve a “Modifica- Unde- Prepara- Repair Shut-down, Run- Start- Run- Hot Idle Cold
ation preventive tion b tected tion and/ (item being operational down up ning e stand- stand-
and/or mainte- faults g or delay worked on) c problems/ by by
delay nance restrictions
(item etc. d
being
worked
on) f
a Means that item is available for operation, but not required for some time. Does not include items considered as “spare parts” or items taken
out of service on a more permanent basis.
b Modification can change the reliability characteristics of an item and can, therefore, require that the collection of reliability data for the
surveillance period be terminated before the modification and be re-started with a new surveillance period after the modification.
c Includes fault diagnosis, repair action and testing (as required).
d Shutdown of machinery (trip and manual shutdown), see definition of trip (3.93) and also C.1.8.
e Running is the active operational period for equipment in oil & gas production systems. For drilling and workover systems, this is not sufficient
since there are many different operational phases. The operational phases for drilling could include: Running, drilling, tripping, set casing; and, the
phases for workover could include: well equipment removal, replace completion string, replace casing string, and various workover activities.
f Includes testing
g It is difficult to determine downtime associated with undetected faults. These faults are eventually revealed by test or demand.
h See also ISO/TR 12489:2013, Figures 5, 6, and 7.
8.3.2 Data collection periods
Depending on use and feasibility, data may be recorded for the whole equipment lifetime or for shorter
intervals. The latter is common due to both cost and obtaining the data within a reasonable time frame.
As shown in Annex C, the lifetime of many items is assumed to follow the so-called “bathtub” curve.
If only the RM data for the steady-state operating part of an item are required, data collection shall
start after the burn-in period is considered to have ended. The length of this period can vary among
equipment categories from no burn-in to several months. Data recorded during the steady-state
operating period often follows, or is assumed to follow, the exponential lifetime curve (constant failure
rate). For some equipment, it is also useful and essential to collect data from “day one” in order to
accumulate experience on burn-in failures. In this case, data collected from what may be considered as
an initial burn-in period shall be distinguished from data collected from the subsequent steady-state
operating period.

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

The length of the data collection period shall be balanced against the expected failure rate, size of
population and access to data. For equipment of high importance (safety) and equipment where one
knows that few failures normally occur (subsea), a longer surveillance period is desirable (e.g. the whole
lifetime history). It is even useful to collect data for equipment with no failures during the surveillance
period because, by observing no failures in a given period, it is possible to estimate the failure rate by
“censoring” the data. Methods within statistics shall be used to estimate the confidence of the data
(upper/lower confidence limits), as shown in Annex C.
While the surveillance period is just an interval in the calendar time between two specific times and
can, therefore, be defined exactly, operating time is not always that straightforward to determine. For
some rotating equipment, the operating time is recorded on a counter and can be read exactly. For
other equipment, this might not be true. Hence, it is often necessary to estimate operating time based
on knowledge from the operating and/or maintenance staff. As the “true” failure rate for an item shall
be calculated based on actual operation, high priority should be given to collecting or estimating this
parameter.
8.3.3 Maintenance times
Two main calendar times during maintenance are recommended to be collected, viz. down time and
active repair time. The difference between the two is illustrated in Figure 4. For further information
on breakdown of the downtimes, see also ISO/TR 12489:2013, Figures 5 to 7, and ISO 20815:2008,
Figure I.5.
Figure 4 — Maintenance times
Down time includes the calendar time from the time the equipment is stopped for a repair until it is
reconnected to its intended service after having been tested.
Active maintenance time” is the “active corrective maintenance time” then see ISO/TR 12489:2013,
Figure 5, where “active corrective maintenance time” consists of the “active repair time” (MRT) and the
“technical delay. Active maintenance time is the calendar time during which maintenance work on the
item is actually performed. Hence, active repair time cannot normally be greater than the down time.
However, exceptionally, active repair time can be greater than down time if the maintenance can be
performed with the equipment unit operating. Note that the operational time required to run down the
equipment before repair and start-up up after the repair is not considered to be part of the down time.
Mobilization time is part of the preparation and/ or delay.
NOTE See relevant definitions regarding maintenance times in Clause 3.

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

9 Recommended data for equipment, failures and maintenance
9.1 Data categories

The RM data shall be collected in an organized and structured way. The major data categories for
equipment, failure and maintenance data are the following.
a) Equipment unit data (inventory data)
The description of an equipment unit (level 6 in Figure 3) is characterized by the following:
1) classification data, e.g. industry, plant, location, system;
2) equipment attributes, e.g. manufacturer’s data, design characteristics;
3) operational data, e.g. operating mode, operating power, environment.
These data categories shall be general for all equipment classes. Additionally, some data specific for
each equipment class (e.g. number of stages for a compressor) are required. Recommended data for
some equipment classes are given in Annex A.
b) Failure data
These data are characterized by the following:
1) identification data, e.g. failure record number and related equipment that has failed;
2) failure data for characterizing a failure, e.g. failure date, items failed, failure impact, failure mode,
failure cause, failure detection method.
c) Maintenance data
These data are characterized by the following:
1) identification data, e.g. maintenance record number, related failure and/or equipment record;
2) maintenance data, parameters characterising a maintenance action, e.g. date of maintenance,
maintenance category, maintenance activity, impact of maintenance, items maintained;
3) maintenance resources, maintenance man-hours per discipline and total, utility equipment/
resources applied;
4) maintenance times, active maintenance time, down time.
The type of failure and maintenance data shall normally be common for all equipment classes, with
exceptions where it is necessary to collect specific types of data, e.g. subsea equipment.
Corrective-maintenance events shall be recorded in order to describe the corrective action following
a failure. Preventive-maintenance records are required to retain the complete lifetime history of an
equipment unit.
9.2 Data format

Each record, e.g. a failure event, shall be identified in the database by a number of attributes. Each
attribute describes one piece of information, e.g. failure mode. It is recommended that each piece of
information be coded where possible. The advantages of this approach versus free text are
— facilitation of queries and analysis of data,
— ease of data input,
— consistency check undertaken at input, by having predefined code lists,

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

— minimization of database size and response time of queries.

The range of predefined codes shall be optimized. A short range of codes is too general to be useful. A
long range of codes gives a more precise description, but slows the input process and might not be used
fully by the data collector. Selected codes shall, if possible, be mutually exclusive.
The disadvantage of a predefined list of codes versus free text is that some detailed information can be
lost. For all categories mentioned in 9.1 a), b) and c), it is recommended to include some additional free
text giving more explanatory information as available and deemed relevant, e.g. to include a narrative
of the occurrence leading to a failure event. This would assist in quality checking the information and
browsing through single records to extract more detailed information.
Examples of codes are given in Annexes A and B for different equipment types and reliability data.
Generic reliability data will use such equipment data, and failure and maintenance characteristics.
Regarding the generic reliability data, see also D.5 and Table D.5.
9.3 Database structure
9.3.1 Description
The data collected shall be organized and linked in a database to provide easy access for updates,
queries and analysis. Several commercial databases are available that can be used as the main building
blocks for designing a reliability database. Two aspects of organizing the structure of data shall be
addressed as described in 9.3.2 and 9.3.3.
9.3.2 Logical structure
The logical structure defines the logical links among the main data categories in the database. This
model represents an application-oriented view of the database. The example in Figure 5 shows a
hierarchical structure with failure and maintenance records linked to the equipment unit (inventory).
Records describing preventive maintenance (PM) are linked to the inventory description in a many-
to-one relation. The same applies for failures, which additionally have related corrective-maintenance
records linked to each failure record. Each record (e.g. failure) may consist of several attributes (e.g.
failure date, failure mode, etc.).

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Figure 5 — Logical data structure (example)
9.3.3 Database architecture
This defines the design of the database as to how the individual data elements are linked and addressed.
The following four model categories are commonly available, ranked from lowest to highest complexity
and versatility:
Hierarchical model: Data fields within records are related by a “family tree” relationship. Each
level represents a particular attribute of data.
Network model: This is similar to the hierarchical model; however, each attribute can have
more than one parent.
Relational model: The model is constructed from tables of data elements, which are called relations.
No access path is defined beforehand; all types of manipulation of the data in
tabular form are possible. The majority of database designs use this concept.
Object model: The software is considered as a collection of objects, each of which has (1)
a structure and (2) an interface. The structure is fixed within each object
while the interface is the visible part that provides the link address between
the objects. Object modelling enables the database design to be very flexible,
extendable, reusable and easy to maintain. This model seems to be popular
in new database concepts.

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

9.4 Equipment data

The classification of equipment into technical, operational and environmental parameters is the basis
for the collection of RM data. This information is also necessary to determine whether the data are
suitable or valid for various applications. Some data are common to all equipment classes and other
data are specific to a particular equipment class.
To ensure that the objectives of this International Standard are met, a minimum of data shall be
collected. These data are identified by an asterisk (*) in Tables 5, 6 and 8. However, the addition of
certain other data categories can significantly improve the potential usability of the RM data (see
Annex D). In all cases, the minimum data collected on equipment level should allow a data exchange
between the equipment owner (user) and the manufacturer. The minimum data shall encompass all
data required to identify the equipment physical location at any given point in time, the main design
attribute identifier used by both parties (e.g. manufacturer’s part number), manufacturer and unique
identifier of each specific equipment item (typically manufacturer’s serial number).
Equipment data consists of two parts:
• equipment data common to all equipment classes;
• equipment specific.
Table 5 contains the data common to all equipment classes. In addition, some data that are specific
for each equipment class shall be recorded. Annex A gives examples of such data for some equipment
classes. In the examples in Annex A, the priority data are suggested, but they can vary according to each
case or application. For some equipment specific data, low priority data can be difficult to obtain, but if
available can be valuable for analysis of the specific equipment.
Table 5 — Equipment data common to all equipment classes

Data Data Taxonom- Business category (examples)
category ic level a Upstream Midstream Downstream Petro-
chemical
(E & P) (refining)
Industry 1 Petroleum Natural gas Petroleum Petrochem-
ical
Business category (*) 2 E & P Midstream Refining Petrochem-
ical
Installation category 3 Oil/gas Pipeline Refinery Petrochem-
production ical
Installation code or name 3 Delta Beta gas line Charlie refin- Delta chem-
(*) ery ical
Use/ Owner code or name 4 Smith Ltd. Johnsen Inc. JPL Corp. ABC ASA
Location
attributes Geographic location 3 UKCS Europe Mid-west USA UK
Plant/Unit category (*) 4 Oil/gas Compressor Hydro-crack- Ethylene
platform station er cracker
Plant/Unit code or name 4 Alpha 1 CS 3 HH 2 EC 1
(*)
Section/System 5 Oil process- Compression Reaction Reaction
(see Annex A) (*) ing system
Operation category 5 Remote Remote con- Manned Manned
control trol

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Table 5 (continued)
chemical
(E & P) (refining)
Equipment class 6 Pump Compressor Heat ex- Heater
(see Annex A) (*) changer
Equipment Type 6 Centrifugal Centrifugal Shell and tube Fired
(see Annex A) (*)
Equipment identification/ 6 P101-A C1001 C-21 H-1
Location (e.g. tag num-
ber) (*) b
Equipment description 6 Transfer Main com- Reactor Charge heater
(nomenclature) pressor effluent
Equipment Unique equipment identifi- 6 12345XL 10101 Cxy123 909090
b
attributes cation number
Manufacturer’s name (*) c 6 Johnson Wiley Smith Anderson
Manufacturer’s model 6 Mark I CO2 GTI SuperHeat A
designation g
Design data relevant for 6-8 Equipment- Equipment- Equipment- Equipment-
each equipment class and specific specific specific specific
subunit/component as
applicable, e.g. capacity,
power, speed, pressure, re-
dundancy, relevant stand-
ard(s) (see also Annex A)
Normal operating state/ 6 Running Active stand- Intermittent Running
Mode (*) by
Operation
Initial equipment commis- 6 2003.01.01 2003.01.01 2003.01.01 2003.01.01
(normal
sioning date
use)
Start date of current ser- 6 2003.02.01 2003.02.01 2003.02.01 2003.02.01
vice (*)
Surveillance time, h (cal- 6 8 950 8 000 5 400 26 300
culated) (*)
Operational time, h d 6 7 540 675 2 375 22 870
(measured/calculated)
Number of periodic test 6-8 4 2 2 4
demands during the
surveillance period as
applicable (*)e
Number of operation- 6-8 4 5 11 3
al demands during the
surveillance period as
applicable (*)e
Total wells drilled during 4 42 N.A. N.A. N.A.
surveillance period (*)f
Operating parameters as 6 Equipment- Equipment- Equipment- Equipment-
relevant for each equip- specific specific specific specific
ment class; e.g. ambient
conditions, operating
power (see Annex A)

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Table 5 (continued)
chemical
(E & P) (refining)
Additional Additional information in 6 Specify as Specify as Specify as Specify as
information free text as applicable needed needed needed needed
Source of data, e.g. P & ID, 6 Specify as Specify as Specify as Specify as
data sheet, maintenance needed needed needed needed
system
a See definitions in Figure 3.
b A specific individual equipment unit has an “Unique equipment identification number” (serial number),
and this may be required for documenting potential change-out at the equipment level. The tag number identi-
fies the equipment function and its physical location. If the equipment is replaced with, e.g. an overhauled unit,
the tag number (and part number) remains the same, but the serial number changes. Operator and equipment
supplier may have different “Unique equipment identification number” for same specific equipment unit. See also
ISO 15926-2:2003, E.3.3 which describes this relationship in more detail.
c Manufacturer may be relevant for lower hierarchical levels, i.e. level 7 and 8.
d Equipment may be subject to different operational phases, such as for example for equipment used in
drilling operations
e See further information on number of demands in C.1.3.
f This applies only to drilling related equipment classes.
g Equipment classes, subunits or maintainable items within some equipment classes can have the need to
have a separate information field in the equipment specific data (Level 6-8 in the taxonomy in Figure 3) to reflect
the technology generation, to distinguish between older and new technology in reliability data collection and
analysis.
(*) indicates the minimum data that shall be collected.
9.5 Failure data

A uniform definition of failure and a method of classifying failures are essential when it is necessary to
combine data from different sources (plants and operators) in a common RM database.
A common report, as given in Table 6 (see also Table 3), for all equipment classes shall be used for
reporting failure data. For some equipment classes, e.g. subsea equipment, minor adaptations can be
necessary.

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Table 6 — Failure data

Data cate- Data to be recorded Description
gory
Failure record (*) Unique failure record identification
Identification
Equipment identification/Location (*) E.g. tag number (see Table 5)
Failure date (*) Date of failure detection (year/month/day)
Failure mode (*) Usually at equipment-unit level (level 6) (see B.2.6) a
Failure impact on plant safety (e.g. per- Qualitative or quantitative failure consequence categoriza-
sonnel, environment, assets) b tion (see also C.1.10)
Failure impact on plant operations (e.g. Qualitative or quantitative failure consequence categoriza-
production, drilling, intervention) b tion (see also C.1.10)
Failure impact on equipment function (*) Effect on equipment-unit function (level 6): critical, degraded,
or incipient failure c
Failure mechanism The physical, chemical or other processes which have led to
a failure (see Table B.2)
Failure data Failure cause d The circumstances during design, manufacture or use which
have led to a failure (see Table B.3)
Subunit failed Name of subunit that failed (see examples in Annex A)
Component/Maintainable item(s) failed Name of the failed component/maintainable item(s) (see
Annex A)
Detection method How the failure was detected (see Table B.4)
Operating condition at failure (*) Run-down, start-up, running, hot standby, idle, cold stand-
by, testing
Operational phase at failure e Type of operation at the time of failure
SIS failure mode classification f Classify the failure for the specific event (DU, DD, SU, SD;
see F.2) g
Remarks Additional information Give more details, if available, on the circumstances leading
to the failure: failure of redundant units, failure cause(s) etc.
a For some equipment categories such as subsea equipment, it is recommended to also record failure modes
on taxonomic levels lower than the equipment-unit level.
b See example of failure consequence classification in Table C.2
c For some equipment categories and applications it may be sufficient to record critical and non-critical
(degraded + incipient) failures only.
d The failure cause and sometimes the failure mechanism are not known when the data are collected, as
they commonly require a root cause analysis to be performed. Such analysis shall be performed for failures of
high consequence, high repair/down time cost, or failures occurring significantly more frequent than what is
considered “normal” for this equipment unit class (“worst actors”).
e Relevant for some equipment, e.g. drilling, completion and workover equipment. The code table depends
on equipment category. The operation at the time of failure should be specified, such as drilling, tripping, cement-
ing, perforating, well killing, etc.
f This is for data collection purposes internally for the company and for applications on the specific instal-
lation where it is collected. Carefulness if generalizing due to possible differences in classification for the same
equipment class on same or different installations.
g The classes, DU (dangerous undetected), DD (dangerous detected), SU (safe undetected), SD (safe detected), are
defined in IEC 61508-4:2010. See also ISO/TR 12489:2013.
The minimum data needed to meet the objectives of this International Standard are identified by (*) in
Table 6. However, the addition of certain other data categories can significantly improve the potential
usability of the RM data; see Annex D.

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

9.6 Maintenance data
9.6.1 General
Maintenance is carried out for the following reasons:

— to correct a failure (corrective maintenance); the failure shall be reported as described in 9.5;
— as a planned and normally periodic action to prevent failure from occurring (preventive
maintenance).
A common report for all equipment classes shall be used for reporting maintenance data. The data
required are given in Table 8. For some equipment classes, minor adaptations can be required (e.g.
subsea equipment).
The minimum data needed to meet the objectives of this International Standard are identified by (*) in
Table 8. However, the addition of other data categories can significantly improve the potential usability
of the RM data; see Annex D.
9.6.2 Maintenance categories
There are two basic categories of maintenance:

a) that done to correct an item after it has failed (corrective maintenance);
b) that done to prevent an item from failing (preventive maintenance); part of this can be simply the
checks (inspections, tests) to verify the condition and performance of the equipment to decide
whether or not any preventive maintenance is required.
NOTE “Modification” is not defined as a maintenance category but is a task often performed by the
maintenance organization. A modification can have an influence on the reliability and performance of an item.
Figure 6 shows the main maintenance categories in more detail. Table B.5 presents the main types of
maintenance activities commonly performed.
NOTE 3b — Predetermined maintenance, see EN 13306:2010, 7.2; 4c — Periodic test (as defined in 3.74) to
detect potential hidden failures; 4e — In this International Standard, the term “scheduled service” is used, since
it is meant to cover minor and major life-prolonging service activities; 4g — Deferred maintenance should also
include planned corrective maintenance, i.e. where run-to-failure is the chosen failure management strategy.
Figure 6 — Maintenance categorization

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

9.6.3 Reporting maintenance data
9.6.3.1 Corrective maintenance
As a minimum for recording the reliability of an item, it is required that the corrective maintenance to
correct a failure shall be recorded.
Analysing failure data requires attention if there are many repetitive failures on same equipment or
critical failures on production critical equipment. This can include performing a root cause analysis,
based on the underlying failure characteristics (failure mode, failure cause and failure mechanism).
Improvements may be required to prevent recurrence, extend service life or improve ability to detect
the failures earlier.
9.6.3.2 Preventive maintenance
It is recommended that the recording of the actual preventive maintenance (PM) be done essentially in
the same way as for corrective actions. This can give the following additional information:
— full lifetime story of an item (all failures and maintenance);
— total resources used on maintenance (man-hours, spare parts);
— total down time and, hence, total equipment availability, both technical and operational; see
Annex C;
— balance between preventive and corrective maintenance.
Recording PM actions is useful mainly for the maintenance engineer, but is also useful for the reliability
engineer wanting to record or estimate the availability of equipment. A lifetime analysis takes into
account not only failures but also maintenance actions intended to restore the item to “as-good-as-
new” condition. PMs are often performed on a higher indenture level (e.g. “package” level); hence there
might not be any data available that can be related to the items on the lower indenture level (subunit,
maintainable item). It is necessary to consider this restriction when defining, reporting and analysing
PM data.
During the execution of PM actions, impending failures can be discovered and corrected as part of the
PM activities. In this case, the failure(s) shall be recorded as any other failure with the subsequent
corrective action done, even though it initially was considered to be a PM-type activity. The failure-
detection method shall, in this case, be considered as the type of PM being done. It is, however, realized
that some failures, generally of minor character, can be corrected as part of the PM and not recorded
individually. The practice on this can vary among companies and should be addressed by the data
collector(s) in order to reveal the possible type and amount of failures being included within the PM
program.
9.6.3.3 Preventive maintenance programme
A final option is to record the planned PM programme as well. In this case, it is possible to additionally
record the differences between the planned PM and the PM actually performed (backlog). An increasing
backlog indicates that control of the conditions of the plant is being jeopardized and can, in adverse
circumstances, lead to equipment damage, pollution or personnel injury. Establishing the maintenance
concept (for the purpose of PM programme during pre-operation) for various equipment categories and
associated equipment classes should benefit from the use of this International Standard.
Condition-based maintenance (CBM) is important for some type of equipment category: e.g. rotating.
Consideration of condition monitoring for predictive maintenance purposes should also utilise the
failure and maintenance data reflected in this International Standard. The availability of the conditional
monitoring system in itself and operational procedures are also important to gain benefit of CM.
Table 7 shows a summary of data to be collected and possible added value for different data categories.
Annex D contains a more detailed survey of data requirements for various applications.

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Table 7 — Usefulness of maintenance data

Data to be collected Priority with regard Examples
to data collection
Corrective maintenance Required (see • Repair time (MTTRes or MRT)
Table 8)
• Amount of corrective maintenance
• Replacement/repair strategy
Actual preventive main- Optional • Full lifetime story of the equipment
tenance
• Total resources used on maintenance
• Total down time
• Effect of PM on failure rate
• Balance between corrective and preventive maintenance
Planned preventive main- Optional • Difference between real and planned PM (backlog)
tenance (maintenance
• Updating programme based on experiences (methods,
programme)
resources, intervals)
Table 8 — Maintenance data

D a t a Data to be recorded Description a
category
Maintenance record (*) Unique maintenance identification
Equipment identification/location (*) e.g. tag number (see Table 5)
Identification
Failure record (*) Corresponding failure identification record (not relevant
for preventive maintenance)
Date of maintenance (*) Date when maintenance action was undertaken or planned
(start date)
Maintenance category (*) Main category (corrective, preventive)
Maintenance priority High, medium or low priority
Interval (planned) Calendar or operating interval (not relevant for corrective
maintenance)
Maintenance Maintenance activity Description of maintenance activity, see Annex B, Table B.5
data Maintenance impact on plant operations Zero, partial or total
Subunit maintained Name of subunit maintained (see Annex A) b
(may be omitted from preventive maintenance).
Component/maintainable item(s) Specify the component/maintainable item(s) that were
maintained maintained (see Annex A) (may be omitted from preventive
maintenance).
Spare part location Availability of spares (e.g. local/distant, manufacturer)
Maintenance man-hours, per discipline c Maintenance man-hours per discipline (mechanical, elec-
Maintenance trical, instrument, others)
resources Maintenance man-hours, total Total maintenance man-hours
Maintenance equipment resources c e.g. intervention vessel, crane

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Table 8 (continued)
D a t a Data to be recorded Description a
category
Active maintenance time d (*) Time duration for active maintenance work being done on
the equipment (see also definitions in Table 4)
Maintenance Down time d (*) Time duration during which an item is in a down state (see
times also Table 4 and Figure 4)
Maintenance delays/problems Prolonged down time causes, e.g. logistics, weather, scaf-
folding, lack of spares, delay of repair crew
Remarks Additional information Give more details, if available, on the maintenance action
and resources used
a Records to be entered for both corrective and preventive maintenance, except where shown.
b For corrective maintenance, the subunit maintained is normally identical to the one specified on the
failure event report (see Table 6).
c For subsea equipment, the following apply:
— type of main resource(s) and number of days used, e.g. drilling rig, diving vessel, service vessel;
— type of supplementary resource(s) and number of hours used, e.g. divers, ROV/ROT, platform personnel.
d This information is desirable for RAM and RCM analyses. It is currently infrequently recorded in the
maintenance-management systems. It is necessary to improve the reporting of this information to capture rea-
sons for long down times.

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Annex A
(informative)
Equipment-class attributes
A.1 Advisory notes

A.1.1 General
Annex A provides examples on how typical equipment used in the petroleum, petrochemical and natural
gas industries can be categorized as to their taxonomy, boundary definition, and inventory data. These
data are informative for each equipment unit. Normative data, e.g. failure modes, for the equipment
examples are shown in Annex B.
A standardized approach has been applied for some of the subunits that are used on a majority of
equipment classes (e.g. control and monitoring, lubrication system, cooling system). The result that is
the total number of tables required to describe the different data categories and definitions is reduced
and, at the same time, there are fewer tailor-made definitions and codes for each individual equipment
unit. The user should, therefore, apply those categories and codes that are applicable to the equipment
for which data are being collected. Equipment having a unique design can require a more tailor-made
categorization instead of that shown in these examples.
In the tables that describe the “equipment-unit subdivision” for the equipment, it is recommended to
also include the following:
a) “Maintainable items/Parts” on an as-needed basis, e.g. to include instrumentation;
b) “Others”, if defined “Maintainable items/Parts” are lacking; or
c) “Unknown” category, if sufficient information is not available.
The priority classes given in this annex are high, medium and low. When interpreting or assessing
the value of these classes, they can be equated to compulsory (high), highly desirable (medium) and
desirable (low).
A.1.2 Boundary definitions

The purpose of the boundary definition is to ensure a common understanding of the “subunit/component”
and “maintainable item/part” included within the boundary of a particular equipment unit and, hence,
which failure and maintenance events to record. For definition of the boundaries, the following rules
are recommended.
a) Do not include items of unique design or configuration-dependent items. Include only those items
that are considered to be generic for the equipment class being considered in order to compare
“like with like.”
b) Exclude connected items from the equipment-class boundary, unless specifically included by the
boundary specification. Failures that occur in a connection (e.g. leak), and that cannot be solely
related to the connected item, should be included within the boundary definition.
c) If a driver and the driven unit use a common subunit (e.g. lubrication system), relate failure and
maintenance events on this subunit, as a general rule, to the driven unit;
d) Include instrumentation only where it has a specific control and/or monitoring function for
the equipment unit in question and/or is locally mounted on the equipment unit. Control and

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

supervisory instrumentation of more general use (e.g. SCADA-systems) should not, as a rule, be
included;
e) Proper use of P&ID when defining items within the equipment class boundary.
In A.2.2 to A.2.10 examples of boundary diagrams for different equipment classes are presented.
This list is not exhaustive for the equipment categories covered by this International Standard, but
includes examples on how taxonomies may be defined for typical equipment found in the petroleum,
petrochemical and natural gas industries.
A.1.3 Common equipment data

This International Standard recommends some common equipment data that should be collected for all
equipment classes as shown in Table 5.
Note that some data in Table 5 is only valid for certain equipment categories. This applies for example for
the information fields, “Number of periodic test demands during the surveillance period as applicable”
and “Number of operational demands during the surveillance period as applicable”. The use of such
data for reliability analysis is further addressed in C.1.3.
Additionally, some equipment-specific data for equipment classes are presented in this annex. These
data have been found to be useful when comparing performance, or benchmarking, of equipment.
Such design features specific for each equipment class should be considered depending on how far down
in equipment categorization the data collector wants, or is required, to go. Collection of data is a trade-
off between the cost of obtaining it, which often can be high, and the value of the data in relation to the
specific requirements to define each equipment class for the intended analyses. The accessibility of the
data in the source(s) also sets a limit on the data that can be collected. An indication of the importance of
each data type is indicated. This importance ranking can differ among different users and applications.
A.1.4 Equipment classification and application

Tables A.1 to A.4 provide a methodology for grouping different equipment examples and their
application as covered by this International Standard. These lists are not meant to be exhaustive but
are intended to show the main types of equipment classes and systems and how they can be grouped
in categories. Any applied categorization should be appropriate for the intended use and purpose of the
data being collected (see 7.1.2). Tables A.1 to A.4 show a categorization related to the taxonomic levels
shown in Figure 3.
— Table A.1 shows a recommendation for grouping equipment on installation level (level 3 in the
taxonomic hierarchy).
— Table A.2 shows a recommendation for how equipment can be classified on plant/unit level (level 4),
as shown in Table 5.
— Table A.3 shows a list of relevant sections/systems (level 5) within the petroleum, natural gas and
petrochemical industries where equipment as covered by this International Standard can be used.
The systems where the equipment is applied should be recorded as one parameter in the general
equipment data shown in Table 5 (category “Use/Location”).
— Table A.4 lists typical examples of equipment units used in the petroleum, natural gas and
petrochemical industry as covered by this International Standard (level 6). Table A.4 also indicates
those equipment taxonomies that are illustrated by examples, as described in A.2.1. B.2.6 contains
the associated failure modes for the same equipment examples. Some equipment related references
(e.g. ISO and IEC standards) are also listed for selected equipment classes.
In the classification shown in Tables A.1 to A.3, the terms “upstream,” “midstream,” “downstream” and
“petrochemical” are used. For definitions of these terms, see Clause 3.

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

The equipment categories in Table A.4 have various functions, and is mean to categorize the prioritized
equipment classes covered in this standard, e.g. principal operations like rotating, mechanical, and
electrical; whereas others are process application groups, e.g. drilling, subsea production, and utilities.
Note that ISO 19008:2016 has a classification system used for standard cost coding, where Physical
Breakdown Structure (PBS) and Code of Resources (COR) also address systems listed in Table A.3 and
equipment listed in Table A.4, respectively.
Figure A.1 — Process technology function blocks in the oil and gas value chain — Level 3
Table A.1 — Installation category — Level 3

Business category
Upstream Midstream Downstream Petrochemical
(E & P)
Oil/gas production facility Liquefied natural gas Refinery Petrochemical complex
(offshore/ onshore) (LNG)
Gas conversion Terminal
SAGD facility (onshore) Liquefied petroleum gas
Energy plant Pipeline
(LPG)
Drilling facility (offshore/
Pipeline
onshore) Gas processing
Terminal
Maritime vessel Terminal
Biofuels
Terminal Storage
Pipeline Shipping
Floating LNG (FLNG) Pipeline
Note 1: Shipping is defined as any means of transportation (sea, rail, road).
Note 2: Gas conversion includes Gas to Liquids (GTL).
Note 3: Combined heat and power (CHP) is part of Energy plant.
Note 4: Drilling facility could be separate or integrated as part of other onshore/offshore installation.

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Table A.2 — Plant/Unit level classification — Level 4

Business category
(E & P)
Drilling NGL extraction Downstream–Process Methanol
Mobile offshore drilling NGL fractionation Gas To Liquid (GTL) Ethylene
unit (MODU)
Pipeline compressor Combined Heat & Power Acetic Acid Polyethylene
Onshore drilling rig station (CHP)
Polypropylene
Offshore Pipeline pump station Biofuel
Polyvinylchloride
Offshore platform Utilities Refinery – Process
Utilities
Crude Distillation Unit
Floating production stor- Offloading
Offsite and support
age and offloading (FPSO) Delayed Coking Unit
facilities
Floating drilling, produc- Hydrotreating Unit
tion storage and offload-
Fluid Catalytic Cracking
ing (FDPSO)
Unit
Floating storage unit (FSU)
Sulfur-recovery unit
Compliant tower
Hydrogen generation
Tension leg platform (TLP)
Tail Gas Recovery Unit
Offshore loading
General
Subsea production
Utilities
Maritime
Offsite and support facil-
Subsea intervention and ities
support vessel (SISV)
Installation vessel
Onshore
Onshore production plant
– conventional wells
Onshore production plant
– nonconventional wells

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Table A.3 — System/Section classification — Level 5

Business category
(E & P)
Process — General Process — General Crude Distillation Process — General
S1. Oil process/ treatment S28. Oil process/ treatment S40. Preheating train S57. Hydrogen steam
reforming
S2. Gas process/ treatment S29. Gas process/ treatment S41. Desalting
S58. Isomerization
S3. Water injection S30. Oil/condensate export S42. Atmospheric
S59. Phenol extraction
S4. Oil/condensate export S31. Gas export S43. Vacuum
S60. Polymerization unit
S5. Gas export Midstream utilities Hydrotreating
S61. Solvent deasphalting
S6. Storage S32. Fuel gas S44. Feed
S62. Solvent dewaxing
Upstream utilities a S33. Waste water treatment S45. Reaction
S63. Solvent extraction
S7. Oily water treatment LNG process S46. Recycling
S64. Steam cracking
S8. Closed drains S34. Gas treatment S47. Stripping
S65. Steam-methane
S9. Methanol S35. Liquefaction S48. Drying reforming
S10. Fuel gas S36. Fractionation Fluid Catalytic Cracking S66. Sweetening
S11. Fresh water S37. Refrigeration S49. Feed
Offshore systems S38. LNG storage and load- S50. Conversion
ing
S12. Ballast water S51. Gas compression
LNG utilities
S13. Seawater S52. Gas recovery
S39. Refrigerant storage
S14. Position keeping S53. Debutanizer
S15. Ice management Downstream utilities
Drilling and well S54. Fuel gas
S16. Drilling facilities S55. SNOX
S17. Drilling process S56. Waste water treatment
S18. Drilling well control
S19. Drilling control and
monitoring
S20. Riser and well topside
S21. Well production/in-
jection c
S22. Well completion
S23. Well workover
Subsea
S24. Subsea, umbilical,
riser and flowline (SURF) d
S25. Subsea workover
S26. Subsea processing
S27. Subsea processing
utilities

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Table A.3 (continued)

Business category
(E & P)
Safety and control systems (applicable for all business categories)
S67. Emergency depressurization (EDP) (Blowdown) (cf. ISO/TR 12489:2013, Table A.1, System 3)
S68. Emergency shutdown (ESD) (cf. ISO/TR 12489:2013, Table A.1, System 1)
S69. Process shutdown (PSD) (cf. ISO/TR 12489:2013, Table A.1, System 2)
S70. Fire and gas detection (cf. ISO/TR 12489:2013, Table A.1, System 6)
S71. Fire water (cf. ISO/TR 12489:2013, Table A.1, System 7)
S72. Fire-fighting (cf. ISO/TR 12489:2013, Table A.1, System 8)
S73. Flare (cf. ISO/TR 12489:2013, Table A.1, System 20)
S74. Process control (cf. ISO/TR 12489:2013, Table A.1, System 9)
S75. Emergency communication e (cf. ISO/TR 12489:2013, Table A.1, System 11)
S76. Evacuation system (cf. ISO/TR 12489:2013, Table A.1, System 12)
S77. Inert gas (includes cargo tank and blanket)
S78. Open drains
Utilities (applicable for all business categories)
S79. Steam
S80. Main power b
S81. Emergency power b (cf. ISO/TR 12489:2013, Table A.1, System 18)
S82. Essential power b
S83. Instrument air
S84. Utility air
S85. Cooling
S86. Heating
S87. Nitrogen
S88. Chemical injection (cf. ISO/TR 12489:2013, Table A.1, System 10)
S89. Loading (cf. ISO/TR 12489:2013, Table A.1, System 15)
S90. Helicopter refuelling
S91. Electrical power protection
S92. Fiscal metering
Auxiliaries f (applicable for all business categories)
S93. Telecommunications e (cf. ISO/TR 12489:2013, Table A.1, System 19)
S94. HVAC (cf. ISO/TR 12489:2013, Table A.1, System 21)
S95. Disconnection (cf. ISO/TR 12489:2013, Table A.1, System 13)
S96. Materials handling (cf. ISO/TR 12489:2013, Table A.1, System 22)
S97. Saturation diving (cf. ISO/TR 12489:2013, Table A.1, System 31)
a These sections/systems can also be applicable for downstream and petrochemical unless defined specifically for these
categories.
b Includes both power generation and distribution.
c Well production/ injection includes the surface wellhead and X-mas tree.
d SURF includes SPS (subsea production system).
e Regarding telecommunications; this could be subdivided or extended with the following systems: Security, Communication,
Navigation aids, Collision avoidance and Metocean data gathering.
f Regarding the difference between auxiliaries and utilities. Auxiliaries are providing supplementary or additional help and
support. This is a difference from Utilities which are intended to provide service to multiple equipment whereas auxiliary equipment
tends to focus on support to a single system, e.g. an auxiliary fuel tank for an engine.

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Table A.4 — Equipment class — Level 6

Equ ipment Equipment class — Level 6 Equipment Example References
category class code included
in Annex A
Rotating Blowers and fans g BL No API/Std 673
(A.2.2)
API/Std 560
Centrifuges CF No
Combustion engines CE A.2.2.1 ISO 8528
API RP 7C-11F
API Spec 7B-11C
Compressors CO A.2.2.2 ISO 10439 (all
parts)
ISO 13631
ISO 13707
ISO 10442
API/Std 617
API/Std 618
API/Std 619
Electric generators EG A.2.2.3 BS 4999-140
IEEE C37.101
IEEE C37.102
NEMA MG 1
Electric motors EM A.2.2.4 IEC 60034-12
IEC 60470
IEC 60947-4-1
API/Std 541
API/Std 547
NEMA MG 1
Gas turbines GT A.2.2.5 ISO 3977 (all
parts)
ISO 2314
API/Std 616
Liquid expanders LE No
Mixers MI No
Pumps PU A.2.2.6 ISO 13709
ISO 13710
API/Std 610
API/Std 674
API/Std 676
Steam turbines ST A.2.2.7 ISO 10437
API/Std 611
API/Std 612
Turboexpanders TE A.2.2.8 API/Std 617
Mechanical Conveyors and elevators CV No
(A.2.3)

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)


in Annex A
Cranes CR A.2.3.1
Filters and strainers FS No
Heat exchangers HE A.2.3.2 ISO 12211
ISO 12212
ISO 16812
ISO 13706
ISO 15547 (all
parts)
API/Std 660
API/Std 661
API/Std 662
Heaters and boilers HB A.2.3.3 ISO 13703
ISO 15649
API/Std 560
Loading arms LA No ISO 28460
ISO 16904
Onshore pipelines PL No ISO 13623
Piping PI A.2.3.5 ISO 13703
ISO 15649
ASME B31.3
Pressure vessels VE A.2.3.4 ASME VIII
Div.1/2
Silos SI No
Steam ejectors SE No
Storage tanks h TA A.2.3.9 ISO 28300
API Spec 12D
API Spec 12F
API Spec 12P
API/Std 650
API/Std 620
API/Std 2000
API/Std 2610
Swivels SW A.2.3.8
Turrets TU A.2.3.7
Winches WI A.2.3.6

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)


in Annex A
Electrical Frequency converters FC A.2.4.4 IEC 61800-1
(A.2.4)
IEC 61800-2
IEC 61800-3
IEC 61800-4
IEC 61800-5-1
IEC 60146
IEEE/Std 1566
Power cables and terminations (topside/ PC No CSA FT4
onshore)
CSA/Std C68.3
ICEA S-93-639-
2000
IEC 60227
IEEE 1202
NEMA 20C
NEMA VE-1
NEMA VE-2
UL 1072
UL 1277
UL 1569
UL 2225
UL 2250
Power transformers PT A.2.4.2 IEC 60076
IEC 60076-1
IEC 60076-2
IEC 60076-3
IEC 60076-4
IEC 60076-5
IEC 60076-7
IEC 60076-8
IEC 60076-10
IEC 60076-11
IEC 60076-12
CAN/CSA C88-M
IEEE C57.12.10
IEEE C57.18.10

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)


in Annex A
Switchgear SG A.2.4.3 IEC 61439-1
IEC 60947
IEC 60947-2
IEC 60947-3
IEC 60947-4-1
IEC 62271-1
IEC 62271-100
IEC 62271-102
IEC 62271-200
IEEE C37.012
IEEE C37.13.1
IEEE C37.20.7
Uninterruptible power supply UP A.2.4.1 IEC 61000-4-7
IEC 62040-2
IEC 62040-3
FCC 47 CFR 15
NEMA PE 1
NEMA PE 5
NEMA PE 7
Safety and Control logic units CL A.2.5.3 ISO 10418
control
ISO 13702
(A.2.5)
IEC 61131
API RP 554
NORSOK S-001
Emergency communication equipment j EC No ISO 15544
IMO (SOLAS,
MODU)
Escape, evacuation and rescue o ER No ISO 13702
ISO 15544
IMO (SOLAS,
MODU, LSA)
NORSOK S-001
Fire and gas detectors FG A.2.5.1 ISO 10418
ISO 13702
IMO (SOLAS,
MODU, FSS)
NORSOK S-001
Fire-fighting equipment FF No ISO 13702
NORSOK S-001

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)


in Annex A
Flare ignition FI No ISO 25457
API/Std 521
API/Std 537
Inert-gas equipment IG No IMO (SOLAS,
MODU)
Input devices IP A.2.5.2 ISO 10418
NORSOK I-001
Lifeboats LB A.2.5.6 ISO 13702
ISO 15544
DNV-OS-E406
IMO, SOLAS:
MSC.81 (70)
IMO, SOLAS:
MSC.48 (66)
NORSOK R-002
NORSOK S-001
NORSOK U-100
Nozzles NO A.2.5.5 NFPA 13
NFPA 15
NFPA 16
Telecommunications TC No IMO/COMSAR/
Circ.32
NORSOK T-001
NORSOK T-100
Valves VA A.2.5.4 ISO 5208
ISO 13702
ISO 14313
API Spec 6D
API/Std 520
API/Std 521
API/Std 526
API/Std 594
API/Std 609
ASME B16.34
NORSOK S-001
Subsea Dry tree risers DT No ISO 10423
(A.2.6) r
API Spec 6A
Risers PR A.2.6.3 API RP 17B
API Spec 17J
Subsea compressors SC No
Subsea diving equipment SD No

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)


in Annex A
Subsea electrical power distribution EP A.2.6.5
Subsea flowlines FL No ISO 13623
ISO 14313
ISO 14723
ISO 16708
DNV-OS-F101
DNV-RP-F116
Subsea heat exchangers SH No
Subsea intervention p CI No API RP 17H
Subsea manifolds MA No ISO 13628-15
Subsea pipelines SL A.2.6.7 ISO 13623
ISO 14313
ISO 14723
ISO 16708
DNV-OS-F101
DNV-RP-F116
Submarine power cables CA No IEC 60502
IEC 60840
Subsea pressure vessels SV A.2.6.6
Subsea production control CS A.2.6.1 ISO 13628-5
API/Std 17F
Subsea pumps SP A.2.6.4
Subsea templates TM No ISO 13628-15
Subsea wellhead and X-mas trees XT A.2.6.2 ISO 13628-4
Well Downhole safety valves SS A.2.7.2 and ISO 10417
completion i
A.2.7.5 ISO 10432
(A.2.7)
ISO 16070
API RP 14B
API Spec 14A
API Spec 14L
NORSOK D-010
Downhole well completion q WE A.2.7.2 See also note q
Electrical submersible pumps d ESP A.2.7.2 and ISO 15551-1
A.2.7.6 API RP 11S
Surface wellhead and X-mas trees XD A.2.7.7 ISO 10423
API Spec 6A
Drilling Cementing equipment CG No
(A.2.8) Choke and manifolds DC No
Crown and travelling blocks TB No
Derrick b DE No

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)


in Annex A
Diverters DI No ISO 13354
Drawworks DW No
Drilling and completion risers DD No ISO 13624-1
ISO 13628-7
Drill strings DS No ISO 11961
Mud-treatment equipment f DM No
Pipe handling equipment DH No
Riser compensators DR No
String-motion compensators MC No
Subsea blowout preventers (BOP) BO A.2.8.2 API Spec16A
API Spec 16D
API/Std 53
Surface blowout preventers (BOP) a BT A.2.8.3 API Spec 16A
API Spec 16D
API/Std 53
Top drives TD A.2.8.1
Well Coiled tubing, surface equipment W1 No
intervention l Coiled tubing, surface well control equipment WC A.2.9.1 NORSOK D-002
(A.2.9)
Coiled tubing, work strings W2 No
Coiled tubing, bottom-hole assemblies W3 No
Snubbing, surface equipment W1 No
Snubbing, work strings W2 No
Snubbing, surface well control equipment WC A.2.9.1 NORSOK D-002
Snubbing, pipes and bottom hole assemblies W3 No
Subsea well intervention e OI A.2.9.2 ISO 13628-7
Wireline, surface equipment W1 No
Wireline, surface well control equipment n WC A.2.9.1 NORSOK D-002
Wireline, slick lines, braided cables and elec- W2 No
tric cables
Wireline, bottom-hole assemblies W3 No
Marine Anchor windlasses and mooring equipment AM No
(A.2.10) De-icing equipment k IC No
Dynamic positioning equipment DP No ISO 19901-7
Helicopter deck with equipment HT No NORSOK C-004
Jacking and fixation JF A.2.10.1
Marine disconnection equipment MD No
Thrusters TH No
Towing equipment TO No

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)


in Annex A
Utilities c Air-supply equipment AI No
(A.2.11) De-superheaters SU No
Flare ignition equipment FE No
Heating/cooling media HC No
Hydraulic power units HP No
Nitrogen-supply equipment NI No
Open /Close drain equipment OC No

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)


in Annex A
Auxiliaries HVAC equipment m HV No ISO 15138
(A.2.12)
a Surface blowout preventers does not include land rig BOP.
b Including heave compensation.
c Utilities may be associated with a number of equipment classes in this International Standard (e.g.
pumps, valves, instrumentation).
d Artificial lift equipment like Hydraulic submersible pumps (HSP), Progressive cavity pumps (PCP) and
Gas lift valves (GLV) are not included here. See also A.2.7.2 and also A.2.7.6.
e Includes three equipment classes, and cover equipment such as e.g. workover riser.
f Includes shale shaker, desander/desilter, centrifuge and degasser.
g Does not include air compressor.
h Does not include offshore storage tanks.
I Well completion covers both surface and subsea completed wells. Wellhead is not an equipment
class, but is a subunit in the Surface wellhead and X-mas trees (A.2.7.7) and in Subsea wellhead and X-mas tree
(A.2.6.2), also since wellhead and X-mas tree acts as one barrier. A.2.7.2 describes the downhole well comple-
tion equipment and some overview of equipment classes that have been further subdivided, see A.2.7.5-6.
j Emergency communication would include Public announcement and communication system (PACOS)
and associated equipment.
k This could include e.g. heat tracing equipment.
l Well intervention equipment classes are for dry well completions. In some data collection and ex-
change, the equipment classes might be gathered as four equipment classes (W1, W2, W3 and WC), and appli-
cable for Coiled tubing, Wireline or Snubbing. See further information in A.2.9.1.
m The equipment classes that are relevant parts of a HVAC system are: 1) Motor driven blower fan. The
blower fan unit can be covered by the equipment class Blowers and fans. 2) The driver will typically be covered
by the existing equipment class Electric motors. 3) Filter can be covered by the equipment class Filters and
strainers. 4) Heater/cooler. The heater/cooler unit can be included within the equipment class Heat exchangers.
5) Fire-, gas- and heat-detectors as equipment class Fire and gas detectors, 6) Input devices as equipment class
Input devices.
n Note that the Wireline BOP is part of this.
o Lifeboat is established as a separate equipment class, but other equipment like Man-overboard boats
(MOB) is not part of that equipment class. Various equipment will fulfil the functions needed for escape, evac-
uation and rescue. These could be related to transport, personal protective and life support, emergency com-
munication, emergency utilities (lighting, power and ventilation) and ingress/egress/infrastructure (shelters,
escape routes, doors, muster areas and landing areas, etc.). Some of this equipment can require reliability data
collection and some would be covered by other equipment classes in Table A.4.
p This includes remote operated tools (ROT), tie-in tools, running tools and remote operated vehicle
(ROV) tools – as used for initial installation, subsea commissioning, intervention for repairs (e.g. SCM, subsea
valves) or modification/extensions.
q Downhole well completion equipment class could be further subdivided, as done for some equip-
ment class defines as DHSV and ESP. Standards relevant for casing and tubing (ISO 13679:2002, API Spec
5CT, ISO 11960:2014), Liner hanger packers (ISO 14310:2008 and NORSOK D-010:2013), Production pack-
ers (ISO 14310:2008), Flow control device (API Spec 19G2) and Downhole control and monitoring mandrels
(ISO 14998:2013).
r ISO 13628-1:2005 applies for all subsea production systems in general.

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

A.2 Equipment-specific data

A.2.1 General
Those equipment classes, indicated to have an example from the last column of Table A.4, are presented
in A.2.2 to A.2.12 and include a detailed description of the following:
— equipment-type classification;
— boundary definitions;
— subdivision into lower indenture levels;
— equipment-specific data.
This information should be used to identify the data necessary to be collected for each equipment
example presented and define the structure for a database for the relevant taxonomic elements. Many of
the recommended parameters can be common across many equipment classes (e.g. capacity, rotational
speed). The examples should not be considered exhaustive. The equipment specific data can be either
static or time dependent. Note that Table 5 contain equipment data common to all equipment classes,
and appropriate data therein comes always in addition to the equipment specific data suggested in A.2.
Examples of failure coding, such as failure modes, failure mechanism, failure cause, etc., are given in
Annex B. For safety equipment, some specific failure definitions are given in Annex F.
A.2.2 Rotating equipment data
A.2.2.1 Combustion engines
Table A.5 — Type classification — Combustion engines

Equipment class — Level 6 Equipment type
Description Code Description Code
Combustion engines CE Diesel engine DE
Otto (gas) engine GE

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Figure A.2 — Boundary definition — Combustion engines

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Table A.6 — Equipment subdivision — Combustion engines

Equip- Combustion engines
ment unit
Subunit Start system Combustion Control and Lubrication Cooling sys- Miscella-
engine unit monitoring system tem a neous
Maintain- Start energy Air inlet Actuating Reservoir Heat exchanger Hood
able items (battery, air) device
Ignition system Pump Fan Flange
Starting unit Control unit joints
Turbocharger Motor Motor
Start control Internal power
Fuel pumps supply Filter Filter
Injectors Monitoring Cooler Valves
Fuel filters Sensors b Valves Piping
Exhaust Valves Piping Pump
Cylinders Wiring Oil Tempera-
ture-control
Pistons Piping Tempera- sensor
ture-control
Shaft Seals sensor
Thrust bearing
Radial bearing
Seals
Piping
Valves
a Can include water-cooled or air-cooled systems.
b Specify type of sensor, e.g. pressure, temperature, level, etc.
Table A.7 — Equipment-specific data — Combustion engines

Name Description Unit or code list Priority
Driven unit Driven unit (equipment class, type and identifi- Specify High
cation code)
Power - design Maximum rated output (design) Kilowatt High
Power - Specify the approximate power at which the unit Kilowatt High
operating has been operated for most of the surveillance time
Speed Design speed Revolutions per minute High
Number of Specify number of cylinders Integer Low
cylinders
Cylinder Type Inline, vee, flat Low
configuration
Starting system Type Electric, hydraulic, pneumatic Medium
Ignition system Otto, diesel Compression ignition (diesel), spark plugs Medium
Fuel Type Gas, light oil, medium oil, heavy oil, dual Low
Air-inlet Type Free text Low
filtration type
Engine- Type of engine aspiration Turbo, natural Medium
aspiration type
A.2.2.2 Compressors

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Table A.8 — Type classification — Compressors

Compressors a CO Centrifugal CE
Reciprocating RE
Screw SC
Axial AX
a Includes also air compressors.
Figure A.3 — Boundary definition — Compressors
A.2.2.2.1 Equipment boundary definition for compressors
Figure A.2 shows the boundary definition for compressors. Inlet and outlet valves, and the compressor
driver with connected auxiliaries, are not included within the boundary. Driver units are recorded as
separate inventories (electric motor, gas turbine or combustion engine) and the failures on the driver, if
recorded, should be recorded separately for the driver. A number in the compressor inventory shall give
a reference to the appropriate driver inventory.
Compression is normally done in stages where a number of subunits are connected into a train.
A compressor train is considered as one inventory. Each compressor train can consist of up to four
compressor stages. Recompression trains on an offshore oil platform normally perform compression
in four stages. Each compression stage is usually performed by one compressor unit (casing) but in
some cases one compressor unit can perform two stages. Each compressor (stage) normally contains
several impellers that are the physical assembly of rotating blades that raise the pressure one step in
the compressor unit.

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

If there are subunits that are common to the driver (e.g. a gas turbine) and the driven unit (i.e. the
compressor), these are regarded as a part of the driven unit. For compressors with common lubrication-
oil and seal-oil systems, failures should, as a general rule, be assigned to the subunit that is assumed to
be the one most affected. Otherwise, the failure should be assigned to the lubrication-oil system.
Table A.9 — Equipment subdivision — Compressors

Equipment unit Compressors
Subunit Power Compressor Control and Lubrication Shaft seal Miscellane-
transmission monitoring system system ous
Maintainable Gearbox/ Casing Actuating Oil tank with Oil tank with Base frame
items variable drive device heating sys- heating
Rotor with Piping, pipe
tem
Bearings impellers Control unit Reservoir support and
Pump bellows
Belt/sheave Balance piston Cables and Pump
junction boxes Motor Control valves
Coupling to Interstage Motor
the driver seals Internal Check valves Isolation
Gear
power supply valves
Coupling to Radial bearing Coolers
Filters
the driven unit Monitoring Check valves
Thrust bear- Filters
Valves
Lubrication ing Sensors a Coolers
Piping
Seal oil
Seals Shaft seals Valves Silencers
Valves
Dry gas seal
Internal piping Wiring Purge air
Lube oil
Mechanical
Valves Piping Magnet-
seal
ic-bearing
Antisurge Seals
Scrubber control system
system b
Flange joints
Piston
Cylinder liner
Packing
a Specify type of sensor, e.g. pressure, temperature, level, etc.
b Including recycle valves and controllers.
Table A.10 — Equipment-specific data — Compressors

Compressed medium Gas or air compressor Gas, air High
Type of driver Driver unit (equipment class, type Specify High
and identification code)
Gas handled Average molar mass Grams per mole Medium
(specific gravity × 28,96)
Suction pressure Design – first stage Pascal (bar) Medium
Suction pressure Operating – first stage Pascal (bar) Low
Discharge pressure Design – last stage Pascal (bar) High
Discharge pressure Operating – last stage Pascal (bar) Medium
Flow rate Design Metres cubed per hour High
Flow rate Operating Metres cubed per hour Low
Discharge temperature Design Degrees Celsius Medium
Discharge temperature Operating Degrees Celsius Low
Power Design power Kilowatt High
Utilization Percent utilization compared to Percent Medium
design

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)


Polytropic head — Kilojoules per kilogram Low
Number of casings Number of casings in the train Integer High
Number of stages Number of compressor stages Integer Medium
(not impellers) in this train
Body type Type Vertical split case (barrel type), Low
axial split case
Shaft sealing Type Mechanical, oil, dry gas-packed, Low
dry gland, labyrinth, combined
Intercooler fitted Specify if cooler is fitted Yes/no Medium
Shaft seal system Separate, combined, dry, etc. Separate, combined, dry High
Radial bearing Type Antifrictional, journal, magnetic Low
Thrust bearing Specify as relevant in comment Antifrictional, journal, magnetic Low
field whether any thrust pressure
regulator is installed
Speed Design speed Revolutions per minute Low
Coupling Type Fixed, flexible, hydraulic, discon- Low
nect
Reciprocating compressors only
Cylinder configuration — Inline, opposed, V, W Low
Cylinder orientation — Horizontal, vertical, inclined Low
Working principle — Single-acting, double-acting Low
Packing type — Lubricated, dry Low
A.2.2.3 Electric generators
Table A.11 — Type classification — Electric generators

Electric generators EG Gas-turbine driven TD
Steam-turbine driven SD
Turboexpander TE
Engine driven, e.g. diesel engine, MD
gas engine

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Figure A.4 — Boundary definition — Electric generators
Table A.12 — Equipment subdivision — Electric generators

Equipment unit Electric generators
Subunit Power Electric Control and Lubrication Cooling sys- Miscellane-
transmission generator monitoring a system tem ous
Maintainable Gearbox Stator Actuating Reservoir Heat exchang- Hood
items device er
Radial bearing Rotor Pump Purge air
Control unit Fan
Thrust bear- Radial bearing Motor Neutral
(e.g. AVR)
ing Motor grounding
Thrust bear- Filter
Internal resistors
Seals ing Filter
power supply Cooler (NGRs) c
Lubrication Excitation Valves
Monitoring Valves
Coupling to Cabling and Piping
Sensors b Piping
driver junction boxes
Pump
Valves Oil
Coupling to
driven unit Wiring
Belt/sheave Piping
Seals
a The automatic voltage regulator (AVR) is an element within “Control”. Temperature and vibration surveillance are
elements within “Monitoring”.
c Depending on the earthing philosophy.

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Table A.13 — Equipment-specific data — Electric generators

Type of driver Equipment class, type and identifica- Specify High
tion code
Coupling Specify (fixed, flexible, etc.) Fixed, flexible, hydraulic, disconnect Low
Speed Synchronous Revolutions per minute Medium
Frequency Design frequency Hertz Low
Voltage Design voltage Kilovolts High
Power – design Design power Kilovolts High
Power factor cosφ Number Low
Excitation control Type Automatic, manual Medium
Excitation type Brushless/slip-ring Brushless, slip-ring Medium
Degree of protection Protection class in accordance with IP Low
IEC 60529
Insulation class – stator Insulation class in accordance with Y, A, E, B, F, H Medium
IEC 60034-1
Temperature rise – stator Temperature rise in accordance with Y, A, E, B, F, H Low
IEC 60034-1
Insulation class – rotor Insulation class in accordance with Y, A, E, B, F, H Medium
IEC 60034-1
Temperature rise – rotor Temperature rise in accordance with Y, A, E, B, F, H Medium
IEC 60034-1
Thrust bearing Type Antifrictional, journal, magnetic Low
Lubrication of bearings Type of bearing lubrication Grease, oil bath, pressurized oil, oil ring Low
Generator cooling Type Air/air, air/water, open ventilated Low
A.2.2.4 Electric motors
Table A.14 — Type classification — Electric motors

Electric motors EM Alternating current AC
Direct current DC

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Figure A.5 — Boundary definition — Electric motors

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Table A.15 — Equipment subdivision — Electric motors

Equipment unit Electric motors
Subunit Electric motor c Control and Lubrication Cooling Miscellaneous
monitoring a system system
M a i n t a i n a b l e Stator Actuating device Reservoir Heat exchanger Hood
items
Rotor Control unit Pump Filter
Excitation Internal power Motor Valves
supply
Radial bearing Filter Piping
Monitoring
Thrust bearing Cooler Pump
Sensors b
Valves Motor
Valves
Piping Fan
Wiring
Oil
Piping
Seals
a Normally, there is no extra control system for motors. For motors of Ex(p) class (pressurized), the internal
pressure is monitored. Temperature can be monitored on large motors.
c VFD is not included inside the electric motor boundary. See also A.2.4.4 and Figure A.22 with respect to Variable
Speed Drive System (VSDS).
Table A.16 — Equipment-specific data — Electric motors

Type of driven unit Equipment class, type and identification code Specify High
Power – design Max. output (design) Kilowatt Medium
Power – operating Specify the approximate power at which the unit Kilowatt Low
has been operated for most of the surveillance time
Variable speed Specify if installed or not Yes/No Low
Speed Design speed Revolutions per minute Medium
Voltage Design voltage Volts Medium
Motor type Type Induction, commutator Medium
(d.c.), synchronous
Insulation class – stator Insulation class in accordance with IEC 60034-1 Y, A, E, B, F, H Medium
Temperature rise – stator Temperature rise in accordance with IEC 60034-1 Y, A, E, B, F, H Low
Insulation class – rotor a Insulation class in accordance with IEC 60034-1 Y, A, E, B, F, H Medium
Temperature rise – rotor a Temperature rise in accordance with IEC 60034-1 Y, A, E, B, F, H Medium
Degree of protection Protection class in accordance with IEC 60529 Specify Medium
Type of Ex protection Explosion classification category, e.g. Ex(d), Ex(e) b e.g. Ex(d), Ex(e) High
a Not relevant for induction motors.
b See IEC 60079 (all parts).
A.2.2.5 Gas turbines

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Table A.17 — Type classification — Gas turbines

Gas turbines GT Industrial IN
Aero-derivative AD
Heavy duty HD
NOTE This boundary drawing shows a typical layout frequently used for mechanical drive or power
generation. However, gas turbines can be configured in different ways with regards to the layout of some
subsystems. The compressor and the turbine can be mechanically coupled, single-shaft GT. Other alternatives
are when one or more parts of the turbine are mechanically decoupled (multi-spool GT).
Figure A.6 — Boundary definition — Gas turbines

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Table A.18 — Equipment subdivision — Gas turbines

Equip- Gas turbines
ment unit
Subunit Starting Air intake Combustion Compressor Power Control and
system system turbine HP monitoring
turbine
—
Maintaina- Starting motor Air cooling Combustor Rotor Rotor Control unit
ble items
Start control Anti-icing Fuel nozzles Stator Stator Sensorsa
Piping Filters Seals Cooling system Casing Wires
Filter(s) Intake duct VGV system Radial bearing Actuating devices
Valve(s) Inlet vanes Anti-surge Thrust bearing Monitoring
valve
Pump(s) Seals Valves
Aux. bleeding
Start energy Valves Internal power
system
(e.g. battery, supply
Piping
air) Anti-icing
Seals
valve
—
Casing
Radial bearing
Thrust bearing
Seals
Piping
Lubrication Fuel system Water/Steam Fire and gas Accessory Exhaust Miscel
system injectionb protection drive laneous
Heater Fuel control Pump(s) Control unit Gearbox Diffuser Enclo-
sure
Reservoir(s) Piping Piping Pipes Bearing Exhaust
Hood
Pump(s) Valves Valves Valves Seals collector
Purge air
Motor Seals Filter(s) Sensors Casing Compen-
sator/ Flange
Filter Pump(s)/Gas Seals Wires
bellows joints
compressor
Temperature Wires Tank(s)/ Stor-
Ducting Ventila-
control Filter(s)/ age
tion fan
Separators Emission
Valves
Wa-
Wires monitor-
Piping ter-wash
ing
Fuel prop- system
Oil cooler
erties meas- Silencer
Oil urement
Thrust
Sensors bearing
Wires Valves
Waste
heat
recovery
unit
b Only relevant for gas turbines with NOx-abatement control with steam or water.

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Table A.19 — Equipment-specific data — Gas turbines

Type of driven unit Characteristics of the driven subsystem Generator drive, mechanical drive, High
auxiliaries, other
Power – design ISO power rating Kilowatt High
Power – operating Specify the approximate power at which Kilowatt Medium
the unit has been operated for most of the
surveillance time.
Operating profile Utilization profile Base load, peak load, load-sharing High
backup, emergency/reserve
De-rating Specify if permanently de-rated or not Yes/No Medium
Speed Design speed (power shaft) Revolutions per minute Medium
Number of shafts Specify number 1, 2, 3 Medium
Starting system Specify main starting system Electric, hydraulic, pneumatic High
Backup starting system Specify if relevant Electric, hydraulic, pneumatic Low
Fuel Fuel type Gas, oil-light, oil-medium, oil‑heavy, Medium
dual
NOx abatement Type of abatement control Steam, water, dry (e.g. dry low High
emission), none (e.g. single annu-
lar combustor)
Air inlet filtration type Type Free text Low
A.2.2.6 Pumps
Table A.20 — Type classification — Pumps

Pumps PU Centrifugal CE
Reciprocating RE
Rotary RO

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Figure A.7 — Boundary definition — Pumps
Table A.21 — Equipment subdivision — Pumps

Equipment unit Pumps
Subunit Power Pump unit Control and Lubrication Miscellaneous
transmission monitoring system
Maintainable Gearbox/ Support Actuating device Reservoir Purge air
items variable drive
Casing Control unit Pump Cooling/heating
Bearing system
Impeller Internal power Motor
Seals supply Cyclone separator
Shaft Filter
Coupling to Monitoring Pulsation damper
Radial bearing Cooler
driver
Sensors a Flange joints
Thrust bearing Valves
Coupling to
Valves
driven unit Seals Piping
Wiring
Belt/sheave Valves Oil
Piping
Piping Seals
Seals
Cylinder liner
Piston
Diaphragm

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Table A.22 — Equipment-specific data — Pumps

Type of driver Equipment class, type and identifica- Specify High
tion code
Fluid handled Type Oil, gas, condensate, freshwater, steam, High
sea water, crude oil, oily water, flare gas,
fuel gas, water/glycol, methanol, nitro-
gen, chemicals, hydrocarbon-combined,
gas/oil, gas/condensate, oil/water, gas/
oil/water, LNG, drilling mud, drilling
cement, other
Fluid corrosive/erosive Classify as shown in footnote a Benign, moderate, severe Medium
Application – pump Where applied Booster, supply, injection, transfer, lift, Medium
dosage, disperse, cooling, drilling, other
Pump – design Design characteristic Axial, radial, composite, diaphragm, High
plunger, piston, screw, vane, gear, lobe
Power – design Design/rated power of pump Kilowatt High
Utilization of capacity Normal operating/design capacity Percent Medium
Suction pressure – de- Design pressure Pascal (bar) Medium
sign
Discharge pressure – Design pressure Pascal (bar) High
design
Speed Design speed Revolutions per minute or strokes per Medium
minute
Number of stages Centrifugal: number of impellers (in Number Low
all stages)
Reciprocating: number of cylinders
Rotary: number of rotors
Body type Barrel, split casing, etc. Barrel, split case, axial split, cartridge, Low
Shaft orientation — Horizontal, vertical Low
Shaft sealing Type Mechanical, oil seal, dry gas, packed, Low
gland, dry seal, labyrinth, combined
Transmission type Type Direct, gear, integral Low
Coupling Coupling Fixed, flexible, hydraulic, magnetic, Low
disconnect
Environment Submerged or dry-mounted — Medium
Pump cooling Specify if separate cooling system is Yes/No Low
installed
Bearing support Type Overhung, between bearings, pump Low
casing, split sleeve
a Benign (clean fluids, e.g. air, water, nitrogen).
Moderately corrosive/erosive (oil/gas not defined as severe, sea water, occasionally particles).
Severely corrosive/erosive [sour gas/oil (high H2S), high CO2, high sand content].
A.2.2.7 Steam turbines

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Table A.23 — Type classification — Steam turbines

Steam turbines ST Multi-stage MS
Single-stage SS
Key
T1 turbine stage 1
T2 turbine stage 2
Figure A.8 — Boundary definition — Steam turbines

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Table A.24 — Equipment subdivision — Steam turbines

Equipment Steam turbines
unit
Subunit Power Condenser Regulating Lubrication Control and Miscellaneous
turbine system system monitoring
Maintainable Piping Condenser Filter Cooler Actuating Cranking sys-
items device tem
Radial bearing Reg. pump Pump Filter
Control unit Hood
Rotor Vacuum pump Oil
Internal power
Seals Oil seal pump
supply
Stator/casing Piping
Monitoring
Steam reg. Pump
Sensors a
valves
Motor
Valves
Thrust bear-
Reservoir
ing Wiring
Valves
Piping
Seals
a Specify type of sensor, e.g. pressure, temperature, level etc.
Table A.25 — Equipment-specific data — Steam turbines

Driven unit Equipment class, type and identifica- Compressor, crane, generator, pump, High
tion code winch, etc.
Power – design ISO power rating Kilowatt High
Power – operating Specify the approximate power at which Kilowatt Medium
the unit has been operated for most of
the surveillance time.
Speed Design speed (power shaft) Revolutions per minute Medium
Number of shafts Specify number Number Medium
Regulating system Specify type Electronic, hydraulic Medium
Backup starting system Specify if relevant Electric, hydraulic, pneumatic Low
Fuel Fuel type Gas, oil-light, oil-medium, oil‑heavy, dual Medium
Air inlet filtration type Type Free text Low
A.2.2.8 Turbo expanders
Table A.26 — Type classification — Turbo expanders

Turbo expanders TE Centrifugal CE
Axial AX

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

NOTE Driven units other than recompressors (e.g. pumps or generators) are also outside the boundary.
Figure A.9 — Boundary definition — Turbo expanders
Table A.27 — Equipment subdivision — Turbo expanders

Equipment unit Turbo expanders
Subunit Expander tur- Control and Lubrication Shaft seal sys- Miscellaneous
bine monitoring system tem
Maintainable Rotor w/impel- Actuating device Reservoir Seal-gas equip- Others
items lers ment
Control unit Pump
Inlet vanes Seal gas
Internal power Motor
Casing supply
Filter
Radial bearing Monitoring
Cooler
Thrust bearing Sensors a
Valves
Seals Valves
Piping
Inlet screen Wiring
Oil
Valves Piping
Piping Seals

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Table A.28 — Equipment-specific data — Turbo expanders

Type of driven unit Equipment class, type and identifica- Specify High
tion code
Power – design Max. design output power Kilowatt High
Power – operating Specify the approximate power at which Kilowatt Low
the unit has been operated for most of
the surveillance time.
Speed Design speed Revolutions per minute Medium
Inlet flow Design inlet flow, turbine Kilograms per hour Medium
Inlet temperature Design inlet temperature, turbine Degrees Celsius Medium
Inlet pressure Design inlet pressure, turbine Pascal (bar) Medium
Gas handled Average molar m a s s Grams per mole Low
(specific gravity × 28,96)
Gas corrosiveness/ Specify as shown in the footnote a Benign, moderate, severe Medium
erosiveness
Type of design Type Centrifugal, axial Medium
Number of stages Number of stages (in series) Number Low
Casing-split type Type Horizontal/vertical Low
Shaft sealing Type Mechanical, oil, seal, dry gas, packed, Low
gland, dry seal, labyrinth, combined
Flow-control turbine Type Variable nozzles, nozzle-group valves, Low
throttle valve, fixed inlet
a Benign (clean and dry gas).
Moderately corrosive/erosive (some particles or droplets, some corrosiveness).

Severe corrosive/erosive (sour gas, high CO2 content, high content of particles).
A.2.3 Mechanical equipment
A.2.3.1 Cranes
Table A.29 — Type classification — Cranes

Cranes CR Electro-hydraulic operated HO
Diesel hydraulic operated DO

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Key
1 boundary
2 crane base (u/s slew ring)
a Power supply.
b Communication signal in/out.
NOTE The boundary drawing illustrates one type of crane commonly used offshore. Several other categories
exist, viz. traversing cranes, gantry cranes etc. It is necessary to adapt the taxonomy for these categories to each
category.
Figure A.10 — Boundary definition — Cranes

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Table A.30 — Equipment subdivision — Cranes

Equipment Cranes
unit
Subunit Crane Boom Hoist Swing Power Control Miscellane-
structure system system system system and moni- ous
toring
Maintainable A-frame/ Boom Hoist winch Slew bear- Hydraulic PC/PLS Others
items king ing pumps
Boom bear- Hoist Control
Drivers ing sheaves Slew ring Electric valves
cabin engine
Hydraulic Hook Slew motor Internal
Engine cylinder Diesel en- power
Lifting wire Slew pinion
room gine supply
Luffing
Shock
Pedestal winch Proportion- Amplifiers
damper
al valves
Crane frame Luffing wire Joysticks
Hydraulic
Luffing Load indi-
tank
sheaves cator
Hydraulic
Boom stop
filters
cylinder
Hydraulic
oil
Table A.31 — Equipment-specific data — Cranes

Type of driver Driver unit (equipment class, Specify High
type and identification code)
Overall maximum height Specify Metres Low
Main boom length Specify Metres Medium
A-frame height Specify Metres Low
Boom, min. angle Specify Degrees Low
Boom, max. angle Specify Degrees Low
Slew bearing type Specify Conical, roller High
Hydraulic operating medium Hydraulic fluid type Oil-based, synthetic-based, water-based Low
Hydraulic operating pressure Specify Pascal (bar) Low
Total unit weight Specify Metric tonnes Medium
Boom total weight Specify Metric tonnes Low
Safe working load (SWL) Crane’s safe working load Metric tonnes High
Max. operating swing Turning range (total) Degrees Medium
Max. moment Crane’s max. moment Tonne·metre High
Hoist speed 1 At max. load Metres per second Medium
Hoist speed 2 At no load Metres per second Low
Slewing speed 1 At max. load Degrees per second Medium
Slewing speed 2 At no load Degrees per second Low
WHIP crane Installed or not Yes/No Low
Heave compensation system Installed or not Yes/No Low

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)


Automatic overload protection Installed or not Yes/No High
system (AOPS)
Manual overload protection sys- Installed or not Yes/No High
tem (MOPS)
Constant tension Installed or not Yes/No Low
A.2.3.2 Heat exchangers

NOTE Heat exchangers include coolers, condensers and re-vaporizers, etc.
Table A.32 — Type classification — Heat exchangers

Heat exchangers HE Shell and tube ST
Plate P
Plate fin PF
Double pipe DP
Bayonet BY
Printed circuit PC
Air-cooled AC
Spiral S
Spiral-wound SW

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Figure A.11 — Boundary definition — Heat exchangers
Table A.33 — Equipment subdivision — Heat exchangers

Equipment unit Heat exchangers
Subunit External Internal Control and Miscellaneous
monitoring
Maintainable items Support Body/shell Actuating device Fan a
Body/shell Tubes Control unit Motor
Valves Plates Internal power supply
Piping Seals (gaskets) Monitoring
Sensors b
Valves
Wiring
Piping
Seals
a Applicable for air-cooled heat exchangers only.

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Table A.34 — Equipment-specific data — Heat exchangers

Fluid, hot side Fluid type Oil, gas, condensate, freshwater, steam, High
water/glycol, methanol, nitrogen, chemi-
cals, hydrocarbon, air
Fluid, cold side Fluid type Oil, gas, condensate, freshwater, steam, High
water/glycol, methanol, nitrogen, chemi-
cals, hydrocarbon, air
Rated heat transfer Design value Kilowatt Medium
Heat-transfer area — Metres squared Medium
Utilization Used/rated heat transfer Percent Medium
Pressure, hot side Design pressure Pascal (bar) Medium
Pressure, cold side Design pressure Pascal (bar) Medium
Temperature drop, hot Operating Degrees Celsius Low
side
Temperature rise, cold Operating Degrees Celsius Low
side
Size – diameter External Millimetres Medium
Size – length External Metres Medium
Number of tubes/plates — Number Low
Tube/plate material Specify material type in Free text Medium
tubes/plates.
A.2.3.3 Heaters and boilers
A.2.3.3.1 Boundary definitions for heaters and boilers
The boundary definition applies to hydrocarbon- (HC-) fired heaters and boilers. The layout of heaters
and boilers can vary considerably; however, they all apply the same principle supplying energy to heat
or boil a medium. The energy can be supplied through combustion of hydrocarbons, through supply of a
high‑temperature medium (e.g. steam) or by electricity.
The heater and boiler components may vary significantly in design, but will typically include a
vessel/shell in which the heating process is performed. For heaters and HC-fired boilers, a burner device
and an exhaust system are included. Unlike most boilers, the heaters contain a tube coil through which
the medium being heated flows.
For HC-fired heaters and boilers, the fuel-control valve is inside the equipment boundary, while the
fuel-conditioning equipment (e.g. scrubbers) and ESD/PSD valves are outside the boundary.
Inlet, outlet, pressure-relief and drain valves are specifically excluded. Valves and instruments included
are those locally mounted and/or which form a pressure boundary (e.g. block valves, calibration valves,
local indicators/gauges).

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Table A.35 — Type classification — Heaters and boilers

Equipment class — Equipment type
Level 6
Heaters and boilers HB Direct-fired heater DF
Electric heater EH
Indirect HC-fired heater IF
Heater treater HT
Non-HC-fired boiler NF
Electric boiler EB
HC-fired boiler FB
Figure A.12 — Boundary definition — Heaters and boilers

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Table A.36 — Equipment subdivision — Heaters and boilers

Equipment unit Heaters and boilers
Subunit Column Externals Internals Control and Miscellaneous
monitoring
Maintainable Body/shell Body/shell Body/shell Actuating device Draft fan/motor
items Others
Packing Piping Burner Control unit
Reflux coil/ Support Firetube Internal power
condenser supply
Valves Exhaust stack
Monitoring
Tube coil
Sensors a
Support
Valves
Wiring
Piping
Seals
Table A.37 — Equipment-specific data — Heaters and boilers

Energy source Type of heating energy Electricity, exhaust gas, fuel gas, hot oil, High
liquid fuel, steam
Heated/boiled medium Type of fluid being heated/boiled MEG, TEG, HC-based heating medium, High
water, water/TEG
Rated heat transfer Design value Kilowatt High
Inlet temperature Design value Degrees Celsius Medium
Outlet temperature Design value Degrees Celsius Medium
Size – diameter Specify Millimetres Medium
Size – length Specify Metres Medium
Number of tubes Specify Number Medium
Tube material Specify Specify Low
Tube coil configuration Specify Helical, horizontal, single-pass, spiral, Low
split‑pass, vertical
Packing type — Specify High
Heater type Direct-fired only Box, cabin, cylindrical Low
Number of burners — Number Low
A.2.3.4 Pressure vessels

NOTE Pressure vessels include separators, scrubbers, cyclones, etc.
Table A.38 — Type classification — Pressure vessels

Pressure vessels VE Stripper SP
Separator SE
Coalescer CA
Flash drum FD
Scrubber SB

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)


Contactor CO
Surge drum SD
Cyclone CY
Hydrocyclone HY
Slug catcher SC
Adsorber AD
Dryer DR
Pig trap PT
Distillation column DC
Saturator SA
Reactor RE
De-aerator DA
Figure A.13 — Boundary definition — Pressure vessels

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Table A.39 — Equipment subdivision — Pressure vessels

Equipment unit Pressure vessels
Subunit External items Internal items Control and Miscellaneous
monitoring
Maintainable items Body/Shell Body/Shell Actuating device Others
Valves Cyclones b Control unit
Piping Hydrocyclone liners b Internal power supply
Support Plates, trays, vanes, Monitoring
pads
Sensors a
Nozzle
Valves
Sand-trap system
Wiring
Heater
Piping
Corrosion protection
Seals
Distributor
Coil
b Applies only for equipment type: Hydrocyclone.
Table A.40 — Equipment-specific data — Pressure vessels

Fluid(s) Main fluid Oil, gas, condensate, freshwater, steam, High
fuel gas, water/glycol, methanol, nitrogen,
chemicals, hydrocarbon combined, gas/oil,
gas/condensate, oil/water, gas/oil/water
Pressure – design Design pressure Pascal (bar) High
Temperature – design Design temperature Degrees Celsius Low
Pressure – operating Operating pressure Pascal (bar) Medium
Temperature – operating Operating temperature Degrees Celsius Low
Size – diameter External Millimetres Medium
Size – length External Metres Medium
Body material Specify type or code Free text Low
Orientation Specify Horizontal, vertical, spherical Low
Number of branches Pressurized connections only Number Low
Internals Design principle Baffles, trays, grid plate, demister, heat coil, Low
diverter, de-sander, combined
A.2.3.5 Piping

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Table A.41 — Type classification — Piping

Piping a PI Carbon steels CA
Stainless steels ST
High-strength low-alloy steels LO
Titanium TI
Polymers including fibre-rein- PO
forced
a May be used to represent ducts.
The piping boundary definition will include all facilities to transfer and control fluid between pieces
of rotating equipment, mechanical equipment and tanks, including also vent and drain lines to the
environment. However, instrument tubing for pneumatic or hydraulic control is excluded.
Figure A.14 — Boundary definition — Piping

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Table A.42 — Equipment subdivision — Piping

Equipment unit Piping
Subunit Pipe Valve a Control and Miscellaneous
monitoring
Maintainable items Fastener/bolts Valve body Actuating device Pipe support
Fitting Valve seals Control unit Others
Flange Actuator Internal power
supply
Header Bonnet
Monitoring
Lining Accessories
Sensors b
Pipe element
Valves
Plug
Wiring
Seals/gaskets
Piping
Seals
a It should be marked if the valve(s) is/are registered as (a) separate equipment units(s) in the
database (see also A.2.5.4).
Table A.43 — Equipment-specific data — Piping

Diameter Outer diameter Millimetres High
Wall thickness Specify Millimetres Medium
Length Total length Metres High
Design pressure Max. allowable pressure Pascal (bar) High
Fluid handled Type Oil, gas, condensate, freshwater, steam, High
fuel gas, water/glycol, methanol, nitrogen,
chemicals, hydrocarbon-combined, gas/oil,
gas/condensate, oil/water, gas/oil/water
Fluid corrosive/erosive Classify as shown in the footnote a Benign, moderate, severe Medium
Pipe material Specify Carbon steel, stainless steel, alloy type, Medium
composite, titanium etc.
Insulated Specify Yes/No Low
Number of valves Number of valves installed on the Number Medium
pipe length considered
Type of valves Specify valve category PSV, ESD, HIPPS, manual, etc. Low
Number of flanges Specify Number Low
Severely corrosive/erosive [sour gas/oil (high H2S), high CO2, high sand content].
A.2.3.6 Winches

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Table A.44 — Type classification — Winches

Winches WI Electric winch EW
Hydraulic winch HW
Figure A.15 — Boundary definition — Winches
Table A.45 — Equipment subdivision — Winches

Equipment unit Winches
Subunit Winch Power trans- Control and Miscellaneous
mission monitoring
Maintainable items Bearing Bearing Actuating device Hood
Chain Coupling Control unit Others
Drum Gear Internal power
supply
Lubrication Shaft
Monitoring
Reel
Sensors a
Speedbrake
Valves
Spool
Wiring
Structure
Piping
Tensioning and mo-
tion compensation Seals
Wire

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Table A.46 — Equipment-specific data — Winches

Type of driver Equipment class, type and code Specify High
Wire/chain type Type of hoisting line Cable, chain, rope, umbilical, wire High
Max. output Max. input power – design Kilowatt High
Max. capacity Max. load capacity Metric tonnes Medium
Drum capacity Max. drum capacity Metres Low
Drum diameter — Metres Low
Wire diameter Wire/line thickness Millimetres Low
Speed – design Max. operating speed Revolutions per minute High
Transmission type Type Direct, gear, integral Low
Coupling Type Disconnect, fixed, flexible, hydraulic Low
Lubrication of bearings Type Specify Low
No. of drums Number Number Low
Spooling device As applicable Yes/No Low
Constant tensioning system As applicable Yes/No Low
Heave compensation system As applicable Yes/No Low
Regeneration of power As applicable Yes/No Low
Remote control As applicable Yes/No Low
A.2.3.7 Turrets
Table A.47 — Type classification — Turrets

Turrets TU Disconnectable turrets DT
Permanent turrets PT
A.2.3.7.1 Boundary definitions for turrets
A.2.3.7.1.1 Disconnectable turrets
The disconnectable turret boundary is defined as follows:

a) interfaces between the ship hull and the turret or buoy;
b) mooring lines and anchors down to seabed included within boundary;
c) interface between turret and turret compartment (boundary includes riser termination);
d) manifold piping and valves between the riser termination and the swivel or dragged chain outside
the boundary;
e) control and monitoring equipment excluded from the boundary.
The boundary definition for permanent turrets is focused on the marine structures and dedicated
turret systems.
A.2.3.7.1.2 Permanent turrets

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

The permanent turret boundary is defined as follows:

a) The interface between the ship hull and the outer diameter of the turret defines the boundary
between the ship structure and the turret.
b) Mooring lines and anchors down to the seabed are included within the boundary.
c) The interface between turret and turret compartment defines the upper boundary of the turret.
d) The riser and umbilical termination is inside the equipment boundary.
e) The risers are outside the boundary (covered as a separate equipment class).

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Key
1 boundary 6 anchor winches
2 swivel 7 riser
3 riser termination 8 mooring lines
4 production manifold 9 anchors
5 ship
Figure A.16 — Boundary definition — Turrets

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Table A.48 — Equipment subdivision — Turrets

Equipment unit Turrets
Subunit Turret Mooring Riser and umbil- Utility systems
ical termination
Maintainable Bearing-roller Anchor Bend-restrictor Ballast system
items lock
Bearing-slide Buoy a Bilge system
Hang-off
Bearing-wheel Chain Lock buoy/ship
system a
Structure Synthetic rope
Power system
Turning and lock- Connection to
ing system structure Pull-in a
Winch Ventilation
Wire
a Only relevant for disconnectable turrets.
Table A.49 — Equipment-specific data — Turrets

Application Main use External loading, external production/injec- High
tion, internal loading, internal production/
injection
Turret location Where installed on the vessel Bow, stern, behind living quarter High
Fluid transmission Fluid-transfer method Dragged chain, jumper, swivel High
Rotation system — Active, passive High
Riser termination Type Flanged, quick connect, quick disconnect, High
welded
Number of risers — Number High
Number of umbilicals — Number High
Number of anchor lines — Number High
Wave height Significant height – design value Meters Medium
Vessel displacement — Metric tonnes Medium
A.2.3.8 Swivels
Table A.50 — Type classification — Swivels

Swivels SW Axial AX
Toroidal TO
Electric/signal ES

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Figure A.17 — Boundary definition — Swivels
Table A.51 — Equipment subdivision — Swivels

Equipment unit Swivels
Subunit Swivel Miscellaneous
Maintainable items Dynamic seals Tensioners
Bearing Common items
Liquid barrier system
Bolting (incl. both structural and pressure connections)
Casing
Brushes a
a Only for electric swivels.
Table A.52 — Equipment-specific data — Swivels

Number of paths For power and signal swivels no. of paths is Number High
defined as no. of services
Design pressure — Pascal (bar) Medium
Design temperature — Degrees Celsius Low
Enclosure Type of enclosure Closed compartment, naturally Medium
ventilated
Produced-fluid cor- Type of service Sweet service, sour service Medium
rosiveness
Sand production Measured or estimated sand production Grams per cubic metre Low
Electric power Power swivels only Kilowatt Medium
Voltage – power Power swivels only a Volt Medium
Voltage signal Signal swivels only a Volt Medium
a If several levels exist, record the most dominating and add further explanation as “Remarks”.

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

A.2.3.9 Storage tanks

NOTE Storage tanks include atmospheric tanks and low-pressure tanks (non-refrigerated and refrigerated).
This equipment class does not include offshore tanks (petroleum, diesel, MEG, drilling fluid, etc.) and underground
storage cavern.
Table A.53 — - Type classification – Storage tanks

Equipment class - Level 6 Equipment type
Storage tanks TA Fixed-Roof FR
Lifting Roof LR
Diaphragm DP
External Floating Roof EF
Roofless RL
Fixed Roof with Internal Floating Roof IF
Figure A.18 — Boundary definition — Storage tanks

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Table A.54 — Equipment subdivision — Storage tanks

Equipment unit Storage tanks
Tank Control and
Subunit External Internal Miscellaneous
structure monitoring
Maintainable items Shell (or side- Bottom drain Heaters a Sensors b Mixers
walls)
Roof drain c Cathodic Piping Fire-fighting
Roof protection system
Seal c Open vent
Bottom Nozzles Lightning protec-
Platform Flame arrester
tion system
Nozzles Piping
Walkway
Others
Manholes Swing line c
Stairway
Cleanout
Ladder c
Foundation
Centring and
anti-rotation
device c
Secondary
containment d
a Applicable for heated storage tanks only.
c Applicable for floating roof tanks only.
d Applicable for refrigerated liquefied gas storage only.
Table A.55 — Equipment-specific data — Storage tanks

Stored product(s) Main product(s) Crude oil, oily water, gasoline, die- High
sel, methanol, water, refrigerated
LPG, refrigerated LNG, chemicals
Product specific gravity Relative density Number Medium
Design standard Design standard Standard / edition / addendum Medium
Design pressure Maximum positive gauge pressure Pascal (bar) High
Design vacuum Maximum partial vacuum Pascal (bar) High
Volume Nominal liquid capacity Cubic metres Medium
Size – diameter Nominal diameter Metres Medium
Size – height Nominal height Metres Medium
Maximum design temperature Degrees Celsius High
Temperature - design
Minimum design temperature Degrees Celsius High
Temperature - operating Operating temperature Degrees Celsius Medium
Shell material Specify type or code Specify Medium
Roof material Specify type or code Specify Medium
Coating Specify Yes/No Medium
Heating system Specify Yes/No Low
Refrigerated tank system Specify Yes/No Medium
Roof type Fixed or floating Fixed or floating Medium
Floating roof type Specify Specify Medium
Wall thickness Nominal thickness (1st course) Millimetres Medium
Mixer/agitator Specify Yes/No Low
Secondary containment Specify Yes/No Medium

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

A.2.4 Electrical equipment
A.2.4.1 Uninterruptible power supply (UPS)
Table A.56 — Type classification — UPS

UPS UP Dual UPS with standby bypass UB
Rectifier supplied from emergency power
Bypass from main power system
Dual UPS without bypass UD
Single UPS with bypass US
Bypass from main power system
Single UPS without bypass UT

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Key
a Make-before-break switch.
Figure A.19 — Boundary definition — UPS

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Table A.57 — Equipment subdivision — UPS

Equipment unit UPS
Subunit Battery unit Bypass unit Inverter unit Rectifier unit/ Control and Miscellaneous
DC supply monitoring
Maintainable Battery Bypass switch Bypass switch Cabling Control unit Cabinet
items breaker
Bypass trans- Cabling Contactor Internal Insulation
Battery bank former feeder a power supply
Connection/ Cooling fans
Cabling Contactor socket Fuse(s) Monitoring
Others
feeder a
Circuit break- Fuse(s) Fused switch Sensors b
er Fuse(s)
Instrument Instrument Wiring
Connection/ Instrument
Inverter Rectifier Insulation
socket
Static switch monitoring
Static switch Rectifier
Instrument device
transformer
Inverter
transformer
a Normally located in the supplying switchboard.
b Specify type of sensor, e.g. pressure, temperature, level, etc. See also equipment class Input devices in A.2.5.2, and
in general, caution should be made with respect to which such items to include inside the equipment class UPS.
Table A.58 — Equipment-specific data — UPS

Application What equipment the UPS is applied for Circuit breaker, control systems, safety High
systems, telecommunication
System input voltage Input voltage Volt High
Input frequency Rated input 50 Hz or 60 Hz High
Number of phases input 1-phase or 3-phase Number High
voltage
Voltage variation Input voltage Percent Low
Frequency variation Input frequency Percent Low
System output voltage Output voltage Volt High
Output frequency Rated output 50 Hz, 60 Hz or DC High
Number of phases output 1-phase or 3-phase Number High
voltage
R ated out put load and Apparent power and power factor in Kilovolt·amperes/cosφ High
power factor nominal operations
Degree of protection Protection class in accordance with IP code Medium
IEC 60529
Ambient temperature Operating temperature range Minimum and maximum temperature Low
in degrees Celsius
Cooling method Specify Water, air, others Medium
UPS string system The numbers of UPS systems which Dual, single, triple Medium
are working in parallel
Rectifier/inverter bypass The type of bypass switch Manual, static Medium
system
Battery backup time The time during which the battery Minutes Medium
can supply rated output power to
the inverter
Recharge time The time to recharge the battery to Hours Medium
90 % capacity
Battery technology Type of NiCd, Pb-acid, other Medium

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)


Battery earth-fault moni- Specify Common, individual, N.A. Low
toring
Method of ventilation Specify Forced, natural Low
Number of battery banks Specify Number Medium
A.2.4.2 Power transformers

NOTE The power transformers covered in this A.2.4.2 are used in conjunction with offshore (topsides) and
onshore power supply for e.g. electric motor. Subsea power transformers are covered in A.2.6.5 as maintainable
item. Some information in A.2.4.2 can be relevant if such items are to be subject to more detailed reliability data
collection.
Table A.59 — Type classification — Power transformers

Power transformers PT Oil immersed OT
Dry DT
Figure A.20 — Boundary definition — Power transformers

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Table A.60 — Equipment Subdivision — Power transformers

Equipment unit Power transformers a
Subunit Transformer unit Monitoring system Miscellaneous
Maintainable items Oil Bucholz relay Bushing insulators
Tank Level indicator Terminal blocks
Windings Thermometer Connectors
Fan Relief valve Wiring
Core Pressure relay Grounding
Expansion tank Current transformers Junction box
Radiator Silica-gel device
Tap changer Dampers
Neutral impedance Penetrator b
Outer tank b Neutral grounding resistors
(NGRs)
a For non-subsea equipment classes, note variations between frequency converters, power transformers, and VSD
electric motors.
b Subsea application
c Note a subsea power transformer located on the seabed as part of Equipment class “Subsea electrical power
distribution“ (see A.2.6.5) is a maintainable item. As part of “Subsea electrical power distribution”, there could step-up
and/or step-down transformers that are located topsides/onshore, and these would be same as the equipment class Power
transformer in Table A.60.
Table A.61 — Equipment-specific data — Power transformers

Name Description Unit or Code list Priority
Frequency Rated frequency Hertz Low
Primary voltage Rated voltage Kilovolts High
Secondary voltage Rated voltage Kilovolts High
Voltage additional Rated voltage tertiary or further windings Kilovolts High
windings
Power – design Rated power Kilovolt·amperes High
Power factor Cos φ Number Low
Efficiency Efficiency factor (η) Number = 1 Medium
Degree of protection Protection class in accordance with IEC 60529 Code as in IEC 60529:2001, Clause 4 Low
Thermal class desig- Thermal class in accordance with IEC 60085 Y, A, E, B, F, H, 200, 220, 250 Medium
nation
Temperature rise In accordance with IEC 60076-2 Degrees Celsius Low
Transformer cooling Type in accordance with IEC 60076-2 Code as in IEC 60076-2:1993, Clause 3 High
Number of phases 1-phase or 3-phase Number High
Level of insulation Insulation in accordance with IEC 60076-3 Kilovolts High
Three-phase trans- Type and combination of connections (vector Code as recommended in IEC 60076- High
former connection groups) as star, delta, etc. in accordance with 1:2000, Annex D
IEC 60076-1
Type of dry trans- Specify if the windings are encapsulated in Encapsulated/not encapsulated Medium
former winding solid insulation. Cast resin is an example of
solid insulation.

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

A.2.4.3 Switchgear
Switchgear have a wide application offshore and onshore for the distribution and protection of high
and low voltage power systems. The classification includes both high voltage (>1KV) and low voltage
(<1KV) applications. High voltage boards can be air insulated or gas insulated, as shown in Table A.62.
It should be noted that low voltage switchgear also includes distribution boards.
Single phase, three phase and direct current applications are included in the scope.
Table A.62 — Type classification —Switchgear

Equipment class – Level 6 Equipment type
Switchgear SG Low voltage LV
Oil and vacuum insulated OV
High voltage air insulated HA
High voltage gas insulated HG
Figure A.21 — Boundary definition — Switchgear

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Table A.63 — Equipment Subdivision — Switchgear

Equipment unit Switchgear
Subunit Main power circuits Control protection and monitoring Miscellaneous
Maintainable Circuit breaker a Metering b Interface cabinet
items Cable termination Protection relay and interlock c Cooling
Current transformers Control power supply Enclosure f (cabinet)
Voltage transformers Miniature circuit breakers (MCB)
Disconnectors Communication interface
Earthing switch Terminal blocks and connectors
Motor starters (contactor) PLC
Actuator d Sensor e
Busbar g Valve
Piping
Wiring
a Includes internals, such as closing coil, trip coil, position sensor, spring etc.
b Includes voltmeters and ammeters.
c The interlock may either be included as software in the protection relay, or as conventional relay logic.
d Actuator for energising the mechanism for release of the circuit breaker.
e For gas insulated switchgear (equipment type HG), sensor will be provided for monitoring the over-pressurized
chamber.
f The racking mechanism is part of Enclosure. The cables into and out of the enclosure is not considered as part of the scope.
g Busbar insulators are a part of the busbar.
Table A.64 — Equipment-specific data — Switchgear

System application Description of the switchboard application Control system, safety system Medium
(services supplied)
Rated system volt- Expected operation voltage Volts, AC or DC High
age
Rated busbar cur- Maximum continuously current at specified Amperes High
rent conditions
Rated short time The rms value of the short circuit current Kilo Amperes (kA) Low
withstand current which the switchgear shall withstand during
the specified time
Rated duration of The interval of time in which the switchgear Seconds Low
short circuit shall withstand specified short time with-
stand current
Utilization of ca- Normal operating/design capacity % High
pacity
Rated frequency Normal operation frequency Hertz High
Number of circuits Number of outgoing connections Number Medium
Degree of protection Environmental protection for the cabinet IP rating Low
Hazardous area EEX hazardous area rating according to Specify Medium
rating IEC 60079
Switches/Breaker Switches/Breaker rating (A) Specify Low
rating

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

A.2.4.4 Frequency converters
A Variable Speed Drive Systems (VSDS), or Adjustable Speed Drive Systems (ASDS), is intended
to provide power to electric motor(s) such that the speed or torque of the motor(s) may be varied.
Frequency Converters, also known as Variable Frequency Drive System (VFDS), are applicable for AC
electric motors. The VSDS can consist of a frequency converter if it is an AC type VSDS.
VSDS have considerable application in the oil and gas industry ranging from the simple speed control of
a HVAC system to the speed control of a subsea pump in a subsea processing system.
Note that the equipment class “Frequency converters” is thus related to the equipment classes “Electric
motor” (A.2.2.4), “Power transformers” (ref. A.2.4.2), “Subsea electrical power distribution” (A.2.6.5)
and “Electrical submersible pumps” (A.2.7.6) described elsewhere in this International Standard. For
example, a VSD driven electric motor driving a compressor will need to include different equipment
classes when reliability data collection or estimation is done. Note that a subsea frequency converter
however, is a maintainable item for the equipment class “Subsea electrical power distribution” (ref.
A.2.6.5).
Table A.65 — Type classification — Frequency converters

Equipment Class – Level 6 Equipment type
Frequency FC Low voltage LV
converters
High voltage HV
The figure below shows a typical configuration for a Variable Speed Drive System. The equipment class
Frequency converters is given in Figure A.22. Figure A.22 is shown to illustrate how the Frequency
converters fit in the VSDS and the dependencies on other components, like equipment classes Power
transformers (see A.2.4.2) and Electric motors (see A.2.2.4).

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Figure A.22 — Typical VSDS configuration with frequency converters

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Figure A.23 — Boundary definition — Frequency converters

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Table A.66 — Equipment Subdivision — Frequency converters

Equ ipment Frequency converters
unit
Subunit Input stage DC bus Output stage C ont r ol a nd Cooling system Miscellaneous
monitoring
Maintainable Rectifiers Capacitors Inverter Monitoring a Heat exchanger Heaters
items
Protective de- Inductors Output filters Control unit Filter Enclosure fix-
vices tures and fit-
Charging cir- Power cell Internal power Motor
tings
Internal circuit cuits
Supply Piping
breaker or dis- Excitation cir-
Brake choppers
connector Communication Pump cuits
Internal circuit
Harmonic filter Cards Seals Bypass contac-
breaker or dis-
tor
Commutating connector Instruments Valves
reactor
Switch fuses Wiring Enclosure cool-
I nput t r a n s- ing fans
Fuses Miniature circuit
former c
breakers/fuses De-ioniser b
Isolation switch Louver
a Specify type of instrument/sensor, current, voltage, power, speed, contactor feedback.
b For some high voltage units (Equipment type = HV) there will be de-ionised closed water loop for cooling, which would
consist of piping and motor, but also a de-ioniser unit.
c The input transformer is inside the frequency converter (in a VSDS configuration) and is different from a normal power
transformer, but may still also use equipment class “Power transformer” (see Table A.60) if further sub-division is needed.
Table A.67 — Equipment-specific data — Frequency converters

Corresponding Equipment unit (electric motor) which the Tag Medium
driven unit Frequency Converter is connected to
System identifi- System identification number Number High
cation
Voltage type Design characteristic AC, DC High
Type of commu- Describe as per code list Self-commutated, line/load commu- Low
tation tated
Application Where applied Compressor application, subsea, High
downhole, process, drilling, utility
Supply voltage Supply voltage Volts Low
Power - design Design/rated power of the system Kilowatts (kW), Megawatts (MW), High
MegaVoltAmpere (MVA)
Utilization of Normal operating/design capacity % Medium
capacity
Operating fre- Normal range of output frequency Hertz Low
quency range
Converter type Describes whether the rectifier provides One, two or four quadrant Medium
power back into the supply system
Incoming trans- Describes the input connection, whether a Step up, step down, isolating, phase Medium
former connec- transformer is used and its design intent shifting
tions
Output condition- Describes the output connection, whether Output filters, step up transformers Medium
ing output conditioning is used or a step up
transformer

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)


Cooling system What cooling mechanisms are used for the Liquid cooling, air forced cooling. High
design VSDS, transformers, braking resistors and (Indicate most dominant since there
enclosures in practice often is a combination of
the two)
Hazardous area EEX Hazardous area rating in according Specify High
rating with IEC 60079
Ingress protec- Ingress protection rating in according with Specify Medium
tion rating IEC 60529
A.2.5 Safety and control
A.2.5.1 Fire and gas detectors
Table A.68 — Type classification — Fire and gas detectors

Fire and gas detectors FG Fire detection (FGA)
Smoke/Combustion BS
Heat BH
Flame BF
Manual pushbutton BM
Others BA
Gas detection (FGB)
Hydrocarbon AB
Toxic gases AS
Others AO
NOTE: Failure mode code FG is split into FGA and FGB. See also Table B.9.

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Key
a Not applicable for all fire and gas sensors.
Figure A.24 — Boundary definition — Fire and gas detectors
A.2.5.1.1 Boundary definitions for fire and gas detectors
Field input devices such as fire and gas detectors are usually connected to a fire and gas control
logic unit (CLU), which is not included in the boundary of fire and gas detectors (see Figure A.19).
Monitoring/interface units may be used between detector and CLU, and this is part of the fire and
gas detectors. The purpose of these units is, among others, to monitor the detectors, their interface
connections and cables, analysing the incoming data by different algorithms and initiating fault or
alarm signals. The basic principle of data communication between field equipment and such interface
systems can be based on multiplexing and sequential polling of data.
Table A.69 — Equipment subdivision — Fire and gas detectors

Equipment unit Fire and gas detectors
Subunit Sensor Interface unit a Miscellaneous
Maintainable items Cabling Cabinet Others
Cover Control card
Detector (incl. head and Display
associated electronics)
Mounting socket
a Not applicable for all fire and gas sensors.

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Table A.70 — Equipment-specific data — Fire and gas detectors

Functional characteristics
Location on installation Where installed Drill floor, wellhead, process, auxiliary, mud High
processing, power generation, utility, control
room, auxiliary room, living quarter
Environment Exposure Severe, moderate, low, unknown a High
Item characteristics
Sensing principle Type Fire: High
Ionization, optical, IR, UV, IR/UV, rate rise,
rate comp., fixed temp., fusible plug, camera,
multisensor (optical/heat)
Gas:
Catalytic, electrochemical, photoelectrochemical,
photoelectric beam, IR, UV, acoustic, camera,
aspirating, optical beam, solid state
Detector communica- Type Conventional, addressable (one-way), smart Medium
tion (two-way)
Fault tolerance b Response at failure Yes/No Medium
Self-test feature Degree of self-testing No self-test, automatic loop test, built-in test, Medium
combined
Type of Ex protection Explosion classification category, Ex(d), Ex(e), Ex(i), none Low
e.g. Ex(d), Ex(e) c
a Environment classification:
Severe not enclosed and/or outdoor; heavily exposed (vibration, heat, dust, salt);
Moderate partly enclosed and/or moderately exposed (vibration, heat, dust, salt); naturally ventilated;
Low enclosed and/or indoor; minor exposure (vibration, heat, dust, salt); mechanically ventilated.
b Design based on de-energized principle is compatible with fail-safe philosophy. A safety-instrumented system
operating in “normally energized” mode can be designed to fail-safe on loss of power or signal.
c See IEC 60079 (all parts).
A.2.5.2 Input devices
Input devices are, in general, sensors that convert process parameters into an electrical signal that can
be monitored. Typical main categories of input devices are the following:
— transmitter: converts process parameter, e.g. pressure, into proportional electrical signals,
typically 4 mA to 20 mA or 0 V to 10 V (see IEC 60381-2);
— transducer: converts process parameters, e.g. pressure, into proportional electrical signals,
typically unamplified output;
— switch: converts process parameters, e.g. pressure, typically into on/off electrical signals.
Table A.71 — Type classification — Input devices

Input devices IP Pressure PS
Level LS
Temperature TS
Flow FS

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)


Speed SP
Vibration VI
Displacement DI
Analyser AN
Weight WE
Corrosion CO
Limit switch LP
On/off (pushbutton) PB
Others OT
NOTE This boundary drawing does not apply for switches and pushbuttons.
Figure A.25 — Boundary definition — Input devices

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Table A.72 — Equipment subdivision — Input devices

Equipment unit Input devices
Subunit Sensor and electronics Miscellaneous
Maintainable items Sensing element Cabling
Conditioning (electronics) Piping
Others
Table A.73 — Equipment-specific data — Input devices

Functional characteristics
Location on installation Where installed Drill floor, wellhead, process, auxiliary, High
mud processing, power generation,
utility, control room, auxiliary room,
living quarter
Application Where applied Process control, emergency shutdown, High
process shutdown, pressure reduc-
tion, bypass, blowdown, monitoring,
combined
Fluid/gas corrosiveness/ Classify as explained in footnote a Benign, moderate, severe Medium
erosiveness
Item characteristics
Category Main category Transmitter, transducer, switch, High
pushbutton
Sensing principle Applicable for pressure sensors only Bonded strain, semiconductor, strain, High
piezoelectric, electromechanical, ca-
pacitance, reluctance, oscillating wire
Applicable for level sensors only Differential-pressure cell, capacitance, High
conductive, displacement, diaphragm,
sonic, optical, microwave, radio fre-
quency, nuclear
Applicable for temperature sensors only Resistance temperature detector (PT), High
thermocouple, capillary
Applicable for flow sensors only Displacement, differential head High
(closed conduit/pipe, open channel),
velocity, mass
Insert additional types as relevant (e.g. To be defined by user as required High
speed, vibration)
Sensor voting, k out of Y At least k out of the total number, Y, of k = “xx” (integer) Low
(only as relevant) sensors shall provide signal to initiate
Y = “yy” (integer)
control/safety action. k and Y shall be
entered; if no voting, leave blank.
Fault tolerance Response at failure Yes/No High
Detector communication Type Conventional, addressable (one-way), Medium
smart (two-way)
Self-test feature Degree of self-testing No self-test, automatic loop test, High
built‑in test, combined
Type of protection Explosion classif ication categor y, Ex(d), Ex(e), Ex(i), None Low
e.g. Ex(d), Ex(e) b
Severely corrosive/erosive [sour gas/oil (high H2S), high CO2 content, high sand content].
b See IEC 60079 (all parts).

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

A.2.5.3 Control logic units
Table A.74 — Type classification — Control logic units

Control logic units CL Programmable logic control- LC
ler (PLC)
Computer PC
Distributed control unit DC
Relay RL
Solid state SS
Single-loop controller SL
Programmable automation PA
controller (PAC)
Figure A.26 — Boundary definition — Control logic units

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Table A.75 — Equipment subdivision — Control logic units

Equipment Control logic units
unit
Subunit Analog Digital Analog Digital Logic System Power Miscella-
input input output output solver bus supply neous
cards cards cards cards
Maintaina- Input card Input card Output Output Central No subdi- No subdi- Galvanic
ble items card card processor vision vision barriers
Connec- Connec-
unit (CPU)
tion unit tion unit Connec- Connec- Others
(X-wiring) tion unit tion unit Random
(X-wiring) (X-wiring) access
memory
Relay Relay
(RAM)
Watchdog/
diagnostic
Software
Table A.76 — Equipment-specific data — Control logic units

Application – control logic Where used Centralized, distributed, man-machine Medium
interface
CLU redundancy configuration Specify if there are redundant Con- Yes/No Low
trol logic units (CLUs) installed
Self-test feature Degree of self-testing No self-test, automatic-loop test, built- High
in test, combined
Fault tolerance Response at failure Yes/No High
A.2.5.4 Valves
NOTE The valves described in the taxonomy classification given in Table A.77 do not apply for valves used
for specific upstream purposes like subsea valves and valves used in downhole completion. These valves are
covered in the specific sub-clauses in Annex A on this type of equipment. Wellhead and X-mas trees (dry) are,
however, considered as topside valves.
Table A.77 — Type classification — Valves

Valves VA Ball BA
Gate GA
Globe GL
Butterfly BP
Plug PG
Needle NE
Check CH
Diaphragm DI
NOTE 1 Pilot valves are normally non-tagged components used for self-regulation. PSV
solenoid valves are normally a sub-tag of a valve tag used for all ESD/PSD. Quick-exhaust
dump valves are specific valves used if quick response is required (e.g. HIPPS function). Relief
valves are normally PSV valves.
NOTE 2 Valves of a specific type not defined in this table should be coded as OH (Others)
with a comment specifying type description. Example: Clack- or Elastomer-type Deluge
valves).

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)


Flapper FL
Multiple orifice MO
Three-way WA
PSV-conventional SC
PSV-conventional with bellow SB
PSV-pilot operated SP
PSV-vacuum relief SV
Plug and cage PC
External sleeve ES
Disc DC
Axial flow AF
Pinch PI
Others OH
NOTE 1 Pilot valves are normally non-tagged components used for self-regulation. PSV
solenoid valves are normally a sub-tag of a valve tag used for all ESD/PSD. Quick-exhaust
dump valves are specific valves used if quick response is required (e.g. HIPPS function). Relief
valves are normally PSV valves.
NOTE 2 Valves of a specific type not defined in this table should be coded as OH (Others)
with a comment specifying type description. Example: Clack- or Elastomer-type Deluge
valves).

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Figure A.27 — Boundary definition — Valves

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Table A.78 — Equipment subdivision — Valves

Equipment unit Valves
Subunit Valves Actuator a Control and monitoring a Miscellaneous
Maintainable items Valve body Diaphragm Wiring Accumulator
Bonnet Spring Indicator Others
Flange joints Case Instrument, general
Seat rings Piston Instrument, position
Packing/stem seal Stem Monitoring
Seals Seals/gaskets Solenoid valve
Closure member Electrical motor b Pilot valve c
Stem Gear Quick exhaust dump valve
Travel stop Internal power supply
Limit switch
a Not applicable for all valve categories.
b Electric-motor actuator only.
c Applicable for hydraulic/pneumatically actuated valves.
Table A.79 — Equipment-specific data — Valves

Main function Main functional category Flow control, on/off, non-return, Pressure relief, High
instrument or hydraulic control
Application Specify function in the process Annulus (X-mas tree), blowdown, bypass, injection, High
X-over, Deluge, ESD, ESD/PSD, PSD, HIPPS, swab,
wing, relief, control, choke
Where mount- Equipment on which the valve is installed Wellhead, X-mas tree, wellhead flow line, wellhead High
ed injection line, pump, turbine, generator, separator,
heat exchanger, vessel, header, electric motor,
diesel motor, turboexpander, drilling, pipeline,
mud process, utility, living quarter, air inlet, riser
Size Internal diameter Millimetres (inches) Medium
Fluid handled Main fluid only Oil, gas, condensate, freshwater, steam, sea water, High
crude oil, oily water, flare gas, fuel gas, water/gly-
col, methanol, nitrogen, chemicals, hydrocarbon
combined, gas/oil, gas/condensate, oil/water, gas/
oil/water, NGL, LPG, LNG, slurry, etc.
Fluid temper- Operating temperature main fluid Degrees Celsius Medium
ature
Fluid corro- Classify as shown in the footnote a Benign, moderate, severe Medium
siveness/ ero-
siveness
Flowing pres- Normal operating pressure (inlet) Pascal (bar) Medium
sure
Severe corrosive/erosive [sour gas/oil (high H2S), high CO2 content, high sand content].
b Primary actuation principle:
1 single-acting = actuation force by gas (air) or hydraulic fluid for either opening or closing the valve;
2 double-acting = actuation force by gas (air) or hydraulic fluid for both opening and closing the valve;
3 actuation by line/process pressure or actuation by gravity = no actuation apart from possible backup actuation.

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)


Shut-off pres- Maximum differential pressure when Pascal (bar) Low
sure valve closed (design)
For PSVs: set-point opening pressure
Valve material Type Carbon steel (CS), stainless steel (SST), duplex, High
alloy type, composite, titanium
Stem sealing Type Stuffing box, duplex, lip seal, O-ring High
Seat design Type of seat design Soft seated, metal-to-metal seated Medium
A c t u a t i o n Actuator operating principle Single-acting, double-acting, actuation by line/ Medium
principle b process pressure, actuation by gravity
Ac t uat ion – Type of actuation force Electrical, hydraulic, pneumatic, mechanical High
opening (spring), manual, combinations, none
Ac t uat ion – Type of actuation force Electrical, hydraulic, pneumatic, mechanical Medium
closing (spring), manual, combinations, none
Manufactur- Name of actuator manufacturer Specify Low
er – actuator
Manufactur- Name of pilot-valve manufacturer Specify Low
er – pilot valve
Manufactur- Name of solenoid-valve manufacturer Specify Low
er – solenoid
valve
P i l o t- v a l v e Number and configuration (applicable Specify, e.g. 1 × 3/2 (= single 3/2 pilot valve), Low
configuration for pilot-operated valves only) 2 × 4/3 (= double 4/3 pilot valve)
Fail-safe prin- Fail-safe principle Energized, de-energized Low
ciple pilot valve
Solenoid-valve Number and configuration (applicable Specify, e.g. 1 × 3/2 (= single 3/2 pilot valve), Low
configuration for solenoid-operated valves only) 2 × 4/3 (= double 4/3 pilot valve)
Fail-safe prin- Fail-safe principle Energized, de-energized Low
ciple solenoid
valve
Valve fail-safe Fail-safe position Fail-open, Fail-close, Fail-as-is High
position
Trim type Type (applicable for control valves only) Noise reduction, anti-cavitation, multi-stage, High
single-stage
Valve leakage Specify according to applicable reference ISO 5208:2015, Annex A, Table 4 High
class standard (e.g. for valves complying
with API Spec 6D, see ISO 5208:2015)
b Primary actuation principle:
1 single-acting = actuation force by gas (air) or hydraulic fluid for either opening or closing the valve;
2 double-acting = actuation force by gas (air) or hydraulic fluid for both opening and closing the valve;
3 actuation by line/process pressure or actuation by gravity = no actuation apart from possible backup actuation.
A.2.5.5 Nozzles

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Table A.80 — Type classification — Nozzles

Nozzles NO Deluge DN
Sprinkler SR
Water mist WM
Gaseous GA
Figure A.28 — Boundary definition — Nozzles
Table A.81 — Equipment subdivision — Nozzles

Equipment unit Nozzles
Subunit Nozzle Mounting assembly Miscellaneous
Maintainable items Fusible bulb Mounting connector Others
Nozzle body with Seals
internals
Nozzle head
Protective coating
Screen
Solder

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Table A.82 — Equipment-specific data — Nozzles

Application Where in the process applied Deluge, sprinkler High
Hazards pro- Type of protection Electrical, Ex, fuel oil, glycol, HC gas, hydrogen gas, High
tection lubricants, methanol, combustibles, radioactivity,
toxic gas, toxic liquid
Locat ion on Where located in the plant Air inlet, compressor, diesel engine, drilling, electric High
plant motor, FW inlet, gas-metering, generator, header,
heat exchanger, living qt., mud-processing, pigging
station, pipeline, pump, separator, turbine, utility,
vessel, wellhead, wellhead flowline, wellhead
injection line, X-mas tree
Nozzle mate- Specify Brass, chrome-plated, electrode-less nickel-plated, High
rial lead-coated, stainless steel
Nozzle length Specify Millimetres High
Nozzle width Specify Millimetres High
In s t a l lat ion How installed Concealed, horizontal sidewall, pendent, recessed, Low
category upright, vertical sidewall
F l u i d h a n - Main fluid only Potable water, sea water, Inergen, CO2 Medium
dled – nozzles
Fluid corro- Classify as shown in the footnote a Benign, moderate, severe Medium
siveness/ ero-
siveness
Discharge tem- At operating condition Degrees Celsius Low
perature
Flowing pres- Specify Pascal (bar) Medium
sure
Flow rate Specify Litres per minute Medium
Shut-off pres- Maximum differential pressure when Pascal (bar) Low
sure valve closed (design)
For safety pressure-relief valves: set-
point opening pressure
Fluid temper- Specify Degrees Celsius Low
ature
C o n n e c t i o n Specify Millimetres (inches) High
size
Type of nozzle Specify Bolted flange, clamped flange, screwed, welded Medium
end
Spray angle Specify Degrees Medium
Spray type Specify Droplets, mist Medium
Actuation Specify Fusible bulb, solder, external Medium
Nozzle screen Whether or not installed Yes/No Low
A.2.5.6 Lifeboats
The lifeboats addresses lifeboats mounted on offshore oil & gas facilities, and also drilling rigs. Note
that lifeboats, in Arctic areas, are not addressed in this International Standard.
The diving technical equipment within self-propelled hyperbaric lifeboats is not covered by this
International Standard, but by NORSOK U-100:2015.

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Note that there are two types of Free fall lifeboats, drop or skid.
Table A.83 — Type classification — Lifeboats

Lifeboats LB Free fall FF
Davit launched DL
Figure A.29 — Boundary definition — Lifeboats

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Table A.84 — Equipment subdivision — Lifeboats

Equipment Lifeboats
unit
Subunit Main structure Propulsion Control and Launch/ Miscellaneous
monitoring Release a
Maintainable Hull Engine Air regulator Davit structure Communic at ion
items systems
Innerliner Gear box/ Control panel d Davit winch/gear/
motor Electrical system
Superstructure transmission Lifeboat release
incl. light s and
hook Davit wire
Seat/Seat belts Propeller shaft navigation
Lifeboat release Davit winch HPU
Lif t ing/Release Propeller Deluge pump/ pip-
panel
hook attachment Davit control panel ing/nozzles
Steering nozzle
Hydrostatic inter-
Tanks b Hydraulic system g Air cylinder
Steering system lock system e
Doors/Hatches Shackles Battery charger
Waterjet c Limit switches f
Hang-off wires Bilge pump
Skid arrangement h Emergency equip-
ment i
a These maintainable items are located on the host facility (e.g. platform and FPSO). Note that some of these items do not
apply for all types of lifeboat (ref Table A.83). This system also covers the recovery of the launched lifeboat.
b Tanks include fuel and water tanks and other bulkheads, of various material (e.g. GRP).
c Water-jet is seldom in use for lifeboats but is more normal for man-overboard boats (MOB).
d This is control panel onboard the lifeboat.
e This applies only for Davit launched lifeboats,
f Limit switch is physically located as part of the launch/release system on the host facility.
g Hydraulic system includes cylinders.
h Added to cover Free Fall lifeboat that use a skid that will not give a drop straight down.
i Emergency equipment includes first aid, water and food.
Table A.85 — Equipment-specific data — Lifeboats

Automatic release Automatic release of lifeboat No, Yes Medium
release hook
Breathing air capacity Breathing air capacity Minutes Medium
Breathing air system Breathing air system? No, Yes High
Personnel capacity Personnel capacity (count) Each High
Sprinkler system Sprinkler system? No, Yes High
Nautical speed rated Rated nautical speed Knots Medium
Free-fall lifeboat installation height Height above sea level M High
A.2.6 Subsea
A.2.6.1 Subsea production control

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Table A.86 — Type classification — Subsea production control

Subsea production control CS Direct hydraulic DH
Direct electro-hydraulic EH
Multiplexed electro-hydraulic MX
Discrete pilot hydraulic PH
Sequential piloted hydraulic SH
Telemetric hydraulic TH
Figure A.30 — Boundary definition — Subsea production control

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Table A.87 — Equipment subdivision — Subsea production control

Equipment Subsea production control
unit
Subunit Chemical Dynamic Static Electric- Hydraulic- Master Subsea Subsea Sensors a
Injection umbilical umbilical power power control control distr.
(topside) unit (top- unit (top- (topside) module f module b, f
side) side)
Maintainable No Bend Bend No No No Accumulator Accumula- Flow
items breakdown restrictor restrictor break- breakdown break- subsea tor subsea
down down Leak
Buoyancy Hydraulic/ Module base Subsea by-
device chemical line plate pass panel Level
Hydraulic/ LV power/ Chemical inj. Chemical Position

chemical signal line coupling inj. coupling Combined
line
Fibre-optic Fibre-optic Fibre-optic pressure and
J/I-tube seal line i connector d connector d temperature
LV power/ Sheath/ Filter Fibre-optic Pressure
signal line armour jumper i Temperature
Hydraulic
Fibre-optic Subsea h um- coupling Hose Sand
line bilical-ter-
mination LV power/ Hydraulic/ Vibration
Sheath/ unit (SUTU) signal con- chemical
armour nector c line
Topside um-
Stabilizer bilical-ter- Subsea Hydraulic
mination electronic coupling
Tension- module e
and motion- unit (TUTU) Piping
compen- Directional
sation Control Valve LV power/
equilibrium (DCV) signal con-
nector c
Topside um- IWIS g
bilical-ter- LV power/
mination signal
unit (TUTU) jumper
Subsea
cabling
IWIS g
a Sensors inside the subunit Subsea control module (SCM) should not be mixed with those external at other subsea equipment.
b A SUTU can be of different type, e.g. UTA (Umbilical Termination Assembly) or UTH (Umbilical Termination Head), depending on tie-in philosophy.
c LV power/signal connectors” in SCM (or Subsea distribution module; SDM) can include penetrators, which would be of penetrator type: LV
power/signal penetrator. The “LV power/signal connectors” are thus Low Voltage level (up to 1kV). These connectors can be wet or dry mate.
d Fibre-optic connectors can include penetrators in SCM or SDM, which would be penetrator types = Fibre-optic penetrators.
e The Subsea Electrical module (SEM) inside SCM can include penetrators, which would be of penetrator type = Electrical (instrument/signal) or Optical
penetrators. Power supply handled as part of SEM. Note also that in addition to penetrators, a SEM contains other electronic and mechanical components.
f Penetrator which is defined as “a permanent connection through a bulkhead”, might be identified as a separate maintainable item in some data
collection and/or estimation.
g Intelligent Well Interface Standard (IWIS) card(s) can be located inside SCM as a separate canister, or as part of SEM, or as a separate external
module to SCM.
h The connection between dynamic and static called a SUTU can also be a transition joint.
i During data collection precision is required to ensure sufficient information is captured enabling differentiation between failures affecting single
fibre and failures affecting multiple fibres/bundle of fibres.
Table A.88 — Equipment-specific data — Subsea production control

Well identification number Operator description Number or name High
Application Where used HIPPS, manifold, SSIV, pump, wellhead, Medium
X-mas tree, multi-purpose
Type of control fluid — Oil-based, water-based Medium
Type of control system — Closed, open Medium
Redundancy — Yes/no Medium

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)


Manufacturer Specify Free text High
Model type Specify Free text Low
Multilateral wells — Yes/no Low
A.2.6.2 Subsea wellhead and X-mas trees

NOTE Applies only for (wet) Subsea X-mas trees. The (dry) Surface X-mas tree is described in A.2.7.7.
Table A.89 — Type classification — Subsea wellhead and X-mas trees

Subsea wellhead and X-mas XT Vertical VX
trees Horizontal HX

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Key
a Sensors mounted on the Subsea X-mas tree, but covered by subunit sensor in Table A.87.
Figure A.31 — Boundary definition — Subsea wellhead and X-mas trees

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Table A.90 — Equipment subdivision — Subsea wellhead and X-mas trees

Equipment unit Subsea wellhead and X-mas trees
Subunit Subsea wellhead Subsea Tubing hanger Flowbase Flow control Vertical
X-mas tree module a connection
module (VCM)
Maintainable items Permanent guide Chemical inj. cou- Chemical inj. cou- Frame Chemical inj. cou- VCM connector
base (PGB) pling pling pling
Hub/mandrel c Valve and actuator
Temporary guide Flowspool Hydraulic coupling Connector
base (TGB) Valve, check Control system com-
Piping (hard pipe) LV/power signal Flow loop pensation
Conductor housing connector d Valve, process iso-
High pressure cap lation Frame Swivel
Wellhead housing Tu b i n g - h a n g e r
( h ig h-pr e s s u r e Hoses (flexible pip- body Valve, utility iso- Hoses Funnel guide
housing) ing) lation
Tubing-hanger iso- Hydraulic connector ROV-panel override
Casing hangers Debris cap lation plug system
Piping
Annulus seal as- Tree-guide frame ROV panel
Valve, check
semblies (pack- Connector
offs) Valve, choke
Internal isolation cap
Valve, control
Internal tree-cap
valve
Internal tree-cap
plug
Tree cap b
Valve, check
Valve, choke
Valve, control
Valve, other
Valve, process iso-
lation
Valve, utility isolation
Valve, workover
a This can also be designated as choke module.
b The tree cap, which is able to be replaced independently, can also be considered as a subunit of the X-mas tree.
c This can also be designated as flowline mandrel as well as be considered as a subunit of the X-mas tree.
d General carefulness with respect to sensors and interface between tubing hanger and downhole control system.
Table A.91 — Equipment-specific data — Subsea wellhead and X-mas trees

Well identification num- Operator description Number or name High
ber
Install/retrieve guide Guideline/guideline-less, diver-as- Guideline, guideline-less High
sisted and diver-less lay-away
Well type Production, injection Production, injection High
Protection type Over-trawlable, trawl-catching, etc. Trawl-catching, trawl-deflecting, none High
Water depth — Metres High
Design pressure Pressure rating of wellhead and Pascal (bar) High
X-mas tree
Artificial lift well Type of artificial lift in the well Gas lift, ESP, PCP, none High
Number of connections Number of lines connected to the Number Low
tree block
a Neutral (clean fluids with no corrosive effects).
Sweet [moderately corrosive/erosive (oil/gas not defined as severe, raw sea water, occasional particles)].
Sour {severely corrosive/erosive [sour gas/oil (high H2S), high CO2, high sand content]}.

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)


Control principle Defines the control principle for — Low
X-mas tree functions and actuators
Piggable Specify if piggable or not Yes/no Low
Size of tree Dimensions and mass Metres, kilograms Low
Mudline suspension sys- Define whether a mudline suspension Yes/no Low
tem system exists
Multilateral well Define Yes/no Low
Well flow rate Representative well flow rate (pro- Specify Medium
duction or injection)
Fluid produced/injected Main fluid only: oil, gas, condensate, Oil, gas, condensate, injection water, oil and High
injection water gas, gas and condensate, oil/gas/ water,
CO2, gas and water, produced water
Fluid corrosiveness Classify as shown in the footnote a Neutral, sweet, sour High
Fluid erosiveness Erosiveness of the well fluid Benign, clean, moderate, severe, unknown Medium
Valve application X-mas tree valve function Annulus master (AMV), Annulus swab High
(ASV), Annulus wing (AWV), Injection wing
(IWV), Injection master (IMV), Injection
swab (ISV), Production master (PMV),
Production swab, Production wing (PWV),
Crossover (XOV)
Valve design class Type of X-mas tree valve design Ball, Butterfly, Diaphragm, Double ex- High
panding gate, Flapper, Gate, Needle, Piston,
Ram, Swing
Valve actuation Classify Hydraulic, Electrical, Manual Medium
Asphaltenes Specify Yes/no Low
Scale formation Specify Yes/no Low
Wax formation Specify Yes/no Low
Hydrate formation Specify Yes/no Low
Sand production Specify Yes/no Low
A.2.6.3 Risers
Note that the equipment class Dry tree risers (e.g. for dry well completion riser tie-back when TLP’s and
SPAR’s) riser are listed as a separate equipment class in Table A.4, but is not covered by the equipment
class Risers in A.2.6.3.
Table A.92 — Type classification — Risers

Risers PR Rigid RI
Flexible FL

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Figure A.32 — Boundary definition — Risers
Table A.93 — Equipment subdivision — Risers

Equipment Risers
unit
Subunit Riser Riser base Heating system Protection Accessories
Maintainable Connector Gas lift Topside part Anode Bend restrictor
items
Insulation Structure Subsea part Coating – exter- Buoyancy device
nal
Pipe Valve, process J/I-tube seal
isolation
Stabilizing and guiding equipment
Valve, utilit y
Tension- and motion-compensation
isolation
equipment
Table A.94 — Equipment-specific data — Risers

Application What type of platform Fixed, floating, buoy Medium
Riser length — Metres High
Working pressure — Pascal (bar) Medium
b Note that as per ISO/TR 12489:2013, 3.6.4 SSIV can be either an actuated valve (e.g. remotely controlled subsea
valve) or non-actuated valve (e.g. subsea check valve). The control system for the subsea riser base valves will be covered
by equipment class “Subsea production control”, e.g. dynamic umbilical and subsea control module, plus topsides control
equipment (see A.2.6.1).

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)


Coating External and internal Specify Low
Corrosion inhibitor — Yes/no Low
Temperature Design value Degrees Celsius Low
Manufacturer Specify — High
Gas lift If installed or not Yes/no Low
Pipe diameter — Millimetres Medium
Pipe material Specify Steel, composite, titanium, clad/lined Medium
Protection, corrosion Specify Active, passive Medium
Protection, mechanical Specify I-tube, J-tube, riser shaft penetration Medium
Riser layout Specify Free hanging, Lazy S, lazy wave, pliant Medium
wave, steep S, steep wave
Wall thickness Specify Millimetres Low
Fluid conducted Main fluid only: oil, gas, condensate, Oil, gas, condensate, injection water, oil High
injection water and gas, gas and condensate, oil/gas/
water, CO2, gas and water, produced water
Fluid corrosiveness Classify as shown in footnote a Neutral, sweet, sour High
Asphaltenes Specify Yes/no Low
Scale formation Specify Yes/no Low
Wax formation Specify Yes/no Low
Hydrate formation Specify Yes/no Low
Sand production Specify Yes/no Low
Valve application Riser base valve function Pipeline isolation, SSIV b, HIPPS High
Valve design class Type of riser base valve design Side-entry ball, top-entry ball, double High
expanding gate (DEG), slab gate, wedge
gate, check
b Note that as per ISO/TR 12489:2013, 3.6.4 SSIV can be either an actuated valve (e.g. remotely controlled subsea
valve) or non-actuated valve (e.g. subsea check valve). The control system for the subsea riser base valves will be covered
by equipment class “Subsea production control”, e.g. dynamic umbilical and subsea control module, plus topsides control
A.2.6.4 Subsea pumps
Table A.95 — Type classification — Subsea pumps

Subsea pumps SP Centrifugal CE
Reciprocating RE
Rotary RO

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Figure A.33 — Boundary definition — Subsea pumps

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Table A.96 — Equipment subdivision — Subsea pumps

Equipment unit Subsea pumps a
Subunit Pump Electric motor Barrier fluid b, c Control and Miscellaneous
monitoring
Maintainable Bearing, radial Bearing, radial Accumulator Cable Connector
items
Bearing, thrust Bearing, thrust Hydraulic coupling Junction box Cooling/heat-
ing
Casing Casing Cooling Leak sensor
Piping
Connector Connector Filter Level sensor
Pulsation
Cylinder liner Control unit Lubrication oil Power supply
damper
Impeller Impeller Piping Pressure sensor
Purge system
Piping Rotor Lubrication oil Power/signal
pump incl. driver coupler
Piston Seal
Reservoir Speed sensor
Seal Stator
Valve, check Temperature
Shaft Support
sensor
Subsea electrical
Structure, protect
penetrator Vibration sensor
Structure, support
Valve, other
Mechanical land-
ing interface
Valve, control
Valve, process
isolation
Valve, other
a Note that the subsea pump includes the driving unit (electric motor) as opposed to the pumps located topsides or
onshore (See A.2.2.6). The subsea pump does not include power transmission to the (subunit) electrical motor, as this will
be covered by the equipment class “Subsea electrical power distribution”. It should also be noted that the equipment class
“Subsea pumps” does not include “Submersible pumps” located in a seafloor caisson.
b The barrier fluid equipment has four main functions:
— electric isolation (dielectric properties);
— lubrication of bearings and seals;
— ability to transport away heat;
— ability to transport particles to possible filter systems.
c The maintainable items are primarily located topsides, but some also subsea (e.g. hydraulic couplings in either
end of umbilical).The barrier fluid is distributed from topsides (or from onshore) to the subsea pump via barrier fluid lines
which are inside static umbilical (and possibly dynamic umbilical) and possibly via hydraulic jumpers. This equipment is
defined as subunit and maintainable items within the equipment class “Subsea production control” (See A.2.6.1). Depending
on the field infrastructure where the subsea pump is located, these umbilicals can already be defined. The items may be
included as part of the overall barrier fluid distribution and thus added as maintainable items in the subunit “Barrier fluid”,
to ensure precise reliability data collection/estimation. See also similar issues regarding electric power supply in the note
(a) above.

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Table A.97 — Equipment-specific data — Subsea pumps

Discharge pressure – de- — Pascal (barg.) High
sign
Suction pressure – design — Pascal (barg.) Medium
Pump driver Type of driver Electric motor, turbine, hydraulic motor High
Power – design Driver power Kilowatt High
Speed Design value Revolutions per minute Low
Number of stages — Number Low
Pump coupling — Fixed, flexible, hydraulic Low
Manufacturer Specify Specify High
Model type Specify Specify Low
Pump design Design characteristic Axial, radial, composite, diaphragm, plunger, High
piston, screw, vane, gear, lobe
Application - pump Where applied Booster, injection, active cooling Medium
Fluid handled Main fluid only: oil, gas, condensate, Oil, gas, condensate, injection water, oil High
water, CO2, gas and water, produced water,
cooling medium
Fluid corrosiveness Classify as shown in footnote a Neutral, sweet, sour High
Radial bearing type Specify Magnetic, roller, sliding Low
Thrust bearing type Specify Magnetic, roller, sliding Low
Shaft orientation Specify Horizontal, vertical Low
Shaft seal type Specify Dry, gland, labyrinth, mechanical, oil, Low
packed combined
Transmission type Specify Direct, gear, integral Low
A.2.6.5 Subsea electrical power distribution
Electrical power distribution system specifically excludes subsea control system power distribution.
Electrical power distribution is dedicated for distribution to subsea processing equipment (e.g.
multi-flow pumps, water injection pumps, and compressors) with power requirements in range MW.
The electric power to control and instrumentation is part of the equipment class “Subsea production
control” - see A.2.6.1.
If the electric power comes directly from onshore, the subunit “Static power cable” in A.2.6.5 will apply,
and would be similar as subunit “Static power cable” in an equipment class “Submarine power cable”
used for providing power from shore to offshore facility (and may have an associated dynamic power
cable, if an offshore floating facility). The topsides power distribution equipment will in the former case
be located onshore. The equipment class “Submarine power cable” is not currently included in this annex.

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Table A.98 — Type classification — Subsea electrical power distribution

Subsea electrical power EP Single consumer without SU
distribution subsea step- down
Single consumer with sub- SD
sea step- down
Multiple consumer MC
Figure A.34 — Boundary definition — Subsea electrical power distribution

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Table A.99 — Equipment subdivision — Subsea electrical power distribution

Equipment Subsea electrical power distribution
unit
Subunit Topside power distribu- Dynamic power cable a Static power cable b Subsea power distribution
tion equipment equipment j
Maintainable items (No subdivision) l Topside cable termination HV power line Subsea power connector n
unit
Fibre-optic line o Subsea switchgear e
Tension & motion compen-
sation equipment Factory joint Subsea power transformer g
Bend restrictor Offshore joint Subsea penetrator f
Buoyancy device Sheath/armour Subsea frequency converter d
J/I-tube seal Subsea cable termina- Subsea power jumper j

tion unit
Stabilizer c Subsea UPS i
Topside cable termina-
Subsea cable termination tion unit h Control and monitoring m
unit
Onshore cable termina-
Midline joint tion unit
Sheath/armour Bend restrictor
HV power line Midline joint
Fibre-optic line o
a Similar components as for the subunit Dynamic umbilical for the equipment class Subsea production control.
b Similar components as for the Static umbilical Subunit for equipment class Subsea production control equipment class.
c Anchor clamp/anchorage is part of the stabilizer.
d Note regarding the level of detailing. A subsea frequency converter includes subsea penetrators, and can contain contactors. However,
precision needs to be dealt with in use for reliability data collection or estimation. Subsea frequency converter can be of type “pressure
compensated” or “non-pressure compensated”.
e The maintainable item Switchgear will also include parts subsea protective devices.
f Subsea penetrators are either electrical (LV power/signal), electrical (HV) or fibre-optic penetrators. This needs to be reflected for
equipment specific data on maintainable item level.
g Note the difference between subsea transformer as maintainable item (Level 8) and topsides Power transformer
(Equipment class – level 6, as given in A.2.4.2).
h Applies if subsea static power cable tie-back to fixed installation.
i This MI may be given further special detailed attention in reliability data collection or estimation by using Annex A.2.4.1 UPS.
j Subsea power jumper inside the subunit “Subsea power distribution equipment” can only be electrical (HV). However, inside an “overall
subsea power distribution system”, also LV power/signal jumper (being electrical (LV power/signal)), or fibre-optic jumper exist.
These two maintainable items appear in the taxonomy for “Subsea production control” in Table A.87, and possibly others would also
be relevant, e.g. hydraulic/chemical lines may sometimes be also part of the dynamic and static power cable. Rather than introducing
more subunits in Table A.99, one can use those components (appearing in various subunits) in Table A.87 that is in this case relevant for
subsea power in conjunction with a reliability data collection. Note also that LV power/signal lines in dynamic & static umbilicals are not
part of the equipment class “Subsea electrical power distribution”, but in the Annex A.2.6.1 “Subsea production control”. If subsea power
cable also includes (is bundled with) hydraulic/chemical lines and power/signal lines, it is recommended to register data onto the subsea
power cable.
k Generally, it is important to be aware of that some maintainable items (e.g. subsea penetrator and pressure compensator) in Subsea
EPD can appear as parts (Level 9) in different MIs. Attention to this matter is needed in reliability data collection and estimation. Subsea
contactor is for example not included as a maintainable item, as this would require also other components like current transformer,
voltage transformer that are part of larger units like a subsea frequency converter or a switchgear
l The topside power distribution equipment (*) is not further subdivided as it will be covered by other equipment classes defined in this
International Standard. It should be noted that equipment classes Frequency converter (topsides - ref. A.2.4.4)” and Power transformer
(topsides- ref A.2.4.2) are such equipment (*), the configuration of power transformer depends on if subsea power transformer is used
subsea. Equipment class Switchgear (which would include topsides protective device) is also part of such equipment (*). In addition, reac-
tive compensation equipment will exist when long subsea power cable to offshore facility or power directly from shore.
m The control and monitoring associated with subsea electric power distribution equipment is included in the subunit. This comes in
addition to the local control and monitoring for e.g. subsea pumps – see A.2.6.4.
n The Subsea power connector is sometimes called the HV connector, and can be dry or wet mate. Note that the electrical (LV power/sig-
nal), and fibre-optic connectors used for Subsea Power Distribution are covered by these maintainable items in Subunit “Subsea distribu-
tion module” in the taxonomy for equipment class “Subsea production control” in Table A.87.
o During data collection precision is required to ensure sufficient information is captured enabling differentiation between failures
affecting single fibre and failures affecting multiple fibres/bundle of fibres.

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Table A.100 — Equipment-specific data — Subsea electrical power distribution

Transmission voltage a 0 – 9,999 kV High
Transmission power 0 – 99,999 kVA High
AC/DC AC Codes High
DC
AC/DC
Transmission distance 0 - 999 km High
Number of power 0 - 99 # High
consumers
Type of power consumers Type of power consumers Subsea pump, subsea compressor, subsea High
heater, subsea cooler
a Voltage is given in steps, as per IEC 60038:2009 (see below).
— LV < 1kV
— MV 1 to 35kV
— HV 35 to 230kV
— EHV above 230kV
The international oil & gas industry may use different definition with respect to Extra High Voltage (EHV), High Voltage
(HV), Medium Voltage (MV) and Low Voltage (LV). Reference to IEC versus IEEE/ANSI needs to be considered here to know
e.g. voltage range for HV as they may be categorized differently. For other than low voltage (LV), i.e. > 1KV special national
electrical regulations will apply due to HSE reasons.
A.2.6.6 Subsea pressure vessels
Table A.101 — Type classification — Subsea pressure vessels

Subsea pressure SV Coalescer CA
vessels Cyclone CY
Hydrocyclone HY
Scrubber SB
Separator SE
Slug catcher SC
Surge drum SD

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Figure A.35 — Boundary definition — Subsea pressure vessels
Table A.102 — Equipment subdivision — Subsea pressure vessels

Equipment Subsea pressure vessels
unit
Subunit External items Internal items Control and monitor- Miscellaneous
ing c
Maintainable items Protective structure Coalescer plates Sensors a Others
Support structure Baffle plates Valve, control
Insulation Trays
Connector Vanes
Body/Shell Pads
Piping b Demister
Valve, check Diverter
Valve, process isolation Grid plate
Valve, utility isolation Heat coil
Valve, other Sand-trap system
Distributor
a Subsea sensors would also be covered in the Subunit “Sensors” for equipment class “Subsea production control” (See
Table A.87). Such sensor would include “Multiphase meters”, “Oil in water” sensor, “Water in oil” sensor and “Fluid level
sensor”. See also A.2.5.2 Input devices which describe a specific equipment class, but is meant for non-subsea applications,
but may be relevant also for reliability data collection/estimation.
b Hard pipe.
c Control and monitoring for “Subsea pressure vessel” will be similar, but somewhat different from topsides/onshore
“Pressure vessel” (see Table A.39): LV power/signal jumper and LV power/signal connector will be analogue to wiring and
piping, but is covered by the subunit “Subsea distribution module” (See Table A.87).

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Table A.103 — Equipment-specific data — Subsea pressure vessels

Equipment application Where used Oil processing, Condensate processing, High
Gas (re-)injection Gas processing, Gas
treatment, Water (re-)injection, Liquid/gas
separation, Liquid/Gas/Solid separation
Retrievable Retrievability of the subsea pres- Yes/No High
sure vessel
Fluid erosiveness Classify as shown Clean, benign , moderate, severe High
Fluid corrosiveness Classify as shown Neutral, Sweet, Sour High
Fluid(s) Main fluid Gas/oil/water, gas/oil, gas/condensate, oil/ High
water, oily water, water/glycol, methanol,
chemicals
Liquid/gas boosting Yes/No Medium
Pressure - operating Specify Pascal (bar) Medium
Design pressure Specify Pascal (bar) High
Design temperature Specify Degrees Celsius High
Temperature - operating Specify Degrees Celsius Medium
Retention time Specify Minutes Medium
Design throughput Specify Sm3/d Medium
Size - diameter External Metres Medium
Size - length External Metres Medium
Orientation Specify Horizontal, vertical, spherical Medium
Body material Specify type or code Free text Low
Sand production Specify Yes/No Low
Emulsions Specify Yes/No Low
Hydrate formation Specify Yes/No Low
Wax formation Specify Yes/No Low
Scale formation Specify Yes/No Low
Asphaltenes Specify Yes/No Low
NOTE The equipment specific data for “Subsea pressure vessel” is similar, but also somewhat different from for a
topsides/onshore “Pressure vessel (See Table A.40) due to that the pressure vessel is located at the seabed.
A.2.6.7 Subsea pipelines
Subsea pipeline transportation system covers:

— export pipeline systems between subsea well facilities (“export manifold”) and onshore terminal;
— export pipeline systems between offshore processing facilities and other offshore processing/export
facilities (subsea intra-field pipelines);
— export pipeline systems between offshore facilities and onshore terminal;
— intercontinental export pipelines, between onshore terminal and another onshore terminal;
— export lines to offshore offloading systems.
The onshore part of a subsea pipeline is covered by this equipment class “Subsea pipelines”, and valves
would be located subsea and/or onshore.
The in-field flowlines (with e.g. well flow, injection gas or injection water) between subsea wells and
offshore processing facilities, or onto “export manifold”, are covered by the equipment class “Subsea
flowlines”.

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Table A.104 — Type classification — Subsea pipelines

Subsea pipelines SL Flexible FL
Rigid RI
Figure A.36 — Boundary definition — Subsea pipelines

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Table A.105 — Equipment subdivision — Subsea pipelines

Equipment Subsea pipelines
unit
Subunit Pipe Heating system a Subsea Isolation Onshore Isolation
Station (SIS) b Station (OIS) b
Maintainable Coating external Subsea part Structure - protective Structure - protective
items
Connector Topsides part Structure - support Structure - support
Sealine Valve, process isolation c Valve f, process isolation
Safety joint Valve, utility isolation Valve, utility isolation
Flexible pipe spool Valve, check Valve, check
Rigid pipe spool Valve, control Valve, control
Valve, process isolation d Pig station e Pig station e
a The heating system would normally not apply for long distance pipeline (trunkline) transport systems.
In general heating system is used in in-field flowlines for non-processed well flow.
b Onshore isolation system (OIS) is the landfall valve station where the subsea pipeline ends into the
onshore terminal. It will contain onshore process isolation valves that acts as important barriers. The subsea
isolation station applies if there are subsea isolation valve(s) along the subsea pipeline routing. The SIS is a
subsea manifold structure (e.g. PLEM - Pipeline End Module) with a various type of valves depending on the
pipeline infrastructure. The valve design class will typically vary for these valves.
c If the valve is a Subsea isolation valve (SSIV), the “Valve component application” needs to be set to
SSIV. SSIV is addressed in ISO 14723:2009, see also 3.6.4 in ISO/TR 12489:2013. It is sometimes called SIV. It is
a specific type of process isolation valve.
d If the subsea pipeline has a T-connection, this will normally contains valves. The valve design class
may vary.
e The pipeline will normally be subject to pigging, and the associated pig launcher and pig receiver
(includes various components) will be located in either end of the pipeline, e.g. subsea, topsides or onshore. The
pig station may also be part of the Subunit “Riser base” in the Equipment class “Risers”.
f Valves have a key barrier function in equipment class “Subsea pipelines” and are maintainable items
within a subunit. It is however possible to use equipment class “Valves” (A.2.5.4) if data collection in more
depth for dry valves is needed.
Table A.106 — Equipment-specific data — Subsea pipelines

Application Classify Subsea to onshore High
Subsea intra-field
Offshore facilities to onshore
Intercontinental export pipelines
Export lines to offloading
Type Classify Production, injection
Maximum water depth Specify Metres Medium
Pipeline length - Metres High
Pipeline diameter Nominal outer diameter (OD) Millimetre Medium
Fluid conducted - Oil, gas, condensate, oil and gas, gas High
and condensate, oil/gas/water, CO2
a Note that as per ISO/TR 12489:2013, 3.6.4 SSIV can be either an actuated valve (e.g. remotely controlled subsea
valve) or non-actuated valve (e.g. subsea check valve). The control system for the subsea pipeline valves will be covered
by equipment class “Subsea production control”, e.g. static umbilical and subsea control module, plus topsides control

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)


Pipeline buried Specify if part or entire pipeline Yes/No High
is buried.
Number of T-connections Specify Number Medium
Heating system - Yes/No High
Fluid corrosiveness Classify Clean High
Benign
Moderate
Severe
Fluid erosiveness Classify Clean Medium
Benign
Moderate
Severe
Pressure – design Design pressure Pascal (bar) High
Pressure – operating Operating pressure Pascal (bar) Medium
Temperature – design Design temperature Degrees Celsius Medium
Valve application Pipeline valve function Pipeline isolation High
SSIV a
Valve design class Type of pipeline valve design Side-entry ball, top-entry ball, double High
expanding gate (DEG), slab gate,
wedge gate, check
Valve actuation Classify Hydraulic, Electrical, Manual High
Valve location Specify location of pipeline valves Subsea, topside, landfall/ onshore High
Valve fail-safe position Fail-safe-position Fail-open, Fail-close, Fail-as-is High
a Note that as per ISO/TR 12489:2013, 3.6.4 SSIV can be either an actuated valve (e.g. remotely controlled subsea
valve) or non-actuated valve (e.g. subsea check valve). The control system for the subsea pipeline valves will be covered
by equipment class “Subsea production control”, e.g. static umbilical and subsea control module, plus topsides control
A.2.6.8 Subsea valve issues
In this International Standard, it is distinguished between the valves used on subsea equipment and
the topside valves, such as used on Surface wellheads and X-mas trees. The collection of RM data for
the subsea valves should reflect the characteristics of the valves based on the so-called valve design
class (i.e. type of valve; corresponds to equipment type in Table A.77) and the valve application (i.e. the
function of the valve). Examples of subsea valve applications are given below:
— Flowline isolation: Subsea valves which isolates infield flowline system, e .g. a valve located on a
PLEM or a T-connection.
— Manifold isolation: Subsea valve located on a production/injection manifold and which has a barrier
function, e.g. a branch valve or a header valve.
— Pipeline isolation: Valves which isolates the pipeline transportation system, and valves could be
located subsea or onshore.
— HIPPS: See definition in ISO/TR 12489:2013, 3.6.3.
— SSIV: See definition in ISO/TR 12489:2013, 3.6.4.

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

A.2.7 Well completion

Valves used on well completion equipment are considered as specific valves within the taxonomy
examples shown in this equipment class. Valves used on surface wellhead and X-mas trees are
considered as topside valves (see A.2.5.4).
A.2.7.1 Item categories
Well completion equipment in this context refers to equipment below wellhead level. All major
completion equipment items are included, from tubing hanger at the top end to equipment at the bottom
of the well.
The following subunits are defined for well-completion equipment:
a) Casing
The casing subunit is included to store information on individual casing string maintainable items and
associated casing failures. The casing maintainable items represent full lengths of individual casing
sections and do not represent individual items threaded into the casing string. Sealing elements that
are designed to seal off against leakage of hydrocarbons between the various sections of casing string
(casing pack-offs) are not included. Also included in the casing subunit are maintainable items which
are set inside the wellbore to isolate the wellbore from potential leakages of well effluents and which
cover the entire wellbore. Casing external cement and or other material which is set casing externally to
isolate against flow of well effluents/formation fluids is also considered as casing maintainable items.
b) Completion string
Completion string maintainable items are defined as items that are all integral parts of the conduit
(“string”) used for production or injection of well effluents. The string is built by screwing together a
variety of equipment subunits.
c) Insert
The insert subunit consists of maintainable items which can be attached (set) inside the completion
string. A typical example is the combination of a lock and wireline-retrievable downhole safety valve
set inside a safety valve nipple.
d) Downhole power/control/monitoring
The downhole control/power/monitoring subunit consists of maintainable items which are used to
provide power, control or monitoring functions to maintainable item(s) which are categorized under
other well completion subunit(s).
A.2.7.2 Equipment specifications

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Table A.107 — Equipment subdivision — Downhole well completion

Equipment Downhole well completion
unit
Subunit Casing Completion string Insert Downhole power/
control/monitoring
Maintainable Casing Tubing hanger Gas lift valve (GLV) c E le c t r ic- c on ne c t or,
items downhole gauge
Cement Tubing Dummy GLV
Electric-connector, tub-
Casing hanger Flow coupling WR-SCSSV a
ing hanger
Liner TR-SCSSV a WR Bridge plug
Downhole control module
Liner hanger Annulus safety valve Chemical injection valve
Hydraulic control line
Liner hanger/packer Sliding sleeve
Wellhead penetrator
Permanent bridge plug Inflow control device
Hanger penetrator
Electrical submersible
Packer penetrator
pump b
Power cable
Hydraulical submersible
pump Signal/instrument cable
Sidepocket mandrel
Inflow control valve
Seal assembly
Permanent gauge
Production packer
Downhole packer/hanger
Autonomous control de-
vice (AICD)
Nipple for wireline SCSSV
Fracturing sleeve
Fracturing plug
a This equipment is also defined as a separate equipment class “DHSV” – see A.2.7.5.
b This equipment is also defined as a separate equipment class “ESP” – see A.2.7.6.
c Note relation to ISO 16530-1:—, Annex S.
Table A.108 — Equipment-specific data — Downhole well completion

Manufacturer a Specify Text High
Model name a Give unique item model designation Specify High
Manufacturers part num- Provide identifier which uniquely identifies Text/numeric High
ber a equipment with identical design attributes
Serial number a Provide serial number which uniquely identifies Text High/medium
equipment (on a per equipment basis)
Nominal size Specify nominal size (size class) of equipment mm or feet Medium
Length Provide length for any tubular equipment Meters or feet High
a Manufacturer part number and serial number reflect in more detail the unique equipment identification number
mentioned in Table 5. Manufacturer and model name are also included in Table 5.

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)


Setting Depth Provide setting depth as measured depth (MD) Meters or feet High
and true vertical depth (TVD) relative to rotary
kelly bushing (RKB) for all equipment with a
well barrier element function
Metal type Specify metal type used for equipment’s flow Specify Medium
exposed parts
Elastomer type Specify elastomer type relevant equipment’s Specify Medium
with packer/sealing element
Working pressure Maximum designed working pressure Bar or psi High
Working temperature Maximum designed working pressure Degrees C or F High
mentioned in Table 5. Manufacturer and model name are also included in Table 5.
An example of data collection format with associated data field definitions and registration alternatives
is shown for Downhole safety valves in A.2.7.5.
A.2.7.3 Shale gas and shale oil completion
Table A.107 contains general completion equipment. This equipment is also applicable for shale gas/oil
completions.
A.2.7.4 SAGD completion
Table A.107 contains general completion equipment. This equipment is also applicable for SAGD
(Steam Assisted Gravity Drainage) completions. Guidelines for evaluating casing connections for high-
temperature post-yield applications (such as SAGD) are given in Thermal Well Casing Connection
Evaluation Protocol (TWCCEP) in ISO/PAS 12835:2013.
A.2.7.5 Downhole safety valves (DHSV)
This valve is available in two main types:

a) tubing-retrievable installed as an integral part of the tubing/completion string;
b) wireline-retrievable run on wireline toolstring for installation inside the tubing/completion string,
set in a dedicated landing nipple/profile.
An example of data collection format with associated data field definitions and registration alternatives
is shown for Downhole safety valves below.
Table A.109 — Tubing-retrievable, surface-controlled subsurface safety valve (TR-SCSSV)

Item: Tubing safety valve (TR) Category: String item Priority
Name Description Unit or code list
Model Give unique item model Characters High
designation
Part number (operator) — — Medium
Part number (manuf.) — — High
Manufacturer — All major oilfield equipment manufacturers High
Effective length Length occupied by the item in Metres High
the string, exclusive of pin/box

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)


Valve type — Tubing-retrievable Medium
Tubing-retrievable with wireline-retrievable brain
Other
Unknown
Closure principle — Ball Medium
Flapper (conventional)
Flapper (curved)
Poppet
Other
Unknown
Valve configuration — Single valve (s.v.) Low
Single valve with insert capability within valve
Single valve with separate nipple/control line for
insert valves
Upper valve in “hot” backup tandem concept
Lower valve in “hot” backup tandem concept
Upper valve in “cold” backup tandem concept
Lower valve in “cold” backup tandem concept
Upper valve in hybrid tandem concept
Equalizing feature — With equalizing feature Low
Without equalizing feature
Unknown
Nominal size — — High
Maximum OD — — Medium
Minimum ID — — Medium
Pressure rating — — Low
Piston type — Rod High
Concentric
Rod and concentric
Other
Unknown
Number of pistons Total number of pistons in Numeric Low
valve.
Number of control lines Total number of control lines Numeric Low
attached to valve

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)


Secondary control line — Not installed Low
function
Balance line
Permanent lockout
Temporary lockout
Normal operation
Other
Unknown
Seal configuration and Describe configuration and Character field Low
type materials used in dynamic
and static seals
Material spec. for Material used for the most Code list of metallic materials High
vital valve parts. ‘Seat’ here
— closure device
means seat for closure device.
— seat
— flowtube/piston
Control principle — Hydraulic Medium
Hydraulic with nitrogen charge as add‑on
power source
Hydraulic with balance line for deep setting
Electromagnetic with downhole power source
Solenoid-operated with electric cable
Other
Unknown
Remarks — Character field Low
Table A.110 — Wireline-retrievable (WR) type DHSV/WR-SCSSV

Item: Downhole safety valve (WR) Category: Inserted item Priority
Model a Give unique item model Characters (25) High
designation
Part number (operator) — — Medium
Part number (manuf.) a — — High
Manufacturer a — All major oilfield equipment manufacturers High
Length — Metres High
Closure principle — Ball Medium
Flapper (conventional)
Flapper (curved)
Poppet
Other
Unknown
mention in Table 5. Manufacturer and model name is also included in Table 5.

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)


Valve configuration — Single valve (s.v) Low
Single valve with insert capability within valve
Single v. with sep. nipple/contr.l. for insert v.
Upper valve in “hot” backup tandem concept
Lower valve in “hot” backup tandem concept
Upper valve in “cold” backup tandem concept
Lower valve in “cold” backup tandem concept
Upper valve in hybrid tandem concept
Equalizing feature — With equalizing feature Low
Without equalizing feature
Unknown
Nominal Size — — High
Maximum OD — — Medium
Minimum ID — — Medium
Pressure rating — — Low
Piston type — Rod High
Concentric
Rod and concentric
Other
Unknown
Number of pistons Total number of pistons in Number Low
valve
Number of control lines Total number of control lines Number Low
attached to valve
Secondar y cont rol — Not installed Low
line function
Balance line
Permanent lockout
Temporary lockout
Normal operation
Other
Unknown
S e a l c o n f i g u r a t i o n Describe configuration and Character field Low
and type materials used in dynamic
and static seals

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)


Material spec. for — Code list of metallic materials High
— closure device
— seat
— flowtube/piston
Control principle — Hydraulic Medium
Hydraulic with nitrogen charge as add‑on power
source
Hydraulic with balance line for deep setting
Electromagnetic with downhole power source
Solenoid-operated with electric cable
Other
Unknown
Remarks — Character field Low
A.2.7.6 Electrical submersible pumps
Well deployed pumps entitled “Electrical submersible pumps” (ESP) can have different applications:
a) onshore well;
b) topsides well (dry tree completion);
c) subsea well (subsea well completion);
d) seafloor (Caisson, e.g. seafloor boosting pump);
e) horizontal pump system (HPS), ESP used to fulfil a pump function topsides/onshore.
All above applications are addressed in ISO 15551-1:2015, except HPS, which is addressed in API RP 11S.
Hydraulic submersible pumps (HSP) is another type of pump located downhole, primarily for subsea,
but is not covered in this International Standard. Likewise, Progressive Cavity Pumps (PCP) are located
downhole, but only in onshore applications and is not covered in this International Standard. Some
further technical details are given in ISO 15136-1:2009.
The seafloor ESP (item 4) is in principle similar to a subsea pump described in equipment class Subsea
pumps (in A.2.6.4), but it is recommended to use this A.2.7.6 for RM data collection for the seafloor ESPs.
The classical or conventional installation is illustrated in Figure A.37 where the ESP unit is run on the
tubing string and is submerged in well fluids. The electric submersible motor is at the bottom of the
unit and is cooled by the wellstream passing by its perimeter. It is connected to the seal section. On top
of the seal section a pump intake or gas separator/handler is situated which allows well fluids to enter
the centrifugal pump and, at the same time, can remove/handle free gas from the wellstream.
Liquid is lifted to the surface by the multistage centrifugal pump, the heart of the ESP system.
Motor Power is transmitted to the submersible motor by clamping a specially constructed three-phase
ESP electric power cable to the production tubing. This cable needs to be of rugged construction to
prevent mechanical damage, and able to retain its physical and electrical properties when exposed to
hot liquids and gasses in oil wells.

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Table A.111 — Type classification — Electrical submersible pumps

Electrical submersible ESP Centrifugal CE
pumps Rotary RO
Alternative current AC
Figure A.37 — Boundary definition — Electrical submersible pumps
ESP pumps are commercially available in different capacities from 100 to around 120,000 bpd of liquid
production rate and in outside diameters from around 3 inches up to 12 inches.
5000 Psi of lift or equivalent kinetic energy can be created by an ESP.

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Table A.112 — Equipment subdivision — Electrical submersible pumps

Equipment Electrical submersible pumps
unit
Subunit ESP cable ESP motor ESP pump ESP pump intake a ESP seal
Maintainable Main power cable Base Base Base Bag chamber
items
Motor lead exten- Coupling Coupling Coupling Base
sion
Filter Diffusers Diffusers Coupling
Packer penetrator
Head Head/Discharge Discharge ports/ Head
Pigtail screens
Housing Housing Housing
Pothead connector Head
Oil Impellers Labyrinth chamber
Splice Housing
O-ring O-rings Mechanical seals
Wellhead penetra- Impellers
Rotor Bearing Screens Oil
tor
Inducer section
Rotors Shaft O-ring
Intake pots/screens
Shaft Shaft support bear- Relief valve
ings O-rings
Stator Shaft
Snap rings Radial bearings
Thrust bearing Thrust bearing
Thrust washers Separat ion sec-
Varnish
tion/rotor
Down hole sensor
Shaft
Shaft support bear-
ings
Snaps rings
Thrust washers
a ESP pump intake includes gas separator and gas handler.
Table A.113 — Equipment-specific data — Electrical submersible pumps

Well identification num- Operator description Number or name High
ber
Model type Specify Specify Low
ESP Application Type of application Onshore well High
Topsides well (dry tree completion)
Subsea well (subsea well completion)
Seafloor (Caisson)
Horizontal pump system (HPS)
Fluid corrosiveness Neutral, Sweet, Sour Specify High
Fluid handled Main fluid only: oil, gas, condensate, Oil, gas, condensate, injection water, oil High
water, CO2, gas and water, produced water
Shaft power rating All, where applicable Horse power HP High
Shaft coupling rating All, where applicable Horse power HP High
Maximum flow capacity Bolt on discharge head Blpd Medium
rating
Pressure rating Bolt on discharge head Psi High

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)


Design performance Pump and gas handler Pump curve Low
curves – water only
Maximum GVF rating Pump and gas handler % Medium
Pump stage thrust Pump and gas handler Pounds, lbs High
Housing pressure rating Pump and gas handler Psi High
Maximum flow capacity Bolt on intake Blpd Low
rating
Design performance Mechanical gas separator Performance Curve Low
curve
Volume contraction Seal chamber section Litres High
capacity
Operation deviation Seal chamber section Specify [numeric value] High
limits
Thrust load bearing Seal chamber section Pounds, lbs High
capacity
Minimum operating Seal chamber section Revolutions per minute, rpm, or Frequency Low
speed for thrust bearing
Number and severity of Seal chamber section Specify High
pressure cycles
Horsepower requirement Seal chamber section HP High
Motor performance Motor Performance curve High
parameters
Motor voltage for mini- Motor Amps High
mum current
Motor winding tempera- Motor Degrees Celsius High
ture rise
Motor operating internal Motor Degrees Celsius High
temperature limits
Locked rotor current, Motor Amps High
torque and power factor
Voltage rating Power cable and MLE Volt High
Temperature rating Power cable and MLE Degrees Celsius High
Ampacity coefficients Power cable and MLE Specify [numeric value] High
Conductor Size Power cable and MLE Millimetres High
Acceptable minimum Power cable and MLE Metres High
bending rating
Voltage rating Pothead Volt High
Temperature rating Pothead Degrees Celsius High
Ampacity coefficients Pothead Amps High
Differential pressure Pothead Psi High
performance
Thermal cycling Pothead N/A High
performance
A.2.7.7 Surface wellhead and X-mas trees
The surface X-mas tree could have different applications:

— X-mas tree on a TLP or SPAR platform;

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

— X-mas tree on a fixed offshore platform;

— X-mas tree on an onshore facility.
Note that control and monitoring is part of the surface X-mas trees, but not a part of subsea X-mas trees
(see A.2.6.2).
This equipment class does not cover onshore wellheads with pump jacks installed as they do not use
X-mas trees.
The equipment class Valves (see A.2.5.4), may be used to collect more detailed data on safety and
production critical valves in the X-mas tree.
Table A.114 — Type classification — Surface wellhead and X-mas trees

Surface wellhead WD Vertical VE
and X-mas trees Horizontal HO
Figure A.38 — Boundary definition — Surface wellhead and X-mas trees

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Table A.115 — Equipment subdivision — Surface wellhead and X-mas trees

Equipment Surface wellhead and X-mas trees
unit
Subunit Wellhead Tubing hanger X-mas tree d, g Control and monitoring
Maintainable Annulus seal assem- Chemical injection Tree caps Control panel j
items blies (Pack-offs) coupling
Tree loops/flowlines Hydraulic instrument
Casing hangers Hydraulic coupling tubing
Tree/wellhead con-
Conductor housing (termination in control nector Electric instrument
line block) tubing
Control line exit block/ X-mas tree/flowline
chemical inj. block Power/signal coupler connection (interface Pressure indicator
point) f
Wellhead housing El. fiber (termination Pressure transmitters
in control line block) Valve, check
Limit switch
Tubing-hanger body Valve, choke c
Temperature sensors
Tubing-hanger isola- Valve, process isola-
tion plug tiona, e
Tubing hanger seals Valve, utility isolation
b, h
Back pressure valve
Valve, other
Tubing head spool i
a Process isolation valves will include Master valves (LMV & UMV), Production wing valve (PWV), Swab
valve (SV), Annulus valve(s) and Kill valve (KV).
b Utility isolation valves will include Chemical injection/isolation valves.
c For surface X-mas tree, chokes would not normally be part of the X-mas tree. Thus such maintainable
item should be treated in addition, as part of the Equipment class “Valves”.
d Different annulus valves and these will have a function for each annulus, e.g. annulus A (between tub-
ing and production casing) has most requirements.
e There are normally two master valves, whereof one is normally manually operated and one is actuator
operated. There could also be two actuated valves.
f The downstream battery limit is the flange connection on the PWV.
g Valves have a key barrier function in a X-mas tree, and is thus – in same way as equipment class “Sub-
sea X-mas tree” (see A.2.6.2) – maintainable items within a subunit. It is however possible to use equipment
class “Valve” (A.2.5.4) if data collection in more depth for surface valves is needed.
h This includes chemical/hydraulic valves etc.
i If tubing head spool is a separate maintainable item.
j Control panel includes control valves.
Table A.116 — Equipment-specific data — Surface wellhead and X-mas trees

Well identification no Well identification no - operator Specify High
description
Well function Function of the well Production, injection, disposal High
Design pressure Pressure rating of wellhead and Pascal (bar) High
X-mas tree
Artificial lift well Type of artificial lift in the well Gas lift, ESP, PCP, none High
Note 1: The type of actuation for the relevant valves should be described using the equipment specific data, as for
equipment class Valves, see Table A.79.
Note 2: For artificial lift, equipment class ESP will provide information. For gas lift, equipment class Downhole well
completion will provide information, see A.2.7.

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)


Mudline suspension system Define whether a mudline system Yes/no Low
suspension exists
Type of well Type of tie-back solution Offshore, SPAR, TLP, Onshore, l, HPHT, High
SAGD, Shale gas, Shale oil
Wellhead flowing pressure Representative operational well- Psi Low
head flowing pressure
Wellhead flowing temper- Representative operational well- Degrees Celsius Low
ature head flowing temperature
Well flow rate Representative well flow rate (pro- Specify Medium
duction or injection)
Fluid produced / injected Fluid produced / injected Air, chemicals, condensate, crude oil, High
flare gas, freshwater, fuel gas, gas,
gas+condensate, gas+oil, gas+oil+water,
combined hydrocarbons, methanol,
nitrogen, oil, oil+water, oily water, sea
water, treaded sea water, steam, un-
known, water/glycol
Control principle Defines the control principle for Note 1 High
X-mas tree (valve) functions and
actuators
Fluid corrosiveness Fluid corrosiveness Benign, clean, moderate, severe, unknown Medium
Fluid erosiveness Erosiveness of the well fluid Benign, clean, moderate, severe, unknown Medium
Valve application X-mas tree valve function Swab (SV), Production wing (PWV), High
Kill (KV), Upper master (UMV), Lower
master (LMV), Annulus (AV)
Valve design class Type of valve design Ball, Butterfly, Diaphragm, Double ex- High
panding gate, Flapper, Gate, Needle,
Piston, Ram, Swing
Note 1: The type of actuation for the relevant valves should be described using the equipment specific data, as for
equipment class Valves, see Table A.79.
Note 2: For artificial lift, equipment class ESP will provide information. For gas lift, equipment class Downhole well
completion will provide information, see A.2.7.
A.2.7.8 Production/injection data
Operational data that should be collected for well-completion equipment are listed in Table A.117. The
data are well-specific and provide a generic reference to the working environment for all equipment in
the well. The production/injection data should be collected on a monthly basis.
Table A.117 — Production/injection operational data

Data Description Unit or code list
Year — —
Month — —
Wellhead pressure Flowing wellhead pressure Pascal (bar)
Wellhead temperature Temperature at wellhead under flowing conditions Degrees Celsius
Daily flow, gas Representative daily flow of gas Standard cubic metres per day
Daily flow, oil Representative daily flow of oil Standard cubic metres per day
Daily flow, condensate Representative daily flow of condensate Standard cubic metres per day
Daily flow, water Representative daily flow of water Standard cubic metres per day
a Grams per metric tonne is the equivalent of parts per million (ppm), a unit that is deprecated by ISO.

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)


Data Description Unit or code list
H2S concentration Representative daily concentration of H2S Mole percent or grams per met-
ric tonne a
CO2 concentration Representative daily concentration of CO2 Mole percent or grams per met-
ric tonne a
Remarks Other information considered relevant —
a Grams per metric tonne is the equivalent of parts per million (ppm), a unit that is deprecated by ISO.
A.2.7.9 Failure and maintenance data
The permanently installed well-completion equipment is normally run to failure. Preventive

replacement may be performed for some string items, such as wireline-retrievable, surface-controlled
subsurface safety valves (SCSSV).
In rare cases, items may be repaired downhole. This typically can be the case with casing- or tubing-
retrievable, surface-controlled subsurface safety valves (SCSSV).
If a downhole repair action actually succeeds in restoring the function of an item, this can be reported
by identifying the failure record for the item that initially failed. Depending on item category, the
item-failure record can be assessed as described in Table 8. The downhole repair action is reported by
changing the remedial action code and giving the remedial action date. Should a failure occur on the
same item at a later stage, a new failure record should be entered as described previously.
Information on downhole testing of valves should be collected, as this provides valuable information
concerning interpretation of downhole failure trends.
A.2.8 Drilling
A.2.8.1 Top drives
Table A.118 — Type classification — Top drives

Top drives TD Hydraulically driven HD
Electrically driven ED

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Figure A.39 — Boundary definition — Top drives
A top drive (frequently also referred to as a power swivel) is a piece of equipment that serves the
following functions:
— rotating the drill string (formerly undertaken by the rotary table);
— providing a conduit for drilling mud (formerly undertaken by the rotary swivel);
— disconnecting/connecting pipe (formerly undertaken by the iron roughneck);
— closing in the drill pipe by an integrated kelly valve (formerly undertaken by the kelly valve in
connection with the rotary table);
— lifting/lowering drill string by use of standard elevator (formerly undertaken by the hook by using
same kind of elevator).
Top drives may be either electrically or hydraulically driven. If they are hydraulically driven, several
hydraulic motors are normally used.
Elevator links and elevators are not regarded as a part of the top drive (standard drilling equipment).

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Table A.119 — Equipment subdivision — Top drives

Equipment Top drives
unit
Subunit Drivers Gear Rotary Pipe- Lubrica- Control Miscellane-
swivel handler tion and moni- ous
assembly toring
Maintainable Electric Bearings Gooseneck Link hanger Oil tank Control Guide dolly
items driver incl. tilt panel frame
Packing/ Packing/ Heaters
actuators
Hydraulic seals seals Control Internal blow-
Coolers
driver Pipe-han- out preventers
Coupling to Axial, radial Electric
dler posi- Pump with (kelly valves)
Radial, driver and thrust and/or
tion motor motor
thrust and bearing hydraulic Counter-bal-
Coupling to
axial bear- Swivel cou- Valves solenoid ance com-
swivel Swivel hous-
ing pling cabinet pensator/
ing Filters
Pinions read-saver
Torque Service
Swivel stem Lube oil system
Gearwheels wrench loops
Manifolds
Junction
box
Sensor
Solenoid
valves
Check
valves
Other
valves
Table A.120 — Equipment-specific data — Top drives

Type of driver Specify type Electric, hydraulic High
Number of drives Specify number Number High
(applicable for hydraulic drives only)
Hydraulic power requirements Pressure Pascal (bar) High
(applicable for hydraulic drives only) Flow rate Litres per minute
Motor category Specify type Induction, synchronous High
(applicable for electric drives only)
Electrical supply requirements Voltage Volt High
(applicable for electric drives only) Current Ampere
Rated power Max. output Kilowatt High
Normal operating power Power Kilowatt High
Speed Max. speed Revolutions per minute High
Normal speed Revolutions per minute
Torque Max. torque Newton·metre High
At normal speed Newton·metre
At max. speed Newton·metre
Pressure utilities Hydraulic pressure Pascal (bar) Low
Air pressure Pascal (bar)
Flow utilities Hydraulic flow Litres per minute Low
Air flow Litres per minute

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)


Retractable dolly frame Specify Yes/no Low
Mud pressure capacity Pressure Pascal (bar) Low
Inside BOP design pressure Pressure Pascal (bar) Low
Torque wrench capacity Diameter Millimetres Low
Torque Newton·metre
Elevator link hanger capacity Capacity Kilogram High
A.2.8.2 Subsea blowout preventers (BOP)
There are two main types of blowout preventers used for drilling operations:
— subsea BOPs are used for drilling from a floating unit; this BOP is fixed to the seafloor wellhead;
— surface BOPs are used for land operations or for structures that are fixed to the seafloor.
In principle, a surface BOP is similar to a subsea BOP, and is described separately in A.2.8.3. The main
differences are related to the control of the BOP functions and that the surface BOP, in general, has
fewer functions than the subsea BOP. In addition, a subsea BOP has a flexible joint at the top to allow
variation in the riser angle.
In addition a subsea BOP has a flexible joint at the top, connecting to the drilling riser (or completion
riser), allowing variation in the riser angle
In normal drilling operations, the drilling-fluid pressure is higher than the reservoir pressure. This
prevents an uncontrolled influx of formation fluids to the well bore.
The reservoir pressure can, from time to time for various reasons, exceed the drilling-fluid pressure.
This results in an uncontrolled influx of formation fluids to the well bore. The main function of the BOP
is, then, to close in the wellbore in order to circulate drilling fluid with a higher density to regain the
hydrostatic control of the well.
The BOP can also be used for other purposes, such as testing casing, testing leak-off pressure, squeeze
cement, etc.
The example of Subsea BOP taxonomy given in Figure A.40 relates to subsea-mounted BOPs used for
drilling.
Table A.121 — Type classification — Subsea blowout preventers (BOP)

Subsea blowout preventers BO Piloted hydraulic PH

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Figure A.40 — Boundary definition — Subsea blowout preventers (BOP)
A subsea BOP typically consists of the following main components (also table on equipment
subdivision below):
a) one or two annular preventers that seal around any tubular in the well;
b) three to six ram preventers that, depending on dressing, can seal around various pipes in the well,
shear pipe and seal an empty hole;
c) Two (2) connectors, one connecting the BOP to the wellhead, called the wellhead connector, and the
LMRP connector connecting the LMRP to the BOP and making it possible to disconnect the LMRP
from the BOP;
d) four to ten choke-and-kill valves that can be operated in order that the contained pressure in the
BOP can be observed, pressurized fluid circulated out of the well and pressurized fluid pumped in
the well.

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Table A.122 — Equipment subdivision — Subsea blowout preventers (BOP)

Equipment unit Subsea blowout preventers (BOP)
Subunit Preventers, valves Hydraulic connectors Flexible joint Primary control Backup control b
and lines
Maintainable items Annular preventers: LMRP connectors Flexible joint: Subsea: Subsea:
and wellhead con-
Body nectors: Flexible element Control Pod Solenoid valves
Flanges Body Housing Pilot valves Pilot valves
Packing element Locking mechanism Flanges Shuttle valves Shuttle valves
Hydraulic piston Piston(s) Wear ring Accumulators Accumulators
Seals Main-bore seal ring Anodes Pressure regulator Subsea control unit
valves
Ram preventers: Seals Bolting Battery
Solenoid valves
Body Transducers
Check valves
Locking device Surface:
Other valves
Flanges Surface control unit
Hydraulic control
Ram block fluid Transducers
Ram seals Seals ROV operated a:
Shear blade El-equipment/SEM Hot stab
Piston/operator Instrumentation Shuttle valves
Seals (e.g. flow/pressure Valves, ROV operated
sensors) shut-off
Choke-and-kill
valves: Piping/Hoses ROV intervention
Hydraulic bundles panel
Actuator
(pilot lines and main
Gate body supply)
Seals bonnet Multiplex cables
Choke-and-kill lines: Rigid hydraulic sup-
ply line
Riser-attached line
Surface:
Couplers/ Connectors
Control panels
Seals
Surface control unit
Hose/Pipe
Electrical power
Rigid pipe supply
Gooseneck hose Power supply
Battery backup (UPS)
Push button
Instrumentation (e.g.
pressure) sensor,
readout)
Hydraulic power unit
Control Pod
Pod reels
Pod selector valve
a See API/Std 53 with respect to ROV backup.
b Autoshear, Deadman system, ROV and acoustic control system is covered in this subunit, depending on the subsea BOP design.
Table A.123 — Equipment-specific data — Subsea blowout preventers (BOP)

Rig type Specify Semi-submersible, Drill ship, Jack- Medium
up, etc.
Rig mooring Specify DP, Anchored Medium
BOP manufacturer/supplier Specify Free text High

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)


Dimension Specify (inner diameter) Millimetres (inches) Medium
Size Height and mass Millimetres (inches), kilograms Low
(tons)
Pressure rating Specify Pascal (pounds per square inch) High
Installed location/ recorded Specify Foot (metres) Medium
water depth
Ram preventers – manufacturer Specify Specify High
(and model)
Ram preventers, pressure rating Specify Pascal (pounds per square inch) High
Number of fixed pipe rams Specify Number Medium
Number of flexible pipe rams Specify Number Medium
Number of blind rams Specify Number Medium
Number of blind shear rams Specify Number Medium
Number of casing shear rams Specify Number Medium
Annular preventers – manufac- Specify Specify High
turer (and model)
Annular preventers, pressure Specify Pascal (pounds per square inch) High
rating
Number of annular preventers Specify Number Medium
LMRP connector – manufactur- Specify Specify High
er and model
LMRP connector pressure rating Specify Pascal (pounds per square inch) Medium
Wellhead connector – manufac- Specify Specify High
turer (and model)
Wellhead connector pressure Specify Pascal (pounds per square inch) Medium
rating
Number of wellhead connections Specify total number of times Number Medium
the BOP has been run and (re-)
latched to the wellhead during
surveillance period
Choke-and-kill valve – manufac- Specify Specify Medium
turer (and model)
Number of choke-and-kill valves Specify Number Medium
Type of control fluid Specify Oil-based, water-based High
Type of control system Specify Multiplexed, pilot hydraulic, other High
Make and version of control Specify Specify High
system
Secondary control system Specify Specify Medium
A.2.8.3 Surface blowout preventers (BOP)
The equipment class “Surface blowout preventers (BOP)” are specific for land operations or for
structures that are fixed to the seafloor, and are too a large extent similar to the subsea BOP equipment
subsea. Hence parts of the example shown for subsea blowout preventers is also applicable to surface
blowout preventers, except for specific subsea maintainable items listed in A.2.8.2.
In principle, a surface BOP is similar to a subsea BOP. The main differences are related to the control of
the BOP functions and that the surface BOP, in general, has fewer functions than the subsea BOP.

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

The main function of the Surface BOP is to close in the wellbore in order to circulate drilling fluid with a
higher density to regain the hydrostatic control of the well. The Surface BOP can also be used for other
purposes, such as testing casing, testing leak-off pressure, squeeze cement, etc.
The example of Surface BOP taxonomy given in Figure A.41 relates to surface-mounted BOPs used for
drilling.
Table A.124 — Type classification — Surface blowout preventers (BOP)

Surface blowout preventers BT Piloted hydraulic PH
Figure A.41 — Boundary definition — Surface blowout preventers (BOP)
A Surface BOP typically consists of the following main components (also table on equipment
subdivision below):
a) one or two annular preventers that seal around any tubular in the well;
b) three to six ram preventers that, depending on dressing, can seal around various pipes in the well,
shear pipe and seal an empty hole;
c) a main connector that connects the BOP to the wellhead;

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

d) four to ten choke-and-kill valves that can be operated in order that the contained pressure in the
BOP can be observed, pressurized fluid circulated out of the well and pressurized fluid pumped in
the well.
Table A.125 — Equipment subdivision — Surface blowout preventers (BOP)

Equipment unit Surface blowout preventers (BOP)
Subunit Preventers, valves Connectors Primary control
and lines
Maintainable items Annular preventer: Connectors: Surface controls:
Body Body Control Pod
Flanges Locking mechanism Pilot valves
Packing element Piston(s) Pressure regulator valves
Hydraulic piston Main-bore seal ring Solenoid valves
Seals Seals Check valves
Ram preventers: Other valves
Body Hydraulic control fluid
Locking device Seals
Flanges El-equipment/SEM
Ram block bonnet Instrumentation (e.g. flow/
pressure sensors)
Ram seals
Piping/Hoses
Shear blade
Hydraulic bundles (pilot
Piston/operator
lines and main supply)
Seals
Multiplex cables
Choke-and-kill valves:
Hydraulic supply line
Actuator
Control panels
Gate body
Surface control unit
Seals bonnet
Electrical power supply
Gooseneck hose
Power supply
Choke-and-kill lines:
Battery backup (UPS)
Connectors
Push button
Seals
Instrumentation (e.g. pres-
Hose/Pipe sure sensor, readout)
Rigid pipe Hydraulic power unit
Table A.126 — Equipment-specific data — Surface blowout preventers (BOP)

Installation type Specify Semi-submersible, jack-up, TLP, Medium
onshore, other
Mooring Specify DP, anchored, no Medium
BOP manufacturer/supplier Specify Free text High
Dimension Specify (inner diameter) Millimetres (inches) Medium
Size Height and mass Millimetres (inches), kilograms (tons) Low
Pressure rating Specify Pascal (pounds per square inch) High
Installed location/ recorded Specify Foot (metres) Medium
water depth

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)


Ram preventers – manufacturer Specify Specify High
(and model)
Ram preventers, pressure rating Specify Pascal (pounds per square inch) High
Number of ram preventers Specify Number Medium
Annular preventers – manufac- Specify Specify High
turer (and model)
Annular preventers, pressure Specify Pascal (pounds per square inch) High
rating
Number of annular preventers Specify Number Medium
Wellhead connector – manufac- Specify Specify High
turer (and model)
Wellhead connector pressure rating Specify Pascal (pounds per square inch) Medium
Number of wellhead connections Specify total number of times Number Medium
the BOP has been run and (re-)
latched to the wellhead during
surveillance period
Choke-and-kill valve – manufac- Specify Specify Medium
turer (and model)
Number of choke-and-kill valves Specify Number Medium
Type of control fluid Specify Oil-based, water-based High
Type of control system Specify Multiplexed, pilot hydraulic, other High
Make and version of control system Specify Specify High
Secondary control system Specify Specify Medium
A.2.9 Well intervention
A.2.9.1 Surface well control equipment
Surface well control equipment is relevant for the following well interventions:
— coiled tubing;
— wireline;
— snubbing.
The principles for data collection and exchange defined in this International Standard can also be
applied for such equipment.
Note that the Surface well control equipment is all topsides or onshore located equipment. In case
subsea well intervention takes place (where e.g. surface tree is covered in Table A.128), there will be
interfaces on top of this surface tree, and this equipment class in this section provides further details.
Note that subsea and surface BOPs are listed in A.2.8.2 and A.2.8.3.
The following three equipment classes are mentioned separately in Table A.4, but due to similarities
they are combined in this section, and equipment type classification in the table below should therefore
be used in reliability data collection for such surface well control equipment:
— coiled tubing, surface well control equipment;
— wireline, surface well control equipment;
— snubbing, surface well control equipment.

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Table A.127 — Type classification - Surface well control equipment (for well intervention)
Surface well control equipment (for well intervention) WC Coiled tubing W1
Snubbing W2
Wireline W3
Figure A.42 — Boundary definition - Surface well control equipment (for well intervention)

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Table A.128 — Equipment subdivision - Surface well control equipment (for well intervention)
Equipment Surface well control equipment (for well intervention)
unit
Subunit Temporary Well Dynamic Lateral Control and
connection and Intervention pressure isolation monitoring
high pressure BOP seal valve
extension
Maintainable Sealing surface Ram assembly Sealing ele- Valve, process Prime mover
items ment isolation
Sealing element Sealing element Solenoid control
Hydraulic cir- Valve, utilit y valve
Shearing ele-
cuit isolation
ment Pilot controlled
valve
Hand actuator
Accumulator
Electronics mod-
ule
Hydraulic cou-
pling
LV power/signal
connector
Relief valve
Shuttle valve
Filter
Pump
Hydraulic fluid
tank
Table A.129 — Equipment-specific data — Surface well control equipment (for well

intervention)
Manufacturer Specify Text High
Unit identification Manufacturer model/part/se- Number or name High
rial number
Unit function Functional description of unit Text High
Unit type Type of unit (ram, gate valve, Text High
ball valve, etc.)
Size Nominal size (bore) Millimetres (inches) High
Type of connections Specify Text
Elastomer type Specify elastomer type for equip- Text High
ment with dynamic and static
sealing elements.
Pressure rating Working pressure rating Pascal (bar, psi) High
Pressure exposure Operational pressures encoun- Pascal (bar, psi) High
tered
Fluid exposure Main fluids only Oil, gas, condensate, brine, CO2, H2S High

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

A.2.9.2 Subsea well intervention
Reliability data collection for ‘Subsea well intervention’ may be performed on three modes of operation,
which may have slightly different taxonomy formats. These are:
a) riserless well intervention (RLWI);
b) open water intervention;
c) Thru-BOP/Drilling riser intervention.
RLWI for executing subsea wireline operations is comparable to the wireline operations done using
surface well control equipment as described in A.2.9.1.
This International Standard presents equipment specific data for b) open water intervention, and this is
thus assigned the equipment class OI, see below.
Other intervention tools appearing as part of this International Standard such as running tools for
flow control module, SCM and valve retrievals on the subsea production facility are not covered in this
taxonomy; see equipment class “Subsea intervention”.
Table A.130 — Type classification — Subsea well intervention: Open water intervention

Open water intervention OI Well completion WC
Well intervention – open sea WI
(tree mode)
Full workover (tree mode) WO

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Figure A.43 — Boundary definition — Subsea well intervention: Open water intervention
Please note the following remarks regarding figure above:

1) Dotted lines indicate equipment not included. In addition, note that only some part of the rig
interface is included in this equipment class (see Table A.131), whilst other parts are covered in
equipment class Surface well control equipment (A.2.9.1).
2) The figure is for illustration only, and does not cover all components listed in the equipment
subdivision table.
3) Normally the Process Isolation valve is below the EDP connector and the main bore valve above the
EDP connector is called Retainer Valve.
4) Several types of control system configurations are available on the market, e.g. direct hydraulic,
electro hydraulic.

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

5) EDP/WCP Process isolation valves could for instance be PIV, RV or XOV. Note that process isolation
valves may require to cut.
6) Shear (/seal) valve is typically a shear (seal) ram.
7) Heave elimination is usually performed through elevator and top drive motion compensator or
heave compensated crane. Slick joint position and function shall be clarified.
8) Note that Table A.4 has “Drilling and completion riser” as an equipment class that would cover the
workover riser.
9) The Workover Control System (WOCS) is different and should therefore be analysed separately.
This is done by the introduction of two new subunits, ‘Topside control & monitoring’ and ‘Subsea
control & monitoring’, which are always associated with the well intervention taxonomies and
should not be confused with the “Subsea production control” equipment class.
10) Safety joint (equipment class Subsea pipelines) and Stress joint (equipment class Dry tree risers)
can be different from WO safety / stress joints

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Table A.131 — Equipment subdivision — Subsea well intervention: Open water intervention

Equipment Subsea well intervention: Open water intervention
unit
Subunit Well control Emergency WO riser Rig Topside Subsea
package disconnect interface a control & control and
(WCP) package (at monitoring b monitoring b
the top of
WCP)
Maintainable Valve, process Retainer valve WO stress joint Tension frame Solenoid con- Solenoid con-
items isolation trol valve trol valve
Valve, utility WO safety Elevator inter-
Valve, utility isolation joint face Pilot control Pilot control
isolation valve valve
Connector Tension joint
Valve, shear Accumulator Accumulator
Bleed-off valve Heave elimi-
– topside – subsea
Connector nator
Hydraulic Hydraulic
Slick joint
coupling coupling
Swivel
Master con- WO Umbilical
trol station
Subsea elec-
(topside)
tronic module
Pressure reg-
LV power/ sig-
ulator
nal connector
WOCS Pump
Filter
incl. driver
Valve, relief
LV power/ sig-
nal connector Valve, shuttle
Shutdown Subsea pow-
panel ered pump
Filter Hydraulic fluid
subsea tanks
Reels
Purge system
UPS
Valve, relief
a See also equipment class Surface well control equipment in A.2.9.1.
b WOCS takes temporary control (from normal Subsea production control – see A.2.6.1) of subsea X-mas tree during
subsea intervention. WOCS takes over permanent control of SPS (e.g. for subsea X-mas trees).
Table A.132 — Equipment-specific data — Subsea well intervention: Open water intervention

Rig type Specify Semi-submersible, drill ship, etc. Medium
Control system a Intervention control system Direct hydraulic Medium
Direct electro hydraulic
Multiplexed electro hydraulic
a This is a subset and equivalent to equipment type classification in Table A.87 for Subsea production control
A.2.10 Marine
A.2.10.1 Jacking and fixation
Jack-up units used in the oil and gas industry can be divided into two main groups, drilling jack-ups and
service jack-ups.

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Drilling jack-ups are mainly used for:

— exploration drilling;
— production drilling, completion and well intervention on subsea template;
— production drilling, completion and well intervention on wellhead platform.
Service jack-ups are mainly used for:
— accommodation;
— heavy lift;
— geotechnical surveys.
Table A.133 — Type classification — Jacking and fixation

Jacking and fixation JF Open-truss legs TL
Columnar legs CL
Figure A.44 — Boundary definition — Jacking and fixation

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Table A.134 — Equipment subdivision — Jacking and fixation

Equipment Jacking and fixation
unit
Subunit Jacking unit Fixation Leg structure Hull-mounted Control and Miscellaneous
structure monitoring
Maintainable Load shift sys- Clamping unit Chord Jacking support Actuating device HPU
tem structure
items Bracing Control unit Others
Motor Leg guides
Spud can Internal power
Gear Box supply
Rack
Pinion Monitoring
Jetting system
Var iable f re- Sensor
Corrosion pro-
quency drive
tection Valve
Brake
Greasing system Wiring
Greasing system
Piping
Seals
Table A.135 — Equipment-specific data — Jacking and fixation

Application Classify Exploration drilling High
Production drilling/completion on subsea
template
Well intervention on subsea template
Production drilling/completion on well-
head platform
Well intervention on wellhead platform
Service jack-up for Accommodation
Service jack-up for Heavy lift
Service jack-up for Geotechnical surveys
Holding capacity survival Survival holding capacity Tonnes Medium
Jacking load emergency Emergency jacking load Tonnes Low
Jacking load rated Rated jacking load Tonnes Medium
Output torque Gear box output torque N/m Medium
Pinions count Number of pinions Each Medium
Power operating Power – operating Kilowatts, KW Medium
Speed hoist - max load Hoist speed at max load Metres per second, m/s Medium
Speed hoist – no load Hoist speed at no load Metres per second, m/s Low
Speed input shaft Speed _input_shaft Revolutions per minute ,rpm Low
Speed output shaft Speed_output_shaft Revolutions per minute ,rpm Low
Torque brake Brake torque N/m Low
Jacking frame type Jacking frame type Fixed, floating Medium
A.2.11 Utilities
No examples are included in Annex A.
NOTE Utilities can include anything from single equipment units (e.g. pumps) to more complex assemblies
(packages).

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

EXAMPLES Fire water system, HVAC, hydraulic power supply, etc.
Depending on the application, data can be collected on single-unit level and the reliability estimated
by calculating the total reliability for the utility assembly. Alternatively, data can be collected for the
complete utility system as a whole. It is necessary to establish the taxonomic definition defined or
adapted to the selected alternative.
A.2.12 Auxiliaries
No examples are included in Annex A.

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Annex B
(normative)
Interpretation and notation of failure and maintenance

parameters
B.1 Failure interpretation

When planning to collect data (see 7.1.2 and B.2.6), be aware that a failure can occur in one of a number
of failure modes, e.g. complete loss of function, function degradation below an acceptable limit or an
imperfection in the state or condition of an item (incipient failure) that is likely to result in a functional
failure if not corrected.
Also be aware that it can be useful to make a distinction between the collection of data for reliability
purposes and for availability purposes as follows:
a) For reliability purposes, it is mainly the intrinsic failures of the equipment unit that are of interest,
i.e. physical failures that occur on the equipment being considered and that normally require some
restoration (corrective maintenance) that it is necessary to record.
b) For the full lifetime story of equipment, it is necessary to record all actual preventive maintenance
actions in a way similar to that for the corrective maintenance.
c) For availability purposes, all failures that have caused some equipment outage should be recorded.
This can include stoppages due to operational limits being exceeded (e.g. real trips) where no
physical failure of the equipment occurred.
d) Even if no failures are experienced within the surveillance time, it is possible to estimate the
failure rate by properly censored data (see C.3.3). Hence, recording the reliability history may also
be useful for equipment in periods with no failures.
Table B.1 gives some guidance on this issue by distinguishing between data collected as reliability data
and additional data collected as availability data.
Annex F, and ISO/TR 12489:2013 and IEC 61508:2010 also give guidance on what to consider as a failure
for safety equipment. Such definition can be related to functional loss, reduced capacity or operation
outside prescribed limits.
The full description of a failure might not be possible before a corrective action is carried out. In
some cases (incipient failures), the corrective action may deliberately be deferred (e.g. opportunity
maintenance). In this case, it can be necessary to record both the date of failure detection and the date
of the corrective action. For analysis purposes, the latter date should normally be used.

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Table B.1 — Failure in relation to reliability and availability

Reliability Availabil-
Type of failure/maintenance to record
ity
Failures that require some corrective maintenance action to be carried out (repair, Yes Yes
replacement)
Failure discovered during inspection, testing and/or preventive maintenance that re- Yes Yes
quires repair or replacement of typically non-wear items (seals, bearings, impellers, etc.)
Failure of safety devices or control/monitoring devices that necessitates shutdown (trip) Yes Yes
or reduction of the items capability below specified limits
Shutdown (trip) of the item (whether automatically or manually controlled) due to external No Yes
conditions or operating errors, where no physical failure condition of the item is revealed
Failure of the equipment caused by external impact (e.g. lack of power supply, structural No Yes
impact, etc.)
Periodic replacement of consumables and normal wear parts No No
Minor planned maintenance services, such as adjustments, lubrication, cleaning, oil No Yes
replacement, filter replacement or cleaning, painting, etc.
Testing and inspections No Yes
“On-demand” activations Yes Yes
Preventive or planned maintenance a Yes (No) Yes
Modifications, new work, upgrades b No Yes/No
a To get the full lifetime history of the equipment, the actual preventive maintenance should be recorded. For
recording failures only, this can be skipped.
b Modifications are normally not a part of maintenance but are frequently done by maintenance personnel.
B.2 Failure and maintenance data notations

B.2.1 General
In order to limit database size and make it easier to analyse the data, it is recommended that coded
information be used wherever applicable. A drawback with codes is that potentially useful information
can be lost and that selecting inappropriate codes can lead to non-informative information. The
availability of too many codes can be confusing and the codes can overlap, while too few codes might
not sufficiently describe the area one is aiming to cover. A unified definition and interpretation of codes
is necessary for obtaining highly reliable information.
In all cases, it is recommended to supplement the coding with some additional free-text capability in
order to improve interpretation of single events, both for quality purposes before the data are entered
into the database and for subsequent detailed analysis of single records (e.g. failure events).
Annex B.2 presents a method of coding that has been found to be useful when collecting RM data within
the petroleum and natural gas industry, and should be equally applicable for similar equipment classes
in the petrochemical industry. For some specific equipment and/or specific uses, supplementary codes
may be used.
Establish a method of reporting failure (see 7.1.2) that records the time and date of failure together
with details of the failure mode (see B.2.6), the failure mechanism (see B.2.2) and the failure cause
(root cause) (see B.2.3). Also, record the detection method (see B.2.4) and the maintenance activity (see
B.2.5). Use the codes given in the tables wherever practicable and additional free text where necessary.
Take care to distinguish between failure mechanism and failure mode.
Failure modes are presented in Tables B.6 to B.14 for those equipment examples included in Annex A as
shown in Table A.4. Table B.15 summarises all the failure modes.

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Subdivision codes for failure mechanisms and failure causes, e.g. numbers 1.1, 1.2, etc., should be
preferred before the general category failure code, e.g. 1, and so on (see Tables B.2. and B.3).
How failure mode, failure mechanism and failure cause are related to different taxonomy levels is
shown in Table 3.
B.2.2 Failure mechanism

The failure mechanism is the physical, chemical or other process or combination of processes that leads
to the failure. It is an attribute of the failure event that can be deduced technically, e.g. the apparent,
observed cause of the failure. The failure mechanism’s root cause(s) is/are coded whenever this
information is available. (A separate field for this is recommended in this International Standard.)
The codes on failure mechanism are basically related to one of the following major categories of
failure types:
a) mechanical failures;
b) material failures;
c) instrumentation failures;
d) electrical failures;
e) external influence;
f) miscellaneous.
This categorization is rather coarse and within each category a more detailed categorization is
recommended as shown in Table B.2. If there is not sufficient information to apply codes at this
sublevel, then codes on the main level as listed above may be used. This implies that descriptive codes
for mechanical failures, numbered 1.1, 1.2, etc., should be preferred to the general category failure
code, 1.0, and so on (see Table B.2).
The failure mechanism should normally be related to a lower indenture level (subunit or maintainable-
item level). In practical terms, the failure mechanism represents a failure mode at maintainable item level.
Care should be taken to distinguish between failure mechanism and failure mode.
EXAMPLE It is recorded that a valve started leaking hydrocarbons to the environment but no further causes
are recorded. Here, the failure mode should be coded ELP (external leak of process medium) and the failure
mechanism coded unknown (6.4), not leakage (1.1).
Failure mechanism is also related to the failure cause (see B.2.3); the latter aimed at revealing the
underlying root cause of the failure.
Six categories of failure mechanism are identified in Table B.2, together with subdivisions and related
codes to be used in data bases.

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Table B.2 — Failure mechanism

Failure mechanism Subdivision of the failure Description of the failure mechanism
mechanism
Code Notation Code Notation
number number
1 Mechanical failure 1.0 General A failure related to some mechanical defect but where
no further details are known
1.1 Leakage External and internal leakage, either liquids or gases:
If the failure mode at equipment unit level is coded as
“leakage”, a more causally oriented failure mechanism
should be used wherever possible.
1.2 Vibration Abnormal vibration: If the failure mode at equipment
level is “vibration”, which is a more causally oriented
failure mechanism, the failure cause (root cause) should
be recorded wherever possible.
1.3 C l e a r a n c e / Failure caused by faulty clearance or alignment
alignment failure
1.4 Deformation Distortion, bending, buckling, denting, yielding, shrink-
ing, blistering, creeping, etc.
1.5 Looseness Disconnection, loose items
1.6 Sticking Sticking, seizure, jamming due to reasons other than
deformation or clearance/alignment failures
2 Material failure 2.0 General A failure related to a material defect but no further
details known
2.1 Cavitation Relevant for equipment such as pumps and valves
2.2 Corrosion All types of corrosion, both wet (electrochemical) and
dry (chemical)
2.3 Erosion Erosive wear
2.4 Wear Abrasive and adhesive wear, e.g. scoring, galling,
scuffing, fretting
2.5 Breakage Fracture, breach, crack
2.6 Fatigue If the cause of breakage can be traced to fatigue, this
code should be used.
2.7 Overheating Material damage due to overheating/burning
2.8 Burst Item burst, blown, exploded, imploded, etc.
3 Instrument failure 3.0 General Failure related to instrumentation but no details known
3.1 Control failure No, or faulty, regulation
3.2 No s i g n a l / No signal/indication/alarm when expected
indication/alarm
3.3 Fa u l t y s i g n a l / Signal/indication/alarm is wrong in relation to actual
indication/alarm process. Can be spurious, intermittent, oscillating,
arbitrary
3.4 Out of adjustment Calibration error, parameter drift
3.5 Software error Faulty, or no, control/monitoring/operation due to
software error
3.6 Common cause/ Several instrument items failed simultaneously, e.g.
Common mode fail- redundant fire and gas detectors; also failures related
ure to a common cause.
a The data acquirer should judge which is the most important failure mechanism descriptor if more than one exist, and
try to avoid the 6.3 and 6.4 codes.
b Human errors are not reflected in the failure mechanisms, but are considered as part of the failure causes.

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Table B.2 (continued)

Failure mechanism Subdivision of the failure Description of the failure mechanism
mechanism
Code Notation Code Notation
number number
4 Electrical failure 4.0 General Failures related to the supply and transmission of elec-
trical power, but where no further details are known
4.1 Short circuiting Short circuit
4.2 Open circuit Disconnection, interruption, broken wire/cable
4.3 No power/voltage Missing or insufficient electrical power supply
4.4 Faulty power/volt- Faulty electrical power supply, e.g. overvoltage
age
4.5 Earth/isolation fault Earth fault, low electrical resistance
5 External influence 5.0 General Failure caused by some external events or substances
outside the boundary but no further details are known
5.1 Blockage/plugged Flow restricted/blocked due to fouling, contamination,
icing, flow assurance (hydrates), etc.
5.2 Contamination Contaminated fluid/gas/surface, e.g. lubrication oil
contaminated, gas-detector head contaminated
5.3 Miscellaneous ex- Foreign objects, impacts, environmental influence
ternal influences from neighbouring systems
6 Miscellaneous a, b 6.0 General Failure mechanism that does not fall into one of the
categories listed above
6.1 No cause found Failure investigated but cause not revealed or too
uncertain
6.2 Combined causes Several causes: If there is one predominant cause this
should be coded.
6.3 Other No code applicable: Use free text.
6.4 Unknown No information available
a The data acquirer should judge which is the most important failure mechanism descriptor if more than one exist, and
try to avoid the 6.3 and 6.4 codes.
b Human errors are not reflected in the failure mechanisms, but are considered as part of the failure causes.
B.2.3 Failure cause
B.2.3.1 General
The objective of these data is to identify the initiating event (“root causes”) in the sequence leading up
to a failure of an equipment item. Five categories of failure cause are identified in Table B.3 together
with sub divisions and related codes to be used in databases.
The failure causes are classified in the following categories:
1) design-related causes;
2) fabrication/installation-related causes;
3) failures related to operation/maintenance;
4) failures related to management;
5) miscellaneous.
As for failure mechanism, the failure cause can be recorded at two levels depending on how much
information is available. If the information is scarce, only a coarse classification, i.e. codes 1, 2, 3, 4 and

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

5, can be possible, while a more detailed subdivision code number can be recorded if more information
is available.
Failure causes are commonly not known in depth when the failure is observed and, in order to reveal
the root cause of a failure, a specific root cause analysis can be useful. This is in particular relevant for
failures of a more complex nature and where the failure is important to avoid due to its consequences.
Examples are failures with serious safety and/or environmental consequences, abnormally high failure
rates compared to the average and failures with a high repair cost.
Due care is required so as not to confuse failure mechanism (describing the apparent, observed cause of
failure) with failure cause (describing the underlying or “root” cause of a failure).
Table B.3 — Failure causes

Code Notation Subdivision Subdivision of Description of the failure cause
number code the failure cause
number
1 Desig n-related 1.0 General Inadequate equipment design or configuration
causes (shape, size, technology, configuration, operability,
maintainability, etc.), but no further details known
1.1 Improper capacity Inadequate dimensioning/capacity
1.2 Improper material Improper material selection
2 Fabr ic at ion/ 2.0 General Failure related to fabrication or installation, but no
installation-relat- further details known
ed causes 2.1 Fabrication failure Manufacturing or processing failure
2.2 Installation failure Installation or assembly failure (assembly after
maintenance not included)
3 Failure related 3.0 General Failure related to operation/use or maintenance of
t o op er a t ion/ the equipment but no further details known
maintenance 3.1 Off-design service Off-design or unintended service conditions, e.g.
compressor operation outside envelope, pressure
above specification, etc.
3.2 Operating error Human error: Mistake, misuse, negligence, oversights,
etc. during operation (e.g. due to human fatigue)
3.3 Maintenance error Human error: Mistake, misuse, negligence, oversights,
etc. during maintenance (e.g. due to human fatigue)
3.4 Expected wear Failure caused by wear and tear resulting from
and tear normal operation of the equipment unit
4 Failure related to 4.0 General Failure related to management issues, but no further
management details known
4.1 Documentation Human error: Failure related to procedures, spec-
error ifications, drawings, reporting, etc. (e.g. due to
human fatigue)
4.2 Management error Failure related to planning, organization, quality
assurance, etc.
a The data acquirer should judge which is the most important cause if more than one exist, and try to avoid the 5.5 and
5.6 codes.
b See further information in B.2.3.2 and also F.3.2.

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)


Code Notation Subdivision Subdivision of Description of the failure cause
number code the failure cause
number
5 Miscellaneous a 5.0 Miscellaneous - Causes that do not fall into one of the categories
general listed above
5.1 No cause found Failure investigated but no specific cause found
5.2 Common cause Common cause/mode b
5.3 Combined causes Several causes are acting simultaneously. If one cause
is predominant, this cause should be highlighted
5.4 Other unit/ cas- Failure caused by the failure of another equipment
cading failure unit, subunit or maintainable item (cascading failure)
5.5 Other None of the above codes applies. Specify cause as
free text
5.6 Unknown No information available related to the failure cause
a The data acquirer should judge which is the most important cause if more than one exist, and try to avoid the 5.5 and
5.6 codes.
b See further information in B.2.3.2 and also F.3.2.
B.2.3.2 Common cause failures
Common cause failures are already defined in other standards, such as IEC 61508:2010 and
ISO/TR 12489:2013. RM data collection shall take such failures into account. How to deal with common
cause failures depends on the taxonomy level (ref Figure 3) where the collection is done and the level on
which the common cause failures occur. If a common cause failure occurs on the same level as the data
collection or any level above, the failure should be registered for each individual item. However, only
one of the items should be selected where the actual failure cause is described. This item should be the
first or most severely affected, if this is possible to identify. Otherwise, this item is selected randomly.
For all the other failed items, the failure cause should be labelled with “common cause”.
For example, if a failure on a subsea umbilical reveals that all cores have been wrongly configured
(design error), and data is collected on maintainable item level, in this case the individual umbilical
lines, the following procedure is recommended: Record one failure for each of the umbilical lines,
which typically consist of power/signal lines and hydraulic/chemical lines. For only one of these, record
the failure cause as “design error”. For all the others, record the failure cause as “common cause”. On
topside equipment units, common cause failures can typically occur for driver/driven unit, or parallel
configurations of rotating equipment. In those cases, the method as described shall apply.
If there is more than one failure on any level below the unit where data is collected, only one failure
shall be recorded. However, the record shall indicate that several units on a lower hierarchical level
have been affected. If contaminated lubrication oil causes damage on several subunits, there is only one
failure to be recorded on the equipment unit. The subunit failed, shall either be labelled “several” or
show a list of all affected subunits.
Sometimes, seemingly simultaneous failures are actually consequences of each other. According to
ISO/TR 12489:2013, 3.2.14, this is not a common cause failure. Consequently, only the first (initiating)
failure shall be recorded. An example of this is malfunctioning of the lube oil pump and subsequent
bearing failure due to overheating. In this case, the failure shall only be recorded on the lubrication
subunit.
See also information in F.3.2 with respect to common cause failures and relations to systematic failures.
B.2.4 Detection method

This is the method or activity by which a failure is discovered. This information is vitally important
when evaluating the effect of maintenance, e.g. to distinguish between failures discovered by a planned

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

action (inspection, PM maintenance) or by chance (casual observation). Nine categories of detection

methods are identified in Table B.4, together with related codes to be used in the databases.
Table B.4 — Detection method

Number Notation a Description Activity
1 Periodic Failure discovered during preventive service, replacement or
maintenance overhaul of an item when executing the preventive maintenance
programme
2 Functional testing Failure discovered by activating an intended function and
comparing the response against a predefined standard. This
is one typical method for detecting hidden failures
3 Inspection Failure discovered during planned inspection, e.g. visual in- Scheduled activities
spection, non-destructive testing
4 Periodic condition Failures revealed during a planned, scheduled condition
monitoring b monitoring of a predefined failure mode, either manually or
automatically, e.g. thermography, vibration measuring, oil
analysis, sampling
5 Pressure testing c Failure observed during pressure testing
6 Continuous condi- Failures revealed during a continuous condition monitoring of
tion monitoring b a predefined failure mode Continuous moni-
7 Production inter- Failure discovered by production upset, reduction, etc. toring
ference
8 Casual observation Casual observation during routine or casual operator checks,
mainly by senses (noise, smell, smoke, leakage, appearance, etc.)
9 Corrective mainte- Failure observed during corrective maintenance
nance Casual occurrences
10 On demand Failure discovered during an on-demand attempt to activate
an equipment unit (e.g. safety valve fails to close on ESD-signal,
fail to start a gas turbine on demand, etc.)
11 Other Other observation method and/or combination of several methods Other
a Specific notation for fire and gas detectors, process sensors and control logic units: The codes above should be
interpreted as follows:
functional test: periodic functional testing
casual observation: field observation
periodic CM: abnormal state discovered by control room personnel (no fault annunciation)
continuous CM: fault annunciation in control room (audible and/or visible alarm)
b Condition monitoring implies use of specific equipment and/or algorithms to monitor the condition of the equipment
with respect to predefined failure modes (note that “test” and “inspection” are separate codes). Condition monitoring (CM)
can be further divided into:
1) periodic CM: periodic condition monitoring includes techniques such as thermography, off-line vibration
measuring, oil analyses, calibration checks and sampling;
2) continuous CM: continuous instrumental surveillance of process parameters and equipment condition, e.g.
temperature, pressure, flow, RPM, to detect abnormal operating conditions.
c Pressure testing and functional testing are two different types of tests with different purposes to reveal external or
internal leakage, as also reflected in Annex F.4.
B.2.5 Maintenance activity

Twelve categories of maintenance activity are identified in Table B.5 together with related codes to be
used in databases for both corrective maintenance and preventive maintenance.

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Table B.5 — Maintenance activity

Code Activity Description Examples Use a
Number
1 Replace Replacement of the item by a new or re- Replacement of a worn-out bearing C, P
furbished item of the same type and make
2 Repair Manual maintenance action performed to Repack, weld, plug, reconnect, re- C
restore an item to its original appearance make, etc.
or state
3 Modify b Replace, renew or change the item, or a Install a filter with smaller mesh di- C, P
part of it, with an item/part of a different ameter, replace a lubrication oil pump
type, make, material or design with another type, reconfiguration etc.
4 Adjust Bringing any out-of-tolerance condition Align, set and reset, calibrate, balance C, P
into tolerance
5 Refit Minor repair/servicing activity to bring Polish, clean, grind, paint, coat, lube, C, P
back an item to an acceptable appearance, oil change, etc.
internal and external
6 Check c The cause of the failure is investigated, Restart, resetting, no maintenance C
but no maintenance action performed, or action, etc. Particularly relevant for
action is deferred. Able to regain function functional failures, e.g. fire and gas
by simple actions, e.g. restart or resetting. detectors, subsea equipment
7 Service Periodic service tasks: Normally no dis- e.g. cleaning, replenishment of consum- P
mantling of the item ables, adjustments and calibrations
8 Test Periodic test of function or performance Function test of gas detector, accuracy P
test of flow meter
9 Inspection Periodic inspection/check: a careful scru- All types of general check. Includes P
tiny of an item carried out with or without minor servicing as part of the inspec-
dismantling, normally by use of senses tion task
10 Overhaul Major overhaul Comprehensive inspection/overhaul C, P
with extensive disassembly and replace-
ment of items as specified or required
11 Combination Several of the above activities are included If one activity dominates, this may C, P
alternatively be recorded
12 Other Maintenance activity other than speci- e.g. protection activities C, P
fied above
a C: used typically in corrective maintenance; P: used typically in preventive maintenance.
b Modification is not defined as a maintenance category, but is often performed by persons trained in the maintenance
disciplines. Modification to a major extent can have influence on the operation and reliability of an equipment unit.
c “Check” includes the both where a failure cause was revealed but maintenance action was considered either not
necessary or not possible to carry out and where no failure cause circumstances could be found.
For corrective maintenance, this information describes the type of restoration action that was
performed. In general, the predominant restoration activity should be coded when several activities
are involved. The code categories “repair”, “replace”, “overhaul” and “modify” should have a priority
relative to the code categories “refit” and “adjust” when a combination of the two categories are
involved (e.g. repair consisting of “repair” and “refit” should be coded as “repair”). If there are several
repair activities involved, none of which is predominant, the code “combined” may be used.
“Modify” means a modification of the original equipment unit where the original design has been
altered or the item in question replaced with one of a different type/make. If the modification is of
significant character, it is not considered as a maintenance action, but may be carried out by, or in co-
operation with, the maintenance staff. A “repair” is meant to be an action to correct a single failure or
a few failures, normally on-site. “Overhaul” means a comprehensive repair of several failures, or one
major failure requiring extensive work, or complete refurbishment of an equipment subunit. Typically,
such maintenance is undertaken in a workshop.

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

If the complete equipment unit has been replaced with a new and/or modified one, it is recommended
to rewind the time parameters (e.g. operating time) for this unit. This does not apply if the equipment
unit is of low complexity and a complete replacement is considered as a normal part of the maintenance.
For preventive maintenance, this information describes the type of preventive action being performed.
In general, the most predominant maintenance activity should be coded when several activities are
involved. If there is no predominant task, again this should be coded as “combined” and additional
information on the various activities listed in a free-text field if provided.
NOTE These maintenance codes do not, as such, reflect the effectiveness of the maintenance action as to
restoring the condition of the item (e.g. “good-as-new” or “bad-as-old” condition).
B.2.6 Failure modes

Failure modes should normally relate to the equipment-class level in the hierarchy. For subsea
equipment, however, it is recommended to also record failure modes on lower levels in the equipment
hierarchy (e.g. “maintainable-item” level). The failure modes can be categorized into three types:
a) desired function is not obtained (e.g. failure to start);
b) specified function lost or outside accepted operational limits (e.g. spurious stop, high output);
c) failure indication is observed but there is no immediate and critical impact on the equipment-unit
function [these are typically non-critical failures related to some degradation or incipient fault
condition (e.g. initial wear)].
See also Table 3, and note some of the failure modes may apply on other levels
Failure modes are presented in Tables B.6 to B.14 for each main equipment category shown in Table A.4.
Table B.15 presents a summary of all failure modes. Recommended failure modes are presented for
each main equipment category (see also list of equipment presented in Table A.4):
— rotating (combustion engines, compressors, electric generators, gas turbines, etc.);
— mechanical (cranes, heat exchangers, heaters and boilers, pressure vessels, storage tanks, piping, etc.);
— electrical (uninteruptable power supply, power transformers, frequency converters, etc.);
— safety and control (fire and gas detectors, input devices, control logic units, valves, nozzles, etc.);
— subsea (subsea production control, subsea wellhead and X-mas trees, risers, subsea pumps, etc.);
— well completion (surface wellhead and X-mas trees, downhole safety valves, electrical submersible
pumps, etc.);
— drilling (subsea blowout preventers (BOP), surface blowout preventers (BOP), top drives, etc.);
— well intervention (surface well control equipment, subsea well intervention: open water
intervention, etc.);
— marine (e.g. jacking and fixation).
In the following Tables B.6 to B.14, showing the recommended failure modes, the codes shown apply to
equipment classes marked with “X”. The proposed abbreviated code for the failure modes are given in
the first column of the tables. The failure mode “other” or “unknown” are needed in case failure modes
do not apply. If many failures with “other” are recorded, this can later create a basis for a new failure
mode to come in these tables.

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Note that some examples apply to only some of the equipment classes in the table they appear. See also
Table 3, and note some of the failure modes may apply on other levels.
NOTE The failure mode codes in Tables B.6 to B.15 are issued as part of Annex B, but are also shown in an
Excel document that is available at http://standards.iso.org/iso/14224. This facilitates the use and application of
these codes by the users of this International Standard. Some of the tables have notes that are not shown in the
Excel document.

Table B.6 — Rotating equipment — Failure modes
Equipment class code CE CO EG EM GT PU ST TE
Description Examples Tur-
Failure Com- Com- Electric Steam
Electric Gas turbo-ex-
mode bustion pres- genera- Pumps tur-
motors bines pand-
code engines sors tors bines
ers
AIR Abnormal instrument False alarm, faulty instrument indication X X X X X X X X
© ISO 2016 – All rights reserved

reading
BRD Breakdown Serious damage (seizure, breakage) X X X X X X X X
ERO Erratic output Oscillating, hunting, instability X X X X X X X
ELF External leakage - fuel External leakage of supplied fuel/gas X X X
ELP External leakage - Oil, gas, condensate, water X X X X X
process medium
ELU External leakage – Lubricant, cooling water X X X X X X X X
utility medium
FTS Failure to start Doesn’t start on demand X X X X X X X X

on demand
HIO High output Overspeed/output above acceptance X X X X X X X
INL Internal leakage Leakage internally of process or utility fluids X X X X X X
LOO Low output Delivery/output below acceptance X X X X X X X X
NOI Noise Abnormal noise X X X X X X X X
OHE Overheating Machine parts, exhaust, cooling water X X X X X X X X
PDE Parameter deviation Monitored parameter exceeding limits, e.g. high/ X X X X X X X X
low alarm
PLU Plugged/ choked Flow restriction(s) X X X X X X
SER Minor in-service Loose items, discoloration, dirt X X X X X X X X
problems
STD Structural deficiency Material damages (cracks, wear, fracture, corrosion) X X X X X X X X
STP Failure to stop on Doesn’t stop on demand X X X X
demand
OTH Other Failure modes not covered above X X X X X X X X
UNK Unknown Too little information to define a failure mode X X X X X X X X
UST Spurious stop Unexpected shutdown X X X X X X X X
BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)
187

VIB Vibration Abnormal vibration X X X X X X X X

Table B.7 — Mechanical equipment — Failure modes
188
Equipment class code CR HE HB PI VE WI TU SW TA
Description Examples Heat
Failure Heaters Pres-
ex- Winch- Storage
mode Cranes and Piping sure Turrets Swivels
changes tanks
code boilers vessels
ers
ISO 14224:2016(E)
BS EN ISO 14224:2016
AIR Abnormal instrument reading False alarm, faulty instrument indication X X X X X X X X X

BRD Breakdown Breakdown X X X
ELP External leakage - process Oil, gas, condensate, water X X X X X X
medium
ELU External leakage - utility me- Lubricant, cooling water, barrier oil X X X X X X X X
dium
FCO Failure to connect Failure to connect X X
IHT Insufficient heat transfer Missing, or too low, heat transfer X
Cooling/heating below acceptance X X X
INL Internal leakage Leakage internally of process or utility fluids X X X X X X

FLP Failure in lightning protection Failure in grounding, insufficient roof thickness, etc. X
system
FRO Failure to rotate Failure to rotate X X X X
FTD Failure to disconnect Failure to disconnect upper connector X
FTI Failure to function as intended General operation failure X X X
FTS Failure to start on demand Failure to start on demand X X
LBP Low oil supply pressure Low oil supply pressure X
LOA Load drop Load drop X X
LOB Loss of buoyancy Loss of buoyancy in idle position X X
LOO Low output Performance below specifications X
MOF Mooring failure Mooring failure X
NOI Noise Excessive noise X X X X
OHE Overheating Overheating X X X X
OTH Other Failure modes not covered above X X X X X X X X X
PDE Parameter deviation Monitored parameter exceeding limits, e.g. high/ X X X X X X X X X
low alarm
PLU Plugged/ choked Flow restriction due to contamination, objects, X X X X X X
wax, etc.

PTF Power/signal transmission Power/signal transmission failure X X
failure
Equipment class code CR HE HB PI VE WI TU SW TA
Description Examples Heat
Failure Heaters Pres-
ex- Winch- Storage
mode Cranes and Piping sure Turrets Swivels
changes tanks
code boilers vessels
ers
SBU Sludge build-up Sludge build-up X X
SER Minor in-service problems Loose items, discoloration, dirt X X X X X X X X X

SLP Slippage Wire slippage X X
SPO Spurious operation Unexpected operation X X
STD Structural deficiency Material damages (cracks, wear, fracture, corrosion) X X X X X X X X X
STP Failure to stop on demand Failure to stop on demand X
UNK Unknown Too little information to define a failure mode X X X X X X X X X
VIB Vibration Excessive vibration X X X

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)
189

Table B.8 — Electrical equipment — Failure modes
190
Equipment class code UP PT FC SG
Description Examples Unin-
Fre-
ter- Power
Failure quency
rupti- trans- Switch-
mode con-
ble form- gear
code vert-
power ers
ers
supply
ISO 14224:2016(E)
BS EN ISO 14224:2016
AIR Abnormal instrument reading Wrong oil level indication, False alarm, faulty instrument indication X X
BRD Breakdown Serious damage X
DOP Delayed operation Delayed response to commands X
ELU External leakage - utility medium Leakage of oil leakage, lubricant, cooling water X X X
ERO Erratic output Oscillating, hunting, instability X X
FOF Faulty output frequency Wrong/oscillating frequency X
FOV Faulty output voltage Wrong/unstable output voltage X X

FTC Failure to close on demand Circuit breaker/switchfuse/disconnector/bus tie fails to close when demanded X
FTF Failure to function on demand Doesn’t start on demand, or failure to respond on signal/ activation, or does not X X X
respond to input commands
Auxiliary function, subsystem, monitoring or control device fails to operate X
when demanded
FTI Failure to function as intended Response not as expected X
Protection device/ circuit breaker/ switch fails to clear a fault on the circuit X
FTO Failure to open on demand Circuit breaker/switchfuse/disconnector/bus tie fails to open when demanded X
FTR Failure to regulate Fails to control the load, poor response to feedback X
HIO High output Overspeed/output above acceptance X
INL Internal leakage Oil leakage, Leakage internally process or utility fluids X X
LOO Low output Delivery/output below acceptance X
NOI Noise Abnormal noise X
OHE Overheating Machine parts, exhaust, cooling water X X X
OHE Overheating Too high internal temperature X
OTH Other Failure modes not covered above X X X X
PDE Parameter deviation Monitored parameter exceeding limits, e.g. high/low alarm X X X

PLU Plugged/ choked Obstructed piping X
Equipment class code UP PT FC SG
Description Examples Unin-
Fre-
ter- Power
Failure quency
rupti- trans- Switch-
mode con-
ble form- gear
code vert-
power ers
ers
supply

SER Minor in-service problems Loose items, discoloration, dirt X X X
SPO Spurious operation Intermittent disconnection or connection unintended operation. X
Unexpected operation X X
STD Structural deficiency Reservoir rupture X
UNK Unknown Too little information to define a failure mode X X X X
UST Spurious stop Unexpected shutdown X
Unintended disconnection of a circuit X
VIB Vibration Abnormal vibration X

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)
191

Table B.9 — Safety and control equipment — Failure modes
192
Equipment class code FGA FGB IP CL VA NO LB
Description Examples Con-
Failure Fire Gas Input
trol Noz- Life-
mode detec- detec- devic- Valves
logic zles boats
code tion tion es
units
ISO 14224:2016(E)
BS EN ISO 14224:2016
AIR Abnormal instrument False alarm, faulty instrument indication X X

reading
BRD Breakdown Breakdown, serious damage (seizure, breakage), and/or major X
process fluid leak
DOP Delayed operation Opening/closing time below spec. X X X
ELP External leakage - Oil, gas, condensate, water X X
process medium
ELU External leakage - Hydraulic oil, lubrication oil, barrier oil, coolant, water, etc. X X X
utility medium
ERO Erratic output Oscillating, hunting, instability X X X X

FTC Failure to close Doesn’t close on demand X
on demand
FTF Failure to function Failure to respond on signal/activation X X X X X
on demand
FTO Failure to open Doesn’t open on demand, stuck closed or fail to open fully X X
on demand
FTS Failure to start Doesn’t start on demand X
on demand
HIO High output Overspeed/output above acceptance X X X X X
INL Internal leakage Leakage internally of process or utility fluids X X
LCP Leakage in closed position Leak through valve in closed position X
LOA Load drop Unintended drop/launch of a lifeboat X
LOO Low output Delivery/output below acceptance X X X X X X
NOI Noise Abnormal or excessive noise X X
NOO No output No output X X X
OHE Overheating Machine parts, exhaust, cooling water, etc. X
OTH Other Failure modes not covered above X X X X X X

PLU Plugged/ choked Partial or full flow restriction X X
trol Noz- Life-
logic zles boats
code tion tion es
units
POW Insufficient power Lack of or too low power supply X

PTF Power/signal Power/signal transmission failure X
transmission failure
SER Minor in-service problems Loose items, discoloration, dirt X X X X X X
SHH Spurious high alarm level e.g. 60 % of Lower Explosive Limit (LEL) X X
SLL Spurious low alarm level e.g. 20 % of Lower Explosive Limit (LEL) X X
SLP Slippage Wire slippage X
SPO Spurious operation e.g. false alarm X X X X
Undesired opening X

Fails to operate as demanded, false alarm, premature closure/ X X
stop, unexpected operation/fails to operate as demanded
STD Structural deficiency Material damages (cracks, wear, fracture, corrosion), reduced X X X
integrity
STP Failure to stop on demand Doesn’t stop on demand X
UNK Unknown Too little information to define a failure mode X X X X X X
BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)
193

194
trol Noz- Life-
logic zles boats
code tion tion es
units
ISO 14224:2016(E)
BS EN ISO 14224:2016
VIB Vibration Abnormal/excessive vibration X X

VLO Very low output e.g. reading between 11 % LEL to 30 % Lower Explosive Limit X
(LEL) upon test gas.
NOTE 1 Failure coding for fire and gas detectors: For fire and gas detectors, it is important that all failures are recorded; also those detected during scheduled test-
ing and those detected in operation, e.g. replacement of a detector head should be recorded, even if this is done as part of the preventive maintenance programme.
Typical failure modes are the following:
• failure to function: The detector does not respond when exposed to its relevant stimulus (e.g. gas or heat). This failure mode is normally observed during func-
tional testing;
• spurious operation: The detector gives an alarm signal when it is not exposed to relevant stimulus. This failure mode is normally observed during operation and
logged by control-room personnel;

• others: Additionally, some failure modes related to low/high output, adjustments and overhauls will typically be found in the log books.
NOTE 2 Failure coding for gas detectors:
High output e.g. reading 10 % LEL to 20 % LEL without test gas; reading above 80 % LEL on test gas.
Low output e.g. reading between 31 % LEL to 50 % LEL upon test gas (assuming a nominal set point of 65 % LEL).
Very low output e.g. reading between 11 % LEL to 30 % LEL upon test gas.
No output e.g. reading less than 10 % LEL upon test gas.

Table B.10 — Subsea equipment — Failure modes
Equipment class code CS XT SP PR EPD SV SL
Description Examples Subsea Subsea
Subsea
well- elec- Subsea
Failure pro- Subsea
head Subsea trical pres-
mode duc- Risers pipe-
and pumps power sure
code tion lines
X-mas distri- vessels
control
trees bution

AIR Abnormal instrument False alarm, faulty instrument indication X X X X X
reading
BRD Breakdown Breakdown, serious damage (seizure, breakage), and/or X
major process fluid leak
CSF Control/ signal failure No, or faulty monitoring or regulation, failure to transmit or X X
receive command or data, failure to actuate function
DOP Delayed operation Opening/closing time below spec. X X X
ELP External leakage - Oil, gas, condensate, water X X X X X X
process medium

ELU External leakage - utility Hydraulic oil, lubrication oil, barrier oil, coolant, water, etc. X X X X X X X
medium
FCO Failure to connect Failure to connect connector X X X X
FTC Failure to close on demand Doesn’t close on demand X X
FTD Failure to disconnect Failure to disconnect connector X X X X
FTF Failure to function on Failure to respond on signal/activation X X X
demand
FTL Failure to lock/unlock Doesn’t lock or unlock when demanded, failure to connect or X X X
disconnect, failure to release SCM from its mounting base
FTO Failure to open on demand Doesn’t open on demand X X
HIO High output Overspeed/ output above acceptance X
HTF Heating failure Loss of ability to provide heating X
IHT Insufficient heat transfer Lack off or reduced ability to transfer heat from hot temper- X X
ature areas, such as power transformers or power supply
electronics
ILP Internal leakage - Leakage process medium going through heat coils or similar. X
process medium
BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)
195

ILU Internal leakage - Leakage internally of utility fluids X X X X X X X

utility medium

196
Equipment class code CS XT SP PR EPD SV SL
Description Examples Subsea Subsea
Subsea
well- elec- Subsea
Failure pro- Subsea
head Subsea trical pres-
mode duc- Risers pipe-
and pumps power sure
code tion lines
X-mas distri- vessels
control
trees bution
ISO 14224:2016(E)
BS EN ISO 14224:2016
LCP Leakage in closed position Leak through valve in closed position X X X

LOO Low output Delivery/output below acceptance X X X
Delivery/output/torque/performance below acceptance
OTH Other Failure modes not covered above X X X X X X X
PDE Parameter deviation Monitored parameter exceeding limits, e.g. high/low alarm X
PLU Plugged/ choked Partial or full flow restriction X X X X
POW Insufficient power Lack of or too low power supply X X X X
SER Minor in-service problems Loose items, discoloration, dirt X

SET Failure to set/retrieve Failed set/retrieve operations X X X X X X
SPO Spurious operation Fails to operate as demanded, false alarm, premature X X X X X
closure/stop, unexpected operation/fails to operate as
demanded
STD Structural deficiency Material damages (cracks, wear, fracture, corrosion) X X X X X
Material damages (cracks, wear, fracture, corrosion, decay)
UBU Global buckling Upheaval or lateral buckling X
UNK Unknown Too little information to define a failure mode X X X
NOTE Although not a requirement of this International Standard, it is recommended that, for subsea equipment, failure modes are also recorded at a lower hier-
archical level, e.g. “maintainable item”.

Table B.11 — Well completion equipment — Failure modes
Equipment class code ESP SS XD
Description Examples Surface
Electri-
Down- well-
Failure cal sub-
hole head
mode mers-
safety and
code ible
valves X-mas
pumps
trees

AIR Abnormal instrument reading False alarm, faulty instrument indication X
BRD Breakdown Serious damage (seizure, breakage) X
CLW Control-line-to-well communication Loss of hydraulic control fluids into the well bore X
ELP External leakage - process medium Oil, gas, condensate, water X X
Process medium leak to environment
ELU External leakage - utility medium Lubricant, cooling water, hydraulic fluid, methanol, etc. X X
ERO Erratic output Oscillating, hunting, instability X

FTC Failure to close on demand Does not close upon demand signal X X
Valve(s) fail to close on demand
FTF Failure to function on demand Failure to respond on signal/activation X
FTO Failure to open on demand Does not open on demand X X
Valve(s) fail to open on demand
FTS Failure to start on demand Doesn’t start on demand X
HIO High output Overspeed/output above acceptance X
ILP Internal leakage - process medium Leakage internally of process fluids X
ILU Internal leakage - utility medium Leakage internally of utility fluids X X
INL Internal leakage Leakage internally of process or utility fluids X
LCP Leakage in closed position Leakage through valve exceeding acceptance criteria when closed X
LOO Low output Delivery/output below acceptance X
OHE Overheating Machine parts, exhaust, cooling water X
OTH Other Failure modes not covered above X X X
Specify in comment field
PCL Premature closure Spurious closure of valve without command X
BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)
197

PDE Parameter deviation Monitored parameter exceeding limits, e.g. high/low alarm X

198
Equipment class code ESP SS XD
Description Examples Surface
Electri-
Down- well-
Failure cal sub-
hole head
mode mers-
safety and
code ible
valves X-mas
pumps
trees
ISO 14224:2016(E)
BS EN ISO 14224:2016
PLU Plugged/ choked Partly or full flow restriction due to hydrate, scale, wax, etc. X X
SPO Spurious operation Fails to operate as demanded X X
Undesired valve opening / closure
STD Structural deficiency Material damages (cracks, wear, fracture, corrosion) X X
Reduced integrity
VIB Vibration Abnormal vibration X

WCL Well-to-control-line communication Influx of well fluids into valve control line X

Table B.12 — Drilling equipment — Failure modes
Equipment class code TD SB DB
Description Examples Subsea Surface
Failure blowout blowout
Top
mode pre- pre-
drives
code venters venters
(BOP) (BOP)

AIR Abnormal instrument reading False alarm, faulty instrument indication X X X
ELP External leakage - process medium Well fluids X X
ELU External leakage - utility medium Hydraulic oil, lubrication oil, coolant, mud, water, etc. X X X
ERO Erratic output Oscillating or instable operation X X X
FCO Failure to connect Failure to connect connector X X
FCU Failure to cut Shear cut valve unable to cut equipment X X
FTD Failure to disconnect Failure to disconnect connector X X

FTF Failure to function on demand Failure to respond on signal/activation (e.g. failure to shear) X X
FTS Failure to start on demand Failure to start top drive X
HIO High output Output torque above specifications X
INL Internal leakage Leakage internally of process or utility fluids X X X
LCP Leakage in closed position Leakage through a valve (e.g. ram-valve) in closed position X X
LOO Low output Output torque below specifications X
NOI Noise Excessive noise X
OHE Overheating Overheating X
OTH Other Failure modes not covered above X X X
PLU Plugged / Choked Choke or kill line plugged X X
POD Loss of functions on both pods Both pods are not functioning as desired X
SET Failure to set/retrieve Failed set/retrieve operations X X
SER Minor in-service problems Loose items, discoloration, dirt X X X
SPO Spurious operation Unexpected operation X X X
STD Structural deficiency Material damages (cracks, wear, fracture, corrosion) X X X
BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)
199

200
Equipment class code TD SB DB
Description Examples Subsea Surface
Failure blowout blowout
Top
mode pre- pre-
drives
code venters venters
(BOP) (BOP)
ISO 14224:2016(E)
BS EN ISO 14224:2016
STP Failure to stop on demand Failure to stop top drive or incorrect shutdown process X
VIB Vibration Excessive vibration X

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Table B.13 — Well intervention — Failure modes

Equipment class code WC OI
Description Examples Subsea
Surface
well
well
Fail- inter-
control
ure vention:
equip-
mode Open
ment (for
code water
well inter-
interven-
vention)
tion
BRD Breakdown Breakdown, serious damage (seizure, breakage), X X
and/or major process fluid leak
CSF Control / Signal failure No, or faulty monitoring or regulation, failure to X X
transmit or receive command or data, failure to
actuate function
DOP Delayed operation Opening/closing time below spec. X X
ELP External leakage - process Well fluids X X
medium
ELU External leakage - utility Hydraulic oil, lubrication oil, coolant, mud, X X
medium water, etc.
ERO Erratic output Oscillating or instable operation X X
FCO Failure to connect Failure to connect connector X X
FCU Failure to cut Shear cut valve unable to cut equipment X X
FTD Failure to disconnect Failure to disconnect connector X X
FTF Failure to function on Failure to respond on signal/activation (e.g. fail- X X
demand ure to shear)
FWR Failure while running Unable to run equipment or tools X
HIO High output Output torque above specifications X
ILP Internal leakage - process Leakage process medium contaminating utility X X
medium medium, Leakage internally of process fluids
ILU Internal leakage - utility Leakage internally of utility fluids, Loss of X X
medium lubrication
LCP Leakage in closed position Leakage through a valve (e.g. ram-valve) in closed X X
position
LOO Low output Output torque below specifications X
OTH Other Failure modes not covered above X X
PLU Plugged choked Choke or kill line plugged X X
POW Insufficient power Lack of or too low power supply X X
PTF Power/signal transmis- Power/signal transmission failure X
sion failure
SET Failure to set/retrieve Failed set/retrieve operations X
SPO Spurious operation Unexpected operation X X
STU Stuck Tools becoming stuck in the BOP or X-mas Tree X X
UNK Unknown Too little information to define a failure mode X X

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Table B.14 — Marine equipment — Failure modes

Equipment class code JF
Failure Description Examples Jacking
mode and fix-
code ation
AIR Abnormal instrument False alarm, faulty instrument indication X
reading
BRD Breakdown Breakdown, serious damage (seizure, breakage), and/or major X
process fluid leak
DOP Delayed operation Opening/closing time below spec. X
ELU External leakage - Hydraulic oil, lubrication oil, barrier oil, coolant, water, etc. X
utility medium
FRO Failure to rotate Failure to rotate X
FTF Failure to function on Doesn’t start or open on demand or failure to respond on signal/ X
demand activation
FTL Failure to lock/unlock Doesn’t lock or unlock when demanded X
HIO High output Output torque above specifications or overspeed/output above X
acceptance
IHT Insufficient heat Cooling/heating below acceptance and/or heat transfer too low X
transfer
INL Internal leakage Leakage internally process or utility fluids X
LBP Low oil supply pres- Low oil supply pressure X
sure
LOO Low output Delivery/output/torque/performance below acceptance X
NOI Noise Abnormal or excessive noise X
OHE Overheating Machine parts, exhaust, cooling water, etc. X
OTH Other Failure mode(s) not covered above X
PDE Parameter deviation Monitored parameter exceeding limits, e.g. High/Low alarm X
PLU Plugged/ choked Flow restriction due to contamination, objects, wax etc. X
POW Insufficient power Lack of or too low power supply X
PTF Power/signal trans- Power/signal transmission failure X
mission failure
SER Minor in-service Loose items, discoloration, dirt X
problems
SPO Spurious operation False alarm, premature closure/stop, unexpected operation/fails to X
operate as demanded
STD Structural deficiency Material damages (cracks, wear, fracture, corrosion, decay) X
UNK Unknown Too little information to define a failure mode X
VIB Vibration Abnormal/excessive vibration X
Table B.15 — Overview — Failure modes

Failure Failure mode description On-demand
mode code type failure
AIR Abnormal instrument reading
BRD Breakdown
CLW Control-line-to-well communication
CSF Control / signal failure
a See also footnote g in Table F.1 with respect to safety equipment.

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)


DOP Delayed operation X
ELF External leakage - fuel
ELP External leakage - process medium
ELU External leakage - utility medium
ERO Erratic output
FCO Failure to connect X
FCU Failure to cut X
FLP Failure in lightning protection system
FOF Faulty output frequency
FOV Faulty output voltage
FRO Failure to rotate
FTC Failure to close on demand X
FTD Failure to disconnect X
FTF Failure to function on demand X
FTI Failure to function as intended X
FTL Failure to lock/unlock X
FTO Failure to open on demand X
FTR Failure to regulate X
FTS Failure to start on demand X
FWR Failure while running
HIO High output
HTF Heating failure
IHT Insufficient heat transfer
ILP Internal leakage - process medium
ILU Internal leakage - utility medium
INL a Internal leakage
LBP Low oil supply pressure
LCP Leakage in closed position
LOA Load drop
LOB Loss of buoyancy
LOO Low output
MOF Mooring failure
NOI Noise
NOO No output
OHE Overheating
OTH Other
PCL Premature closure
PDE Parameter deviation
PLU Plugged/ choked
POD Loss of functions on both pods X
POW Insufficient power
PTF Power/signal transmission failure

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)


SBU Sludge build-up
SER Minor in-service problems
SET Failure to set/retrieve X
SHH Spurious high alarm level
SLL Spurious low alarm level
SLP Slippage
SPO Spurious operation
STD Structural deficiency
STP Failure to stop on demand X
STU Stuck
UBU Global buckling
UNK Unknown
UST Spurious stop
VIB Vibration
VLO Very low output
WCL Well-to-control-line communication

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Annex C
(informative)
Guide to interpretation and calculation of derived reliability and

maintenance parameters
C.1 Interpretation rules for commonly used failure and maintenance parameters
C.1.1 General
Though this International Standard does not cover data analysis in the broad sense, this annex
includes some recommended interpretation rules and basic calculation formulas commonly used
when analysing reliability and maintenance data. For a more in-depth assessment of this subject, we
recommend textbooks on the subject and some of the standards listed in the Bibliography at the end of
this International Standard. For the qualification of new technology, refer also to textbooks on expert
judgements, e.g. Cooke (1992).
In addition to the definitions given in Clause 3, Annex C gives some interpretation rules for commonly
used terms encountered in data collection and projects.
ISO/TR 12489:2013 does also provide useful information regarding various reliability and maintenance
parameters for use in reliability modelling and calculation.
C.1.2 Redundancy
Redundancy may be applied as follows:
a) passive (cold) standby: redundancy wherein part of the means for performing a required function
is needed to operate, while the remaining part(s) of the means are inoperative until needed;
b) active (hot) standby: redundancy wherein all means for performing a required function are
intended to operate simultaneously;
c) mixed: redundancy where a part of the redundant means “is on standby” and another part is
“active” (example: three means, one active, one in hot standby, one in cold standby).
EXAMPLE 1 Redundancy can be expressed as a quantitative measure, viz. equipment redundancy factor (ERF).
EXAMPLE 2 3 units times 50 % gives an ERF of 1.5.
(See also definition of redundancy in Clause 3 and distinction between “hot” and “cold” standby versus
“up time/down time” in 8.3.1).
For redundant systems, parts can fail without a failure of the system. This should be taken into account
when estimating required spare parts and repair capacity (where these failures are counted) and
estimates of availability (where these failures are not counted).
C.1.3 On-demand data

For some equipment, collected reliability data are used to estimate the on-demand failure probability
(e.g. start probability of an emergency generator). Note also the definitions for “failure on demand” (see
3.30) and “failure due to demand” (see 3.25). In the estimation a distinction should be made between:
a) failures occurred before demand occurs (undetected failures until revealed by real or periodic test
demand);

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

b) failures occurring when demand occurs (due to demand itself).

Many failure modes (see Annex B) are such failures, and could be either type, but failure mechanism
coding may enable to differ between “a” and “b” (see also C.3.4). Table B.15 shows failure modes which
are on-demand related.
Furthermore, for some equipment, collected reliability data are also used to estimate the failure rate as
a function of demands or number of cycles, rather than time, as explained in C.3.4. In this case, the total
number of demands should be recorded. Two types of demands should be included (Ref. Table 5):
a) test activation of the item normally done as part of preventive maintenance (e.g. function test of a
fire and gas detector);
b) automatic, or manual, activation of an on-demand function during operation (e.g. closure of an
ESD valve).
For reliability data collection where such demand related failures are to be recorded, it is important
to define more specifically the physical characteristics of the demands for the specific equipment that
such data collection will cover.
For some equipment classes, like e.g. Piping, Heat exchangers, Risers, Filters and strainers, Power cables
and terminations, the term, ‘demand’, is not meaningful.
For rotating equipment and some other equipment classes like Conveyors and elevators and Heaters
and boilers, demand is interpreted as start-up. Thus, stopping the equipment, or any adjustment whilst
running, like the speed of a VSD motor, is not to be interpreted as a demand.
For some mechanical equipment, like Cranes, Loading arms and Winches, demand is defined by the
operation itself for which it is made.
For valves, both opening and closing is counted as a demand, regardless of the valve being normally
closed or normally open. For control and choke valves, any adjustment is regarded as a demand.
For safety and control equipment or other equipment normally in stand-by mode, demand is defined as
any activation, either test or real activation (e.g. real trip) during operation.
The probability of failure on demand is calculated as the average fraction of time spent in the failed
state, as shown in C.6.2.
C.1.4 Independent failures

Most of the basic probabilistic calculations and most of the models used in the reliability field are
relevant only for independent events.
Two events, A and B, are independent if the occurrence of A is independent of that of B. Mathematically
speaking, that means that the conditional probability of occurrence of B given the occurrence of A, P(B
| A), is simply equal to P(B).
Therefore, by using the definition of conditional probability:
(
P B | A ) (
=P A∩B ) ( ) ( )
/ P A = P B (C.1)
This implies that:
( ) ( ) ( )
P A �∩ �B �= �P A ��
⋅ P B (C.2)
When two events have the above property, that means that they behave independently from each other
and they are said to be stochastically independent.
Independent failures are, of course, a particular case of independent events.

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

C.1.5 Dependent failures

When the occurrence of one event depends of the occurrence of one or several other events, these
events are said to be dependent.
In this case, the above Formula (C.2) is no longer valid and it is necessary to replace it by Formula (C.3):
( ) ( ) ( )
P A �∩ �B �≠ �P A ��
⋅ P B (C.3)
Therefore, when the dependencies are not taken under consideration, the results are underestimated.
As they are no longer conservative, this cannot be acceptable, especially for safety studies. This is why
the concepts of common cause failure and common mode failure have been introduced.
Components that fail due to a shared cause normally fail in the same functional mode. The term
common mode is, therefore, sometimes used. It is, however, not considered to be a precise term for
communicating the characteristics that describe a common cause failure.
C.1.6 Common cause failure (CCF)

See definition in 3.5. Note the distinction between the type of common cause failures, which actually
fails the items (e.g. component overvoltage) which have to be repaired separately, and the type of
common cause failures which only make the items unavailable (e.g. loss of power supply). In the latter
case, the items have not to be repaired.
A common cause failure is the simultaneous or concomitant failure of several components due to the
same cause. Therefore, each time the failures are not completely independent there is a possibility of CCF.
The CCF can be split into several categories:
a) failure of utilities (electricity, compressed air, etc.) or external aggressions (environment, fire, etc.);
b) internal failures (design error, installation error, bad set of components, etc.);
c) cascade failures (the failure of A leads to the failure of B, which leads to the failure of C, etc.).
Items listed in a) are considered as CCF only if the level of analysis is not sufficient in order to identify
them explicitly.
Items listed in b) are more difficult to analyse: experience proves their existence but their causes are
generally not identified very easily.
Items listed in c) are generally related to the process itself and can be difficult for the reliability analyst
to identify.
When the analysis is too difficult or not possible, a β-factor is generally introduced to split the basic
failure rate, λ, of a component into an independent part, (1-β) × λ, and a CCF part, β × λ. This avoids an
unrealistic result, but is only an estimate in order to take into account the existence of a potential CCF.
Refer to the shock model described in ISO/TR 12489:2013, Annex G.
It should also be noted that the analyst should be careful of what data is being used; see B.2.3.2. See also
ISO/TR 12489:2013, 5.4.2.
C.1.7 Common mode failures (CMF)

See definition in 3.6.
The notion of common mode failure, CMF, is often confused with the notion of CCF, although it is a little
bit different: a CMF occurs when several components fail in the same way (same mode). Of course, this
can be due, in turn, to a CCF.

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

C.1.8 Trips
Shutdown of machinery refers to the situation when the machinery is shut down from normal operating
condition to full stop. Two types of shutdown exist.
a) Trip (see definition in 3.93).
b) Manual shutdown: The machinery is stopped by an intended action of the operator (locally or from
the control room).
For some equipment, spurious stop is defined as a failure mode (i.e. UST, see Table B.15) that can be
either a real trip or a spurious trip depending on cause.
C.1.9 Failure occurrence classification

In conjunction with reliability analysis, e.g. FMECA, one can not necessarily have the access or need
for statistical reliability data, but may have to use qualitative judgement. Table C.1 may be used to
categorize failure occurrences, which can later during more in-depth analysis be verified with historic
reliability data.
Table C.1 — Failure occurrence classification (modified, IEC 60812:2006, Table 5)

Failure mode occurrence Rating Frequency Probability
Remote: 1 ≤ 0,010 per thousand items ≤ 1 × 10-5
Failure is unlikely
Low: 2 0,1 per thousand items 1 × 10-4
Relatively few failures 3 0,5 per thousand items 5 × 10-4
Moderate: 4 1 per thousand items 1 × 10-3
Occasional failures 5 2 per thousand items 2 × 10-3
6 5 per thousand items 5 × 10-3
High: 7 10 per thousand items 1 × 10-2
Repeated failures 8 20 per thousand items 2 × 10-2
Very high: 9 50 per thousand items 5 × 10-2
Failure is almost inevitable 10 ≥ 100 per thousand items ≥ 1 × 10-1
C.1.10 Failure consequence classification

Risk is a commonly used term describing a triplet of, possible events, possible outcomes and the
associated uncertainties of the events and outcomes (for one definition, see e.g. ISO 31000:2009). As part
of a typical risk assessment, is estimating the likelihood of hazardous events that can occur and of the
consequences expected to follow from the events. Note that these consequence is a systemic property
and that the effect of a given failure mode can change according to way it is used within a system.
Failure consequence ranking is an essential part of data applications used to assess the risk level
(see Annex D). It is, therefore, useful to classify the consequence of failures as to overall impact. A
classification of failure consequences, with classes represented by numbers I to XVI, is illustrated in
Table C.1. Note that this classification is primarily intended for assessing the consequences of failures
that have occurred. For more detailed recommendations on risk classification, see relevant standards,
e.g. ISO 17776:2000.
The recording of failure and maintenance impact data for failure events is addressed in Tables 6 and 8.

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Table C.2 — Failure-consequence classification

Consequences Category
Catastrophic Severe Moderate Minor
Failure that results in Severe injury, illness Minor injury, illness Less than minor injury,
death or system loss or major system or system damage illness or system damage
damage
Safety I V IX XIII
— Loss of lives — Serious per- — Injuries — Injuries not
sonnel injury requiring medical requiring medical
— Vital safe-
treatment treatment
ty-critical systems — Potential for
inoperable loss of safety func- — Limited — Minor effect on
tions effect on safety safety function
functions
Environmental II VI X XIV
Major pollution Significant pollution Some pollution No, or negligible, pollu-
tion
Production III VII XI XV
Extensive stop in pro- Production stop Production stop Production stop minor
duction/operation above acceptable below acceptable
limit a limit a
Operational IV VIII XII XVI
Very high mainte- Maintenance cost Maintenance cost Low maintenance cost
nance cost above normal ac- at or below normal
ceptable a acceptable a
a It is necessary to define acceptable limits for each application.
C.1.11 Analysis of failures

Failures that occur and that are judged to be in the unacceptable category in Table C.1 require that
specific reporting and analyses be done in order to find measures to prevent such failure from re-
occurring (e.g. improved maintenance, inspections, modifications, replacements etc.). Some useful
analytical methods are summarized below.
a) Reliability system modelling (e.g. Monte Carlo simulation, Markov analysis, reliability growth
modelling etc.) is recommended for all critical-service equipment for the comparison of reliability
for various proposed system configurations to provide input to concept selection in the development
of the design basis. Specifically,
— sensitivity studies to identify the component failures or human errors, or both, having the
greatest impact on system reliability (this information can be used to improve the reliability of
individual components or to provide a basis for modifying the system configuration during the
project proposal),
— evaluation of operational inspection intervals that have direct impact on predicted system
reliability,
— establishment of the amount of inspection and testing required for certain system elements.
b) Pareto analysis can be utilized to establish the plant’s list of “bad actors” based on the highest
failure rates or total maintenance cost. Bad Actors’ can also be related to cost of lost production
and unacceptable level of safety.
c) Root-cause analysis is recommended in the following cases:
— failures of severity types I to VIII;
— systems defined as “bad actors” by the operating facility.

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

d) Equipment lifetime analysis, such as Weibull analysis, is recommended on equipment types having
five or more common mode failures with severity levels I to XII.
NOTE Common causes of failures can be classified as follows.
1) Infant-mortality failures (Weibull-shape parameter β < 1,0) are usually induced by external circumstances
and are typically due to poor installation, solid-state electronic failures, manufacturing defects, misassembly,
or incorrect start‑up procedures.
2) Random failures (β = 1,0) most often result from human errors, foreign-object failures or computational
errors in the Weibull analysis (e.g. combining data from different failure modes, combining common failure
modes from differing equipment types, etc.). Random failures are best addressed by improved predictive-
maintenance programmes (more rigorous condition monitoring).
3) Early wear-out failures (1,0 < β < 4,0) can occur in the normal design life of the equipment and most often
include low cycle fatigue, most bearing failures, corrosion and erosion. Preventive maintenance resulting
in repair or replacement of critical components can be cost effective. The period for overhaul is read off the
Weibull plot at the appropriate β life.
4) Old age wear-out failures (β ≥ 4,0) most often occur outside the normal design life. The steeper the slope (β),
the smaller the variation in the times to failure and the more predictable the results. Typical failure modes
with old age wear include stress corrosion, erosion, material property issues, etc. Preventive maintenance
to replace parts that produce significant failures can be cost effective. The period for overhaul is read off the
Weibull plot at the appropriate β life.
C.1.12 Safety critical equipment

For some equipment, like safety-critical equipment, more specific definitions for a failure and its
consequences can be useful. Some recommendations on this are given in Annex F.
C.2 Availability
C.2.1 Normalized definition
Note the distinction between the terms availability and reliability;
— availability: item working at a given instant (no matter what has happened before);
— reliability: item working continuously over a whole period of time.
“Availability” characterizes a function that can be interrupted without any problem and “reliability,” a
function that cannot be interrupted over a whole period of time.
C.2.2 Mathematics of availability

It is with the mathematical definitions that the situation is clarified. In fact, there are several
mathematical expressions for “availability” concepts.
— Pointwise or instantaneous availability, A(t), is the probability that an item is in a state to perform
a required function under given conditions at a given instant of time, assuming that the required
external resources are provided. (This is the definition given in IEC 61508:2010. See also ISO/TR
12489:2013, 3.1.12)
The instantaneous availability, A(t), at time, t, is given by Formula (C.4):

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

A(t) = PS(t) (C.4)
where PS(t) is the probability that item S is in a up state at time, t.

— Mean availability for a given mission (over a given period of time), Am(t1,t2), is the average of the
pointwise availabilities over the time period, from t1 to t2: t1<<t<<t 2. This is given mathematically
by Formula (C.5) (see also ISO/TR 12489:2013, 3.1.13):
t2
∫ A (t ) dt (C.5)
1
Am =
(t 1,t 2) t2 − t1
t1
— “Steady state” (or asymptotic) availability, Aas, is the limit of the mean availability for a given mission
when the time period goes to infinity, as given by Formula (C.5) (see also ISO/TR 12489:2013,
3.1.17):
1
Aas = lim
t →∞ t ∫ ()
A t dt (C.6)
These definitions show clearly the difference between the various “availabilities,” specifically:
a) for the pointwise availability, we are interested only in the fact that the item works well when it is
required (no matter if it has failed at some previous moment, provided it has been repaired since
and has not failed again);
b) for the mean availability, we are interested in the same, but averaged over a given period of time.
This corresponds to the ratio of the effective working time over the whole duration under interest.
Note that in most, but not all, of the cases, after a certain time, the pointwise availability reaches an
asymptotic value called “steady state” availability, which is equal to the above “steady state availability”.
EXAMPLE For a simple repairable item with only two reliability parameters [failure rate (λ; see C.3) and
repair rate (μ)], the pointwise availability is equal to Formula (C.7):
()
A t =1−
λ
λ + µ
{  ( ) }
1 − exp  − λ + µ t  (C.7)

When t goes to infinity, we obtain the asymptotic value, as given by Formula (C.8), which is also the
steady state availability:
µ
Aas = (C.8)
λ + �µ
This availability is the “technical” or “intrinsic” or “inherent” availability of the item (see also C.2.3.2).
C.2.3 Measures and estimates of mean availability data records
C.2.3.1 Mathematics of measures and estimates of mean availability data records
The interest of the availability concept within the application areas of this International Standard is
the relationship existing between data collected in the field and the mathematical meaning of the mean
availability over a given period.
When planning to collect measures and estimates of mean availability (the term “availability” is defined
in Clause 3, see also 7.1.2), two types of mean availability and the sum of the two should be considered.
a) Operational availability, Ao, is given by Formula (C.9):

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

A0 = MUT / (MUT + MDT) (C.9)
where
MUT is the mean up time, estimated by using the actual up time observed in the field;
MDT is the mean down time, estimated by using the actual up and down times observed in the field.
b) Intrinsic availability, AI, is given by Formula (C.10):
AI = MTTF / (MTTF + MTTRes) (C.10)
where
MTTRes is the mean time to restoration, estimated by using the active maintenance times observed
in the fields; see Table 4 and Figure 4;
MTTF is the mean time to failure, estimated by using the actual up times observed in the field.
c) Mean elapsed time between failures, METBF, is given by Formula (C.11):
METBF = MTTF + MTTRes (C.11)
where MTTF and MTTRes are as defined above.
C.2.3.2 Uses of measures and estimates of mean availability data records
AI and Ao are not equivalent, except when MDT is equal to MTTRes. Generally, AI is of interest to
reliability engineers, while Ao is of interest to maintenance people.
These estimations explain why the unit of availability is expressed as the proportion of time(s) the item
is in the up state.
Be aware that though MDT, which is made of several delays (detection, isolation, spare parts, stand-by,
repair duration, re-instatement, etc.), and MUT, which is normally close to the MTTF, the operational
availability depends on the combined aspects of the reliability performance, the maintenance
performance, the maintainability performance and the maintenance support performance. Therefore,
this is not an intrinsic property of the item itself but a property of that item within the context (the
whole installation, procedures, maintenance policy, etc.) where it is used.
Depending on the interest of the user, only a part of the down time may be considered. Extra delays due
to required external resources other than maintenance resources may be excluded from the estimation
in order to perform a more intrinsic estimation, such as given in Formula (C.12):
A1 = MTTF / (MTTF + MTTRes) (C.12)
which is an estimate of the theoretical formula given in Formula (C.13):
µ
Am = (C.13)
λ+ µ
In the same way, the time spent for preventive maintenance can be included or not in the evaluations.
The above single formula for evaluating the two reliability parameters, λ and μ, is not sufficient. It is
necessary to evaluate λ and μ separately based on the observed MTTF (or MUT) for the failure rate, and
the observed MTTRes (or MRT, a part of the MDT) for the repair rate.

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

As the amount of data collected increases, the estimations become closer and closer to the true
mathematical values. The uncertainties can be managed through classical statistical analyses.
It is quite common to define the operational availability based on the down time related to the sum of
both corrective and preventive maintenance. The term “technical availability” is also sometimes used as
an alternative to “intrinsic availability.” In the latter case, down time related to corrective maintenance
only shall be included in the calculations. The operational availability per year, Ao,y, and the technical
availability per year, AT,y, can then be calculated as given in Formulas (C.14) and (C.15), respectively:
Ao, y =
(
8760 − t C + t P ) (C.14)
8760
8760 − t C
AT , y = (C.15)
8760
where
tC is the time for corrective maintenance;
tP is the time for preventive maintenance.
C.3 Failure rate and failure frequency estimations

C.3.1 General
C.3.1.1 Mathematics for failure rate and failure frequency estimation
The “failure rate” is a classical reliability parameter, denoted by the Greek letter, λ (lambda). The
failure rate is sometimes linked to the reliability parameter “failure frequency” (or “average failure
frequency”), denoted by the letter w and also called the (average) unconditional failure intensity. See
definitions of the two terms in Clause 3.
The average failure frequency is an average frequency, w, of failure (i.e. a number of failures per unit of
time). It is easy to calculate an estimator, ŵ , of this frequency from historical RM data by dividing the
number of observed failures, n, of the considered item by its cumulative working time (operational
time) during the same period of time, as given by Formula (C.16):
ˆ = n / ΣTTF (C.16)
w i
where
n is the number of observed failures;
TTFi is the ith time to fail (i.e. ith duration of functioning observed from the field).
NOTE 1 w is a function of time t and it asymptotically approaches 1/ MTTF.
In Formula (C.16), TTFi means the ith “time to fail” (i.e. the ith duration of functioning) observed from
the field. So, this is actually the estimator of 1/MTTF for a repairable item (component/system). This w
is usually a function of time t, but asymptotically it approaches 1/TTFi.

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

In practice, the term ∑TTFi in Formula (C.16) is often replaced by the total operational time of the units
investigated; see the example below.
NOTE 2 Formula (C.16) is true only if an exponential failure distribution (constant hazard rate for the system)
is assumed. In case a component does not have constant hazard rate, the asymptotic rate for the system is not
reached until after several changes of the component (renewal process). Such an interpretation means that the
number of failures over a (long) time period (0, t) “on the average” is equal to w × t. Or, more generally: if a
number of items with the same constant average “failure frequency,” w, are observed over a total operational
time, t, then the mean number of failures observed over this period asymptotically equals w × t.
EXAMPLE An average failure frequency of 3 × 10-4 failures per hour means that on the average 30 failures
will occur during an operational period of 100 000 h. It is emphasized that we are talking here about repairable
units, i.e. units that are repaired immediately after failure.
In the above example, we state that in the long run the mean elapsed time between two failures of a unit
equals 1/w = 3 333 h, which is also equal to the sum of MTTF and MTTRes (valid only for repairable
items, and provided the item is as good as new after repair).
=> valid only for repairable items It is important not to confuse this TTFi of 3 333 h with expected time
to failure. Since the average failure frequency is assumed constant, the probability of a failure is the
same from 0 h to 100 h, from 3 300 h to 3 400 h and from 9 900 h to 10 000 h.
The term “failure rate” (or Vesely failure rate, see e.g. ISO/TR 12489:2013) is sometimes (e.g. in text
books) used synonymously with the term “hazard rate.” Also, this rate is generally a function of time,
t, (since the start of operation of the unit). Then, λ (t)dt is the probability that the item fails between
t and t + dt, provided it has been working all over [0, t]. This function, λ (t), then defines the lifetime
distribution of the units (i.e. the statistical distribution of the time to first failure). This distribution can
also be expressed in terms of the probability, F(t), that the item will fail before it has been operating a
time, t, as given in Formula (C.17):
F(t) = 1 - R(t) (C.17)
where R(t) is the probability that the item will survive a time period, t.
Nevertheless, it can be demonstrated mathematically that when the hazard rate, λ(t), is constant over
time, t, then the average failure frequency (w) and failure rate (λ), both have the same estimator as
given in Formulas (C.16) and (C.17). In that case, we can use the term “failure rate” without causing too
much confusion (but we still have two different interpretations).
The assumption that the failure rate (hazard rate) is constant (= λ) over the whole life of the concerned
item means that the probability of the item to survive a period, t, is given by Formulas (C.18) and (C.19):
R(t) = exp(-λ × t) (C.18)
F(t) = 1 - exp(-λ × t) (C.19)
In this case, λ = 1/MTTF.
C.3.1.2 Uses of failure rate and failure frequency estimation
In the general situation, the hazard rate, λ(t), of the item’s lifetime is often assumed to reflect three
periods: early failures, useful life and wear-out failures (see Figure C.1). During the early failure period,
the λ(t) is normally decreasing, during the useful life it is more or less constant and during the wear-out
period it is increasing, i.e. the curve, λ(t), has the so-called bathtub form (see Figure C.1).

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Figure C.1 — Bathtub curve for hazard rate (“failure rate”) of a unit
If early failures are treated separately and units are taken out of service before they arrive at wear-out,
the assumption of constant hazard rate can be reasonable. This estimator gives no information on the
form of the hazard-rate curve. Assuming that the hazard rate is constant, this is also an estimator for
the constant hazard rate. If a constant hazard rate is assumed where wear-out failures are present in the
components or spare parts, the reliability is underestimated for low operating time and overestimated
for high operating time. With regards to the time to first failure, TFF, the constant hazard rate estimate
is totally misleading. Nevertheless, a more sophisticated statistical analysis can be performed to
determine if the hazard rate is decreasing, constant or increasing and to evaluate the parameters with
another reliability model such as Weibull for components or the Power law for repaired systems.
In that case, it is necessary to take into consideration the various durations of the TFFs.
The standard methods for estimation of a constant failure rate based on the observed number of
failures over a given time of operation are described in C.3.2 and C.3.3.
C.3.2 Estimation of failure rate
C.3.2.1 Maximum likelihood estimator of a constant failure rate
The maximum likelihood estimator, , of λ is given by Formula (C.20):
n
λ̂ = (C.20)
τ
where
n is the number of failures observed;
τ is the aggregated time in service, measured either as surveillance time or operating time.
Note that this approach is valid only in the following situations:
— The number of failures for a specified number of items with the same constant failure rate, λ, are
available for a given aggregated time, τ, in service;
— At least one failure is observed (n ≥ 1) over time, τ.

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

In “classical” statistical theory, the uncertainty of the estimate may be presented as a 90 % confidence
interval with a lower limit, LLower, and an upper limit, LUpper, as given by Formulas (C.21) and (C.22),
respectively:
1
LLower = z 0, 95;ν (C.21)
2τ
1
LUpper = z 0, 05;ν (C.22)
2τ
where
z 0,95; v is the upper 95th percentile of the χ2-distribution (chi-square) with ν degrees of freedom;
z 0,05; v is the lower 5th percentile of the χ2-distribution (chi-square) with ν degrees of freedom.
NOTE 1 The chi-square distribution can be found in most textbooks on statistics or in e.g. SINTEF (2009).
NOTE 2 Other confidence limits can also be used depending on application.
EXAMPLE Assume that n = 6 failures have been observed during an aggregated time in service
τ = 10 000 hours. The failure rate estimate, , expressed as failures per hour as given in Formula (C.20), is
calculated as
n
λ̂ = = 6 ⋅ 10 −4
τ
The 95 % confidence interval, from Formulas (C.21) and (C.22), is calculated as
1
 z 0, 95; 2N,
 2τ
1
2τ
(
  1
z 0, 05; 2 N + 1  = )
  20 000
z 0, 95; 12,
1
20 000

(
z 0, 05; 14  = 2, 6 ⋅ 10 −4 , 11, 8 ⋅ 10 −4

)
The estimate and the confidence intervals are illustrated in Figure C.2.
Figure C.2 — Estimate and 95 % confidence interval for the example calculation of the failure rate
C.3.2.2 Estimators and confidence intervals for a heterogeneous sample
Most of the time, a sample is constituted of items which come from different installations with different
operational and environmental. We are here dealing with heterogeneous data, corresponding to
different kind of equipment.
Such data are clustered into k classes, which are assumed to be homogeneous. So, a heterogeneous
sample is the combination of several more or less homogeneous samples.
Starting from data assumed to be clustered into k (homogeneous) classes, each class is represented by
some index i with i = 1, · · · , k in the following. For the ith class, the following data is assumed available:
— the class size mi , which stands for the number of equipment in the ith class,
— the total number ni of failures for all the equipment of the ith class,
— the cumulated operational time τi for all the equipment of the ith class.

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

In order the failure rate estimate λ̂ i to take into account the data of all classes (ni , t i )1 ≤ I ≤ k (and not
only (ni, t i )), a Bayesian approach is next proposed. The variation of the failure rate between classes
may be modelled by assuming that the failure rate is a random variable with some distribution given by
a probability density function π(λ).
The mean failure rate is then:
∞
∫
θ = λ ⋅ π λ dλ (C.23) ( )
0
And the variance is:
∞
∫ (λ − θ ) ( )
2
σ 2
= ⋅ π λ dλ (C.24)
0
The following procedure is used to calculate the heterogeneous estimator λ̂ :


a) Calculate m , S1, S2, V , V ∗ , μ and V as follows:
k
m=
∑ i =1ni , (C.25)
k
∑ i =1τ i
k
S1 = ∑τ i , (C.26)
i =1
k
S2 = ∑τ i
2
, (C.27)
i =1
(ni − mτ i )
k 2
V = ∑ τi
, (C.28)
i =1
S1
( (
V* = V − k −1 m ) )
S 12 − S 2
, (C.29)
k
1 ni
µ=
k ∑τi , (C.30)
i =1
k 2
 ni 
V =
1
k −1 τ  ∑
 − µ  , (C.31)
i =1  i 
 
b) Derive to compute E t and V t :
 
{ }
V t = max V ∗ , V (C.32)

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

k
1 1 ni
Eˆt = ∑ mˆ (C.33)
k 1 τ
∑ i =1 mˆ i =1 + Vˆt i
τi
+ Vˆt
τi
c) Estimates for (á, â) are next derived through:
ˆ Eˆt
β = , (C.34)
Vˆt
αˆ = βˆEˆt (C.35)
d) So, the global estimate for λ̂i can be expressed as follows:


α + ni
λ̂i = (C.36)

β +τ i
 1
Taking ε ∈ 0,  , an approximate credibility interval with level 1-Ɛ for λ i is
 2
 Γ ε  Γ  ε 
q ˆ ˆ  ;q ˆ ˆ  1 − 
 α + ni , β +τ i  2  α + ni , β +τ i  2  
Or, equivalently
 Γ ε  Γ  ε 
 qαˆ + n ,1/2   qαˆ + n ,1/2  1 −  
 i 2; i  2 

(
 2 β +τi

ˆ
) (
2 βˆ + τ i

 )

C.3.3 Estimation of failure rate with zero failures — Bayesian approach
C.3.3.1 General
NOTE The Bayesian approach is not always accepted by safety authorities (e.g. in the nuclear field).
The classical approach described above has difficulties when the observed number of failures is zero.
An alternative approach which handles the situation with zero failures is to use a Bayesian approach
with non-informative prior distribution. When n failures have been observed during time, t, the failure
rate estimate, , in the posteriori distribution is given by Formula (C.37):
2n + 1
λ̂ = (C.37)
2t
which, in the case with zero failures, reduces to Formula (C.38):
1
λ̂ = (C.38)
2t
C.3.3.2 Constant confidence-level estimator

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

The failure rate is estimated from Formula (C.39):
n + 0, 7
λˆ = (C.39)
t
C.3.3.3 Advantages
The advantages of this estimator are the following:

— it works in the zero failure case;
— it is homogeneous from a confidence level point of view;
— the estimator of the median value converge toward the maximum likelihood estimate when n
increases;
— it is easy to use.
In addition caution should however be given to the use of the above mentioned estimators with respect
to whether they are used for individual failure modes or total failure rate, including all failure modes
C.3.4 Failure as function of cycles rather than time

For some equipment, failure modes or in certain conditions, it is a more realistic model to regard the
probability of failure as a function of the number of operations or cycles, rather than time. This model
should be considered when it is presumed that the number of operations is a more likely contributor
to failure than the actual time. For instance, a connector is presumably much more prone to failure,
if it is connected and disconnected very frequently, rather than connected once and staying that way
for many years. Consequently, the time is not the major factor, but rather the number of operations.
In this case, all of the principles and formulas in the previous sub-clauses still apply, except that the ‘t’
denoting the time is replaced by e.g. a ‘c’, denoting the number of cycles. Regarding the use of cycles for
reliability purposes, see also IEC 61810-2:2011.
Note that if the number of cycles is approximately constant in time, this alternative model can be
approximated by a probability of failure as a function of the time, but this is rarely the case when
failure rates (or average failure frequency) are based on data collected across different installations,
geographical locations etc. with different operating conditions. Note also that an equipment class may
be split in terms of failure rate model for different failure mechanisms or causes, as the time-based
model may be more relevant for some (e.g. corrosion) and the cycle-based model may be more relevant
for others (e.g. wear).
When performing analyses on a higher taxonomic (hierarchical) level, however, one needs to be careful
with the use of the cycle-based model. The installation, plant or system performance is best expressed
by a time-based model, since it is not meaningful to talk about number of cycles of an entire installation.
In this case, the cycle-based models used for some equipment or failure modes needs to be converted to
a time-based model. This is done by the simple formula
MTTF = MCTF/ ξ (C.40)
where ξ is the expected number of cycles per time unit. It is, however, important to use the model on
the right hand side of the formula, since it will respond to possible changes in the expected number of
cycles. See also definition of mean number of cycles in 3.58.
Since ‘cycles’ is the most common term in this regard, it has also been used here. It can, however, be
replaced by the term, ‘demand’, which is explained in C.1.3. The collected information on demands
can thus be used to calculate the MCTF, which can be interpreted as mean start-ups to failure, mean
activations to failure, etc., depending on the equipment. The Mean Cycles To failure (MCTF) is defined
in 3.57.

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

A relevant example can be found in ISO/TR 12489:2013, 3.2.13 (Example 2).

It should be noted that some failure modes are related to demands, like e.g. “Failure to start/stop/
open/close/connect/disconnect on demand”. Equipment classes where such failures modes are relevant
may be considered as subjects to analyses with cycle or demand based models, rather than time based
models. However, the occurrence of the failure mode alone is not enough to determine which model is
better. A valve failure may have been recorded with the failure mode “Failure to open on demand”. In
this case, one possibility is that it failed to open due to demand, because opening the valve frequently
in the past has induced gradual wear until it fails. Another possibility is that it has not been opened
frequently in the past and corroded over time in closed position. Upon opening, a hidden failure is
detected.
These two scenarios are very different, but will typically be denoted with the same Failure mode
and the same Detection method (on demand). The difference between failure on demand and due to
demand in this case is only seen by the different failure mechanisms, which are wear and corrosion,
respectively. Depending on which is the dominant failure mechanism, the valve reliability is expressed
in terms of either time or number of cycles in this case.
In general, Drilling, Well completion and Well intervention equipment are by nature more demand
dependent than time dependent. Other equipment classes in that category may include Cranes, Loading
arms, Winches, Mixers and possibly Valves as mentioned above.
C.4 Maintainability
C.4.1 General
Several normalized definitions of the concept of “maintainability” exist in normalization documents
(see also 3.47), specifically
— ability, under given conditions, of an item to be maintained in or restored to, over a given period
of time, a state where it is able to perform its function when the maintenance is achieved under
prescribed conditions, procedures and means;
— measure of the ability of an item to be maintained in or restored in specified conditions when the
maintenance is achieved by personnel with a specified level of skill and using prescribed procedures
and resources at all the prescribed levels of maintenance and repair.
C.4.2 Mathematical meaning
C.4.2.1 Maintainability concepts
There is a probabilistic version of “maintainability”, similar to that for the concepts of reliability and
availability, as follows:
probability that an item can be restored to a condition within a prescribed period of time when
maintenance is performed by personnel having specific skill levels using prescribed procedures and
resources.
See also C.5.5.2 regarding the use of downtime terms normally related to corrective maintenance time,
i.e. mean time to restoration (MTTRes) and mean overall repairing time (MRT).
C.4.2.2 Maintainability performance
This is a probability method to measure maintainability performance, in addition to many other

indicators.

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

The maintainability, M(t), can be expressed by Formula (C.41):
() (
M t = P RT ≤ t (C.41) )
where
RT is the active time to repair item S, i.e. the time from failure detection to restoration;
P(RT ≤ t) is the probability that RT is less than time t.

Therefore, M(t) is the cumulative distribution function (CDF) of the RTs of item S. By definition of the
CDFs, M(t) is a non-decreasing function varying from 0 to 1 as t varies from 0 to infinity. That means
any repairable item is likely to be repaired (restored) if we wait long enough.
As a property of the CDF, it is possible to express M(t) by using the “hazard rate” of the distribution,
which, in this case, is the so-called “repair rate” μ(t).
When this rate is constant, we obtain the classical formula for the maintainability, M(t), given in
Formula (C.42):
() ( )
M t = 1 − exp − µ ⋅ t (C.42)
where μ is the so-called repair rate, which is equivalent to the hazard rate and which is designated
MTTRes.
Note that, depending on what we actually want to evaluate, the whole down time, a part of it or only the
active maintenance time can be used as RT in Formula (C.41).
C.4.2.3 Repair rate
The repair rate, μ, is a reliability parameter that allows the evaluation of the probability that the
item is repaired within a certain delay after having failed (this is the probabilistic version of the
“maintainability” of the item).
This parameter plays a role for the TR (time to repair) analogous to that of the failure rate for the TTF
(time to failure).
The estimate is given by Formula (C.43):
n 1
µ= = (C.43)
∑RTi MRT
where
n is the number of repairs;
RTi is the length of the ith repair
MRT is the mean overall repairing time.

All data can be collected from the field.

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

This parameter can be used to evaluate the maintainability of the item using an exponential law as
given in Formula (C.44):
() ( )
M t = 1 − exp − µ ⋅ t (C.44)
More sophisticated probabilistic laws are often used for modelling repairs. In these cases, the repair
rate becomes a non-constant μ(t) and the simple estimate in Formula (C.44) no longer applies. For
example, it is necessary to take into consideration the length of the various RTis in order to evaluate the
parameter of a log-normal law.
C.4.2.4 Measures and estimates
An indicator of the maintainability performance is the MRT (mean overall repairing time) of the
concerned item. This MRT is the part of the mean down time (MDT) due to the repair itself. It can be
estimated from the sum of the observed “times to repair” (from data feedback) divided by the number
of repairs, as given in Formula (C.45):
 RTi
MRT = ∑ n
(C.45)
NOTE When the analytical form of M(t) is known or has been chosen, a link can be made between the
parameters of the exponential law and the MRTs estimated from the field.
The estimation in the classical case, when Formula (C.44) holds and when μ, the so-called “repair
rate,” is constant, is easy. As the amount of data collected increases, the estimation becomes closer and
closer to the true mathematical values. The uncertainties can be managed through classical statistical
analyses.
For more complicated repair laws (e.g. log-normal), it is necessary to take into consideration the length
of the various observed TTFs and to do a statistical fitting.
When planning to collect data (see 7.1.2), it is necessary to consider the various methods of recording
down times (see Table 4 in this International Standards, and also Figures 5 to 7 in ISO/TR 12489:2013)
and the appropriate parts of the down time to be included need to be chosen. Depending on what is
done, several parts of the down time can be included within the MRT.
C.4.3 Maintainability — Intrinsic and extrinsic factors

For comparison purposes, it is important to identify what is intrinsic (only related to the item) and
extrinsic (context-dependent) in the maintainability of single items.
— Intrinsic maintainability considers only the built-in characteristics designed to help the maintenance
of an item.
— Extrinsic maintainability considers all that is context-dependent: logistics, support, task
organisation, isolation, de-isolation.
“Extrinsic” maintainability changes from site to site while “intrinsic” maintainability does not. For
reliability studies, it is very important to be able to analyse and model separately these two definitions
of the maintainability.
For comparison purposes, it is useful to be able to identify those factors of maintainability that
relate only to the item itself, e.g. lubrication or ease of dismantling, which can be called intrinsic
maintainability, and those related to its location, e.g. logistics, support, task organisation, isolation, de-
isolation, which can be called extrinsic maintainability.

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

C.4.4 Procedure for compiling data records for maintainability

When planning to collect measures and estimates of failure maintainability (see 7.1.2), choose
appropriate measures from C.5 for the information required.
C.5 “Mean time” interpretations

C.5.1 Principle
The mean time during which the item is in certain states can be measured by use of mean down time,
mean time between failures, mean time to failure, mean time to repair, mean up time, etc. Mean values
are a good approximation when limited data are available or when there is no clear trend in the data.
However, if there is a trend, as there often is, in maintenance data, e.g. increasing hazard rate (wear-
out) or decreasing hazard rate (“run in”), mean values can be misleading and can result in incorrect
decisions.
C.5.2 Mean down time (MDT)

Mean down time is formulated as the mean time during which the item is in its down state. See
definition of down state in 3.15.
This includes all the delays between the failure and the restoration of the function of the concerned
item: detection, spare parts, logistics, stand-by, maintenance policy, active maintenance time, re-
instatement, etc.
This is not an intrinsic parameter, as it depends on the context within which the item is used.
Therefore, only a specific part of this down time can be of interest to an analyst performing a reliability
study (i.e. MTTRes). See also Figure 4 in this International Standard, and also Figure 5 to 7 in ISO/TR
12489:2013.
C.5.3 Mean elapsed time between failures (METBF)

C.5.3.1 Mathematics of METBF
The general expression for the mean elapsed time between failures, METBF, can be expressed as given
in Formula (C.46):
METBF = MUT + MDT (C.46)
where
MUT
is the mean up time;
MDT
is the mean down time.

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

which, in simple cases, can be expressed as given in Formula (C.47):

METBF = MTTF + MTTRes (C.47)
where
MTTF is the mean time to failure;
MTTRes is the mean time to restoration.

Like the MDT, this is not an intrinsic parameter, but depends on the context within which the item is used.
C.5.3.2 Uses for METBF
METBFs are calculated and used for different purposes (for item and equipment, service, site, etc.).
The “item” and “equipment” are of interest mainly to reliability engineers and the others to the
maintenance people.
C.5.4 Mean time to failure (MTTF)

C.5.4.1 Mathematics of MTTF
This parameter, mean time to fail, MTTF, is linked to the failure rate, λ, of the concerned item by
Formula (C.48):
MTTF = 1 / λ (C.48)
where λ is the failure rate, and is valid only for constant failure rates.
C.5.4.2 Use of MTTF
Rigorously, this parameter concerns only the first failure of a new item before any maintenance task
has been performed. If the repair is perfect, i.e. the repaired item is “as good as new”, MTTF is exactly
the same as MUT.
Take care to understand this term and be aware that in practice, MTTF and MUT are often confused
(see definition of MUT). See also definitions of failure frequency and failure rate (in Clause 3), which are
similar terms often used to describe the occurrence of failures.
NOTE MTTF is normally associated with the assumption of an exponential distribution (e.g. a constant
hazard rate). MTTF is also used for other distributions as, for example, the normal distribution or the Weibull
distribution. Formulas (C.46) to (C.48) are valid only for the assumption of an exponential distribution for both
METBF and MTTF. Further, it is a prerequisite that all the time is measured in the same time dimension (global or
local time).
C.5.5 Mean overall repairing time (MRT)

See definitions of the mean overall repairing time (MRT) in 3.61.

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

C.5.5.1 Mathematics of MRT
This parameter, mean overall repairing time, MRT, is linked to the repair rate, μ, of the concerned item
by Formula (C.49):
MRT = 1 / µ (C.49)
Where μ is the repair rate.
C.5.5.2 Uses of MRT
The name MRT is generally related only to the active corrective maintenance time that is a part of the
down time, but depending on the study, it can range from the active corrective maintenance time to
the whole down time. In that case “restoration” can be used instead of “repair”. In the general case,
however, “down time” is greater than “active maintenance time”. See also in ISO/TR 12489:2013, Figure
5, and 3.1.31 (Mean time to repair; MTTR), 3.1.32 (mean time to restoration; MTTRes), 3.1.33 (mean
overall repairing time; MRT) and 3.1.34 (mean active repair time; MART).
If preventive maintenance is also included in addition to the corrective maintenance (repair) dealt
with above, the mean time to maintain, MTTM, expressed in hours, can be calculated as given in
Formula (C.50):
(t mc ) (
⋅ M c + t mp ⋅ M p ) (C.50)
MTTM =
(Mc + Mp )
where
tmc is the total elapsed corrective maintenance or repair time, expressed in calendar hours;
tmp is the total elapsed preventive maintenance time, expressed in calendar hours;
Mc is the total number of corrective maintenance actions (repairs);
Mp is the total number of preventive maintenance actions.
C.5.6 Mean up time (MUT)

If repairs are “perfect”, i.e. the repaired item is “as good as new,” Mean up time (MUT) is exactly the
same as MTTF. If repair is not perfect, or for equipment comprised of parts that have been repaired and
others that have never failed, MUT and MTTF are two different parameters (see also C.5.4).
C.5.7 Procedure for compiling data records for mean time

When planning to collect measures and estimates of mean time (see 7.1.2), choose appropriate measures
from C.5 for the information.
C.6 Testing for hidden failures in safety systems

C.6.1 General principles
There are two different principles that can be used to establish the necessary test interval for a safety
function with hidden failures:
— required availability
This approach is based on a risk analysis for which some absolute risk acceptance criteria have
been established. Each safety function of a plant/system/item of equipment is allocated reliability

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

requirements based on this. This approach is in line with the standards IEC 61508:2010 (all parts) and
IEC 61511:2016 (all parts).
— cost-benefit availability
Under some circumstances, the consequence of a safety-system failure in a hazardous situation can be
reduced to economic consequences only. It is, then, appropriate to establish the preventive maintenance
programme by optimizing the total costs by weighing the cost of preventive maintenance against the
cost of safety-system failure; see ISO 15663:2000/2001 (all parts).
There is a need to collect data with regards to both failures occurred before the test (true hidden
failures), and those failures occurring because of the test (e.g. cycle failure, human error, unavailability
during test).
C.6.2 Required availability

This situation is characterized by an upper limit, LPFD, that the average probability of hidden failure
observed on demand is not allowed to exceed. The necessary test interval, τ, to achieve this can be
found by the approximation in Formula (C.51). This formula assumes that test have no detrimental
effects (gamma, γ=0) and that MRT is negligible.
2LPFD
τ = (C.51)
λ
where
LPFD is the upper accepted limit for average probability of failure on demand;
λ is the failure rate for on-demand failures.

The average probability of failure on demand can be calculated from Formula (C.52):
τ λ γ
PDFavg = λ + + (C.52)
2 µ µτ
where
γ is the cycle failure rate;
τ is the test interval time;
μ is the repair rate.

The optimal test interval τopt can then be calculated as:
(
τ opt = 2γ / λ ⋅ µ ) (C.53)
See ISO/TR 12489:2013 (e.g. 3.1.16) for further details on availability calculations.
C.6.3 Mathematics of cost-benefit availability

When we use the term cost-benefit availability, we are considering a safety system classified as SIL 1
as defined in IEC 61508:2010 (all parts). This means that there are no absolute requirements with
respect to the availability of the system. Still, this can be an important protective system with respect
to potential economic loss. An example is a vibration trip on a pump that is supposed to stop the pump if
the vibration exceeds a defined level. If the vibration trip fails, the material damage to the pump can be
significant. The approach to use in such a situation is to perform an economic optimization where the
cost of testing is weighed against the expected cost related to failures.

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Mathematically, this idea can be formulated by the approximation in Formula (C.54) for total
expected cost:
1 C
E(C T ) = λ fto ⋅ τ ⋅ f ⋅ m (C.54)
2 τ
where
E(C T ) is the total expected cost;
λfto is the average failure rate for failure mode “fail to operate”;
f is the frequency of events when the safety system is supposed to be activated;
Cm is the cost of each preventive maintenance activity or test;
τ is the test interval;
EXAMPLE For a fire alarm, f is the frequency of fires.
Cf is the difference in cost between the consequences of the hazardous situation when the safety
system works and when it does not work;
EXAMPLE For an automatic fire-extinguishing system, Cf is the difference in damage if the

extinguishing system is automatically activated or not in case of a fire. In many cases, it is
required to perform a coarse risk analysis to estimate Cf. In the case of a fire, for instance, one
important aspect to evaluate is the probability of people being present to discover the fire and
being able to manually activate the fire extinguishing equipment).
The economic optimal test interval may be found by finding the derivative of the total expected cost
and setting it equal to zero as given in Formula (C.55):
(
τ = 2C m / λ fto ⋅ f ⋅ C f ) (C.55)
where the parameters are the same as those for Formula (C.54).

The cost of the shutdown of the installation when a failure is detected by a test should be also considered.
The cost of shutdown due to spurious failure may be also considered.
C.6.4 Handling of uncertainty

The uncertainty related to the predicted reliability and availability values should be discussed, and
if possible, quantified. The quantification may have the form of an uncertainty distribution for
the expected value of the performance measure or a measure of the spread of this distribution (e.g.
standard deviation, prediction interval).
The main factors causing variability (and hence stochastic uncertainty in the predictions) should
be identified and discussed. Also, factors contributing to the uncertainty as a result of the way the
reliability performance is modelled should be covered, including relevant assumptions made (cf. e.g.
Selvik and Aven, 2011).
Importance and sensitivity analyses may be carried out to describe the sensitivity of the input data
used and the assumptions made.
For further guidance regarding numerical uncertainties handling, see ISO/TR 12489:2013, Annex O.

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

C.6.5 Testing during manufacturing or qualification testing

Testing during manufacturing or qualification testing (reliability testing or accelerated testing) will
have a need for various statistical analyses, for e.g. estimating failure rates (or failure frequency).
ISO 20815:2008, Annex I.9 and IEC 61164:2004 give further information.
C.7 Human error as an underlying contributor to equipment performance

Human behaviour has both a positive and negative effect on equipment performance. The tendency
is, however, to focus on the negative effect and to call it human error. Clause 3 Terms and definitions
defines both error and human error (cf. e.g. Kirwan, 1994) as a discrepancy, the first in relation to an
object’s true and measured condition and the second in relation to a human’s intended behaviour (and
expected outcome) and actual behaviour (and actual outcome). However, throughout this document the
term “error” always appears in combination with a number of words which each give more specificity
to its meaning. These combinations with “error” include:
— human (3.22, 3.36, Table B.3, C.1.10, C.6);
— computing (3.22);
— software (3.22, 3.87, Table B.2);
— operating (3.37, Table B.1);
— calibration (Table B.2);
— fabrication (Table B.3);
— installation (Table B.3, C.1.6);
— maintenance (Table B.3);
— documentation (Table B.3);
— management (Table B.3);
— design (B.2.3.2, C.1.6);
— control and monitoring (C.1.8);
— computational (C.1.11).
In all these cases this could be a human error (e.g. management error, operating error, maintenance
error) as in Table B.3 or due to human error as an underlying cause when the error is the equipment
failure mechanism (e.g. calibration error in Table B.2). Human error as an underlying cause of an
equipment failure can always be considered as a possibility.
The causes of human error itself can be numerous. See ISO/TR 12489:2013 for consideration of
Human factors in relation to human functions, tasks, performance, types of error, error modelling and
quantification (Section 5.5 and Annex H). ISO/TR 12489:2013 deals primarily with random human
errors (see the failure classification in Figure B.5).

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Annex D
(informative)
Typical requirements for data
D.1 General
There are different areas of application of RM data and it is necessary to consider carefully the
collection of data (see Clause 7) so that the types of data are consistent with the intended purpose. The
types of analyses considered are listed in Table D.1, which also refers to other relevant international
and industry standards.
Table D.1 — Areas of application and types of analyses

Areas of Type of analysis to be applied Abbreviation Supported by Reference
application ISO 14224
Safety A1 — Quantitative risk analysis QRA Yes NORSOK Z-013
ISO 17776
IEC 31010
A2 — Risk-based inspection RBI Yes API RP 580
A3 — Safety integrity level SIL Yes IEC 61508 (all parts)
IEC 61511 (all parts)
ISO/TR 12489
A4 — Environmental- and social-impact ESIA Yes ISO 14001
assessment
LCC/Opt imiza- B1 — Life cycle cost LCC Yes IEC 60300-3-3
tion/Maintenance
ISO 15663 (all parts)
B2 — Production availability PA Yes ISO 20815
B3 — Availability analysis AA Yes ISO 20815
B4 — Reliability-centred maintenance RCM Yes IEC 60300-3-11
NORSOK Z-008
SAE JA1011
SAE JA1012
B5 — Spare-parts analysis SPA Yes IEC 60300-3-12
IEC 60300-3-14
B6 — Failure mode, effect and criti- FMECA Yes IEC 60812
cality analysis
B7 — Statistical reliability data analysis SDA Yes IEC 60300-3-1
IEC 60706-3
B8 — Structural reliability STR Yes ISO 19900
NORSOK N-001
B9 – Root cause analysis RCA Yes IEC 62740

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Table D.1 (continued)

Areas of Type of analysis to be applied Abbreviation Supported by Reference
application ISO 14224
General C1 — Manning-resource planning MRP Yes NORSOK Z-008
C2 — Six sigma 6Σ Partly ISO 13053
C3 — Fault tree analysis FTA Yes IEC 61025
C4 — Markov process analysis MPA Yes IEC 61165
C5 — Petri Net for Monte Carlo analysis PNA Yes IEC 62551
D.2 Business value of data collection

During the different phases of a development project from concept selection to the operational phase,
it is necessary to make a lot of decisions. Many of these decisions are supported by the analysis types
listed in Table D.1. These decisions normally have large impact on the project economy and safety,
and they should be based on good models and high quality data in order to reach the “best” decisions.
Examples of areas where such decisions are taken are shown in Clause 6.
D.3 Data requirements

During development of the second edition of this International Standard, a GAP analysis was performed
to reveal the requirements for data in various types of RAMS analysis. The tables below show a
summary of the GAP analyses identifying the required data to be recorded for each analysis type. The
data requirements have been prioritized by each analyst using the following scores:
a) normally needed; rated as 1 in Tables D.2 to D.4;
b) needed optionally; rated as 2 in Tables D.2 to D.4.
A shaded row indicates parameters for which data are already covered in this International Standard.
Non-shaded rows indicate parameters identified by the GAP-analyses as possible new parameters to be
included in future revisions of this International Standard.
Some recommended parameters (e.g. average failure frequency or failure rate) cannot be recorded
directly, but are required to be calculated from other data. These have been termed “derived reliability
parameters” (see Annex C).
The data elements in Tables D.2 and D.4 should be seen in conjunction with data elements shown in
Tables 5, 6 and 8.
D.4 Description of the analyses

A summary of analyses and relevant standards is given in ISO 20815:2008.

Table D.2 — Equipment data to be recorded
Data to be recorded a Type of analysis to be applied to the data recorded Comments
A1 A2 A3 A4 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 C1 C2 C3 C4 C5
QRA RBI SIL ESIA LCC PA AA RCM SPA FME SDA STR RCA MRP 6∑ FTA MPA PNA
Equipment location 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 2 2 Corresponds to equipment at-
tributes (equipment tag number)
in Table 5

Classification 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 Corresponds to classification
(equipment class, equipment type
and system) in Table 5
Installation data 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 2 2 Corresponds to various classifi-
cation data elements in Table 5
Manufacturer’s data 1 2 1 2 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 2 2 2 Corresponds to equipment at-
tributes (manufacturer name
and model designation) in Table 5
Design characteristics 1 2 2 2 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 2 2 2 —

Surveillance period 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 2 2 —
Accumulated operating 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 2 2 —
period
Number of demands 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 1 1 2 2 —
Operating mode 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 1 1 2 2 —
Common cause failure 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 Derived parameter; can be esti-
rate (frequency) mated by extracting data with
failure cause “Common cause”,
see Table B.3
Confidence intervals 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Derived parameters; see Annex C
Set of spare parts 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
a For definition of codes/abbreviations A1, QRA, etc., see Table D.1.
BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)
231

Table D.3 — Failure data to be recorded
232
QRA RBI SIL ESIA LCC PA AA RCM SPA FME SDA STR RCA MRP 6Σ FTA MPA PNA
Equipment unit 1 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 The equipment unit, subunit
ISO 14224:2016(E)
BS EN ISO 14224:2016
and MI/component reflect the

failed equipment at these levels
Subunit 2 2 2 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 2 2 2 —
Maintainable item 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 2 2 2 —
Failure mode 1 2 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 —
Failure impact on equip- 1 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 2 2 2
ment function
Failure mechanism 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 2 —
Failure cause 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 —
Detection method 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 —

Failure impact on plant 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 ”
operation
Failure date 2 2 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 Essential parameter for all
lifetime analyses, e.g. TTT-plot
Weibull, etc. Not recommended
to discard.
External leakage rate 1 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Hole sizes and leakage vol-
umes may be additional data
requirements in QRA, and in-
terfaces/ traceability between
accidental event databases and
RM databases can be beneficial
in some cases.
Failure rate 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 2 Derived value; see Annex C
(frequency)
Common cause failure 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 1 2 Can be identified as one specific
rate (frequency) failure cause (see C.1.6)
Confidence interval 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Derived value; see Annex C

Table D.3 (continued)
Damage mechanism 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 Partly covered in failure mech-
anism and failure cause
Recommended action to 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 —

eliminate failure cause
Spare part 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 —
Probability of failure on 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 2 Derived value using selected
demand set of failure modes covered
in this International Standard;
see also Table B.15 and Annex F

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)
233

Table D.4 — Maintenance data to be recorded
234
Maintenance category 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 —
ISO 14224:2016(E)
BS EN ISO 14224:2016
Maintenance activity 2 2 1 2 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 2 2 2 —
Down time 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 —
Active maintenance time 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 2 1 2 1 1 1 —
Maintenance man-hours, 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 —
per discipline
M a i nt en a nc e m a n- 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 —
hours, total
Date of maintenance 2 2 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 —
action
Maintenance impact on 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 —

plant operations
Lead time 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 —
Spare part 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 —
Repair workshop cycle 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 See Annex E, Table E.3,
time KPI no. 27
Maintenance tools 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 —
Repair rate 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 2 Derived value; see Annex C
Test efficiency 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 Derived value defined as the
fraction of failures discovered
on test
Confidence interval 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Derived value; see Annex C
Priority of the repair 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 —
Test interval 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 —

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

D.5 Reliability data sources

Reliability data sources can be of various types, as classified in Table D.5.
Table D.5 — Classification of reliability data sources

Source of data Description
1. Generic data Reliability data covering families of similar equipment.
Such generic data can be:
Computerized database of data, typically grouped in data tables with several equipment
attributes. The related historic data collection can be done according to published standards
Published data handbooks (e.g. the OREDA handbook), sometime simplified versions of com-
puterised databases. The formats can depend on the publisher. Such data handbooks would
normally be historic data, i.e., operating field experience.
Published data handbook based on expert judgement, but not on historic operating data or
underlying database.
The data can apply for one specific industry, or it can be collected from several industries.
NOTE Some industrial initiatives can provide other data, (e.g., failures detected during test)
that might be useful for establishing reliability data input.
2. Operator/ com- Reliability data or reliability indicators based on operating field experience of a single com-
pany specific data pany. Such data can be established by one operator/oil company from:
• One or several of its installations,
• Its own interpretation of different data sources,
• Key Performance Indicators (KPI)
NOTE 1 Such operator/company specific data can be part of an industrial cooperation generic
reliability database, or purely own company data.
NOTE 2 The data can also be part of a company database that complies with this international
standard.
NOTE 3 Annex E exemplifies KPIs.
NOTE 4 The events recorded in a CMMIS system are not reliability data, but could be used to
establish some reliability indicators (e.g. KPI).
3. Ma nu f ac t u rer Reliability data produced by a particular manufacturer data for a particular product.
data
Such data can be based on:
• Operating field experience from
o The manufacturer himself. The data can be aligned or not with an international
standard.
o The users (e.g., specific or generic data mentioned above)
• Component FMECA/ studies,
• Laboratory testing, e.g., accelerated lifetime testing, and reliability testing. This can apply
for new technology equipment for which experience data not yet exist. Such pre-operational
data should normally be entitled ‘pre-operational/test reliability data’, as opposed to actual
field operating experience. See also IEC 61164:2004 for statistical tests and estimation meth-
ods for reliability growth.
4 Expert judgement Expert judgement would involve
• General advice from safety system equipment expert
• Use of statistical expert analysis methods (e.g., Delphi, etc.) to utilise a variety of qualified
sources as input to the reliability analysis
(see references: van Noortwijk et al., 1992 and Cooke, 1992)
5. Human error data Various sources of human error data exist. ISO/TR 12489:2013, Annex H.2, gives some advice
about human error probabilities.

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

It is a weakness in the industry that too little attention is given to the quality of the input data. Therefore,
undertaking the qualification of reliability data found in data sources is vital for the credibility of the
results in risk decision making. ISO 20815:2008, Annex E, gives further advice on this qualification topic.
1. Generic data:
Generic data are often (but not necessarily), see Table D.5 based on operational experience from a
number of installations and a number of comparable equipment types, such as e.g., flame detectors from
different vendors. In such case the generic data reflect some kind of average expected field performance
for the equipment type under consideration.
At early project stages generic data is often selected due to lack of detailed information as all equipment
features decisions have not yet been made. However at later project stages one should preferably apply
valid application or equipment specific data – if well documented and considered relevant.
2. Operator/company specific data
Authorities require that the companies keep control of their safety barriers throughout the entire
lifecycle of an installation. Consequently, it is often required for the operators to collect installation
specific failure data during maintenance and operation. During modification analyses such data are
of particular relevance for the purpose of documenting the performance history of given equipment.
However, since the statistical confidence in data from only one installation can often be poor (or all
potential failure events cannot have occurred so far at the installation), reliability analyses are seldom
based on such data alone. However, for some equipment where the number of installed units is high,
e.g., fire and gas detectors, it can be relevant to apply installation specific data only.
3. Manufacturer data
It is often stated by the analyst that supplied manufacturer data are significantly “better” than
comparable generic data (i.e., lower failure rates). This can have several reasons, such as varying
equipment quality, failure modes included and the definition of equipment boundaries. Another
important aspect, however, is that failures due to environmental stress, due to mal-operation,
installation failures, maintenance errors, etc. have frequently been excluded from the manufacturer
data. This is understandable since manufacturers are in the business of selling and does not want to
include failures that can be attributed to factors external to the equipment itself. Also, if the vendor
charges for failure analysis this is a disincentive to return the failed components. Another aspect is the
fact that feedback from the operators using the equipment can be poor (especially beyond the warranty
period) and in such case it is difficult for the manufacturer to establish a good failure rate estimate.
Consequently, using data from manufacturers can involve too low failure rates and as such needs to be
carefully considered. It is therefore advisable to deploy the principles of this International Standard to
strengthen the quality of the data and the communication on these matters.
When using manufacturer data the reliability engineer should remember to add failures due to connection
blockage which are often included in field experience data but excluded from manufacturer data.
4. Expert judgement data
The use of experts to estimate reliability data requires qualification of that the expert is an equipment
expert, and understands the methods being used in reliability data estimation. This International
Standard provides good guidance on such matters, even though not all type of equipment is covered.
If experts are used it would also be beneficial to undertake independent reviews and also be conscious
in how reliability data are being communicated, e.g., number of observable events for a given fleet of
equipment units at an installation for a certain period of time would be more practical than estimating
failure rates in 10-6 per hrs. Separate methods exist for expert data analysis.
5. Human error data
Observations or other information can be used to quantify the failed human interactions:
— generic data (look-up tables);

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

— collected data (calculated human error probability) specific to the task;

— estimation methods (expert judgement);
— combination of the above.

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Annex E
(informative)
Key performance indicators (KPIs) and benchmarking
E.1 General
Reliability and maintenance (RM) data can be used for developing and managing key performance
indicators (KPIs) and for compiling Benchmark information. The objective of both Benchmarking and
KPIs is to assist in the management of business improvement. This Annex gives some examples of KPIs,
which can be extended, as deemed necessary, using the taxonomy classification in Figure 3. (Some of
the principles described below are based on NPRA, 2002 and Hernu, 2000).
Figure E.1 — Process for using KPIs and benchmarking for improving business performance
The process depicted in Figure E.1 is a simplified version of how KPIs can be developed.
KPIs should be aligned to the objectives of the organization using them and, thus, the organization is free
to define the KPIs in whatever way best contributes to the improved performance of the organization.
Improvement is an essential ingredient of successful companies. Performance indicators and
benchmarking can be highly effective in identifying and improving areas of greatest opportunity.
For each of the activities in the process represented in Figure E.1 a brief description is given in the list
items a) to e).
a) Benchmark performance:
Use is made of benchmarking data to determine the performance of the organization in key areas. These
benchmarks can then be used for comparison, usually external, against organizations in the same or
similar industry, or against organizations in different industries that have similar business processes.
However, measuring performance gaps with the better performers in a peer group is only half the value
of benchmarking. Analyses that can be made of differences of plant profile, practices and organization
(the causal factors) explaining these performance gaps are also invaluable knowledge for benchmarking
study participants.
b) Identify areas for improvement:
Based on the external benchmarks and the objectives of the organization, areas for improvement can
be identified. The areas for improvement are not necessarily the areas where the performance is poor
against the other benchmarks, as the areas of poor performance might not correspond with the areas
that are critical for the business objectives.
In addition, benchmarking is a tool to prove the business case for the necessary up-front management
commitment and investment of the resources to be mobilized for the successful implementation of
a performance-improvement project. Benchmarking can be conducted inside the company, within
the industry or across industries (as long as the same business process is being dealt with). In the

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

former case, a “best of the best” networking-type process is effective in performance upgrades. Use
of benchmarking within an industry allows a company to recalibrate its performance targets and to
re-examine the justification of historic policies and practices in the light of those of the better industry
performers.
c) Develop KPIs for improvement
In the areas where improvement is desired, KPIs should be developed. Each KPI should have a targeted
performance level. The KPI and target should, where possible, be specific, measurable, achievable (but
require stretch), realistic and time-based (i.e. can track performance improvement over time). The
frequency at which the KPI is measured is determined by a realistic expectation of the amount of time
required for any corrective action to have an impact on the performance level. Thus, one does not want
to measure and analyse the parameters when there is no change from one measurement to the next,
but it is necessary to balance this against not measuring often enough, resulting in the situation that
parameters can be out of control for long periods. In addition, it is necessary to consider the time, cost
and resources needed to develop, maintain and manage the KPIs, as this also determines how many
robust KPIs can be used.
d) Measure KPI
The KPI should be measured and reported, where possible, within existing systems. In addition to
measuring the KPI, it is necessary to compare the result against the target and to identify any causes
for deviations.
e) Take corrective action
The causes for deviations should be addressed and corrective actions performed, and the process
should be repeated many times.
This Annex focuses on the use of KPIs and Benchmarking by Operating Organisations but the same
process can also be adopted, as is encouraged to be, by the wider supply chain. For example, Equipment
Manufacturers could adopt similar measures to report design and actual performance of their products,
improving equipment selection and helping to ensure sustained production (or system) availability and
HSE performance of the production facilities. Consistent definitions, boundary definitions, and data
quality as defined in this standard are essential to improve data collection in this area.”
E.2 Alignment to business objectives

E.2.1 General
KPIs are aligned to the organization’s objectives for the facility (or operations) and improvements are
identified and implemented in order to achieve the organization’s planned objectives. The alignment of
KPIs to the business objectives can be represented as shown in Figure E.2.

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Figure E.2 — Alignment of KPIs to the business objectives
E.2.2 Differences between benchmarks and KPIs

The differences between benchmarks and KPIs are rather subtle. The major difference between a
KPI and a benchmark is related to the usage. In effect, a KPI is used for managing an improvement on
an ongoing basis and for determining the progress towards a predetermined target. A benchmark is
used as a one-off, or low-frequency, event to determine the present performance levels against other
organizations involved in the same process.
The table below provides an overview of the major differences.
Table E.1 — KPIs versus benchmarking

Characteristic KPIs Benchmark
Purpose Track progress and effectiveness Identify gaps in present perfor-
of management mance level
Frequency Reasonable expectation of change One-off/infrequent
occurring
Source of data Internal systems External sources
Level of control Immediate to short-term Longer-term
Number of influencing parameters One or few Many
Accuracy Interested in trend Interested in absolute value
Targets Set, based on objectives No target
E.3 Using benchmarking

E.3.1 Benchmarking principles
Benchmarking helps determine the reference point and standard from which world-class performance
can be measured. The process of benchmarking can be broken down into three steps.
a) Evaluate and measure your own operation or specific process to identify weaknesses and strengths
using the data collected in accordance with Clauses 7, 8, and 9. Choose a set of KPIs (see Table E.3).

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Align them to the organisation’s objectives for the facility (or operations), identify areas for
improvement, collect and analyse the data and implement improvements in order to achieve the
organization’s planned objectives.
b) Initiate a benchmarking study and document processes by referring to peer groups (see E.3.7) that
are more productive or efficient than yours.
c) Identify best practices and implement them.
E.3.2 General
Benchmarking is most useful where there is an existing statistically significant sample population. It
is necessary that those individuals involved in the exchange of information understand the inherent
limitations imposed by the data they collect and the database where it is stored. For example, depending
on the type, load, speed, mounting method, lubricant formulations, contamination levels, etc., a given
bearing can last anywhere from 18 months to 40 years; therefore, knowing the average MTTF of all
bearings in a given plant would be of only limited usefulness to a reliability engineer. For company A,
who is operating with a MTTF of 18 years, to approach the reliability of company B who is operating
with a MTTF of 40 years, it is necessary that there be an underlying knowledge of all of the differences
in the design and operating conditions. The development of best practices cannot occur where there is
not already a sound knowledge of engineering principles.
A frequent misuse of benchmarking is to consider it merely as a scorecard, that is to say, for looking
backward to measure past success or failure, rather than as a map to guide forward progress to achieve
goals and continue improvement.
E.3.3 Taxonomy level

Benchmarking can occur at the plant, process-unit, equipment-class, subunit or maintainable-item level.
Key performance indicators for each hierarchical level (see Figure 3) provide different information. If a
KPI set at one taxonomic level highlights a weakness, then the next lower taxonomy level of indicators
should give further definition and clarification to the causes of the weakness. Benchmarking initiatives
that rank plant or process-unit performance often look at relative levels of reliability, staffing,
utilization and operating cost. KPIs for hierarchies at the level of equipment class and below include
parameters that principally focus on the incidence of failure and repair. Where a “best practice” for
continuous improvement on a process unit can, for example, involve the implementation of reliability-
centred maintenance, the best practice at a lower hierarchy can be the implementation of more rigorous
design specifications, balance or grouting requirements, etc.
E.3.4 Choice of benchmarks

KPIs that together can measure overall reliability and maintenance effectiveness within this
International Standard are the following:
a) equipment-class, subunit and maintainable-item mean time to failure (MTTF, see definition in
Clause 3);
b) availability (see definition in Clause 3);
c) cost of production losses caused by unreliability and by maintenance activity;
d) direct costs (labour, contracts and materials) of maintenance work;
e) costs of maintenance support staff and of maintenance consumables;
f) ensure maintenance activities are executed according to plan.

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

E.3.5 Alignment of benchmark and KPIs across peer groups

It is important that all benchmarking contributors supply a complete set of key performance indicators
(KPIs) that are tied to the same frame of reference. To do this, the more successful benchmarking
initiatives are the following.
— Identify those elements that most affect the commercial success of the business.
— Employ generic terms for each element: the descriptions of boundaries and the collection of data
should be chosen in accordance with this International Standard.
— Provide sufficiently detailed definitions to promote and enable a consistent response by each
participant and ensure that all performance data apply to the same time frame.
E.3.6 Benefits of benchmarking

Benchmarking may be used to provide continuous improvement to key work-process elements of plant
maintenance and reliability including
a) strategy/leadership,
b) maintenance work management,
c) predictive and preventive maintenance,
d) computerized maintenance management information systems (CMMIS),
e) training,
f) materials management,
g) contractor management,
h) reliability improvement,
i) competitive technology/benchmarking.
Confidential industry benchmarking of the reliability and maintenance function has become an
essential tool for performance-improvement programmes. It has the primary objective of providing
companies with useable comparative data that, at a level of detail that is actionable, helps them focus on
credible opportunity targets to improve their performance.
To gain credibility and acceptance, it is necessary that these opportunity targets be seen as realistic,
that is, they are understood by, and credible to, those responsible for achieving them.
Users of this International Standard are cautioned against focusing on only one or two of the KPIs and
neglecting others.
E.3.7 Selection of peer groups
E.3.7.1 General
The selection of the peer group against which a participating plant compares its performance data is
important. If this peer-group selection is well made, personnel in the plant will have confidence that it
has the same performance opportunity as the better-performing plants in the group. Furthermore, use
of a suitable method of analysis of physical causal factors, of plant characteristics and of maintenance
practices within the group provides explanations of variations in performance that have greater
validity.
When a plant’s performance is seen to be poor compared with its peer group, the gap can be due both to
differences in the plant’s physical features (even within the same peer group) and also to differences in
the practices and organization of the site. The characteristics of both categories of causal factor should

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

be benchmarked using a suitable method of benchmarking, so that the relative weight of each can be
judged and realistic targets set.
E.3.7.2 Selection of peer groups
A peer group’s distinguishing factor is a feature of a plant that affects one or several aspects of
performance and is common and intrinsic to the group of plants and also that a plant cannot change in
the short/medium term.
The two peer-group distinguishing factors that have been found most significant in studies on reliability
and maintenance are
— process family: for reasons of equipment types, process severity (corrosivity, toxicity, etc.) and
maintenance complexity;
— geographic region: for reasons of prevailing labour hourly costs, employment and
contracting practices, safety and environment-protection norms, climate, management culture and
industrialization level of the region.
E.4 Examples of benchmarks and KPIs using RM data

There are a variety of benchmarks and KPIs available. Measurement of costs and failure rates provides
indications of trends in the effectiveness of maintenance and reliability programmes. KPIs can also be
used to gauge an organization’s adherence to programmes and procedures by recording compliance
with preventive or predictive schedules.
No single KPI provides the complete picture and it is, therefore, necessary to define a basket of KPIs
that together indicate progress and trends in the reliable operation of plant and equipment. Trends can
be shown over a period of time and can require some special attention to allow for periodical as well as
accumulative reporting, for example, “last-two-years average” in the latter case.
Table E.3 gives examples of KPIs that can be developed making use of RM or other reliability-related
data. For further information on the sources of reliability data, see D.5 and Table D.5. Other/more KPIs
can be useful depending on industry and application. In Table E.3, reference is made to the taxonomic
levels in Table 2. These are suggestions and in some cases KPIs can be rolled up to Level 3.
Table E.2 — Taxonomic levels

Main category T a x o n o m i c Taxonomic hierarchy Use/location
level
Use/location 1 Industry Type of main industry
2 Business category Type of business or processing stream
3 Installation category Type of facility
4 Plant/unit category Type of plant/unit
5 Section/system Main section/system of the plant
Equipment sub- 6 Equipment (class/unit) Class of similar equipment units. Each equipment class
division contains similar pieces of equipment (e.g. compressors).
7 Subunit A subsystem necessary for the equipment unit to function.
8 Component/maintaina- The group of parts of the equipment unit that are
ble item commonly maintained (repaired/restored) as a whole
9 Part a A single piece of equipment
a While this level may be useful in some cases, it is considered optional in this International Standard.

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Table E.3 — Examples of KPIs a

KPI Relevant Units Explanation and calculation Purpose and Involved
taxonomic value personnel
levels b
1) METBF 6 to 8 Time (hours, Indicates the average time Indication of Equipment
days, weeks, between failure for compo- increasing or de- subject-mat-
Mean
months, years) nents, equipment or units. creasing reliability ter experts
elapsed time
of components, (SMEs)
between For different Definition of failure is given
equipment or
failures classes or types in Clause 3 (general) and Reliability en-
unit/plant
of equipment Annex F (safety equipment). gineers (REs)
Trends are Use of METBF implies that Middle man-
shown over a down time/repair is included. agement (MM)
period of time
Guidelines for calculating Inspection
METBF (and MTTF) are given
in Annex C.
2) MTTF 6 to 8 As above Is similar to METBF, but does As above As above
not take into account the
Mean time Note that MTTF,
down time/repair time.
to failure in principle,
METBF is the sum of MTTRes concerns only the
and MTTF. first time to fail-
ure of a new item
MTTF equals the reciprocal
before any mainte-
of the failure rate.
nance task has
been performed
3) MTBR 6 to 8 Time (hours, Indicates the average time Indication of SMEs
days, weeks, between repairs for compo- increasing or de-
Mean time REs
months, years) nents, equipment or units. creasing reliability
between
of components or MM
repairs For different Although a failure typically
equipment within
classes or types results in a repair, this is Maintenance
a plant/unit
of equipment not always the case. Repairs
(e.g. major overhauls) can be Inspection
Trends are
undertaken on a time basis
shown over a
independent of failure.
period of time
Calculation based on total
time between repairs di-
vided by number of repairs
over a specified time period
or to date.
For subsea equipment, one
may rename the KPI to
“Mean time between inter-
ventions” (MTBI).
a Other/more KPIs can be useful depending on industry and application.
b See Table E.2.
c CM is sometimes used as an abbreviation for corrective maintenance, but in this document CM refers to Condition
monitoring

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Table E.3 (continued)

levels b
4) Mean 6 to 8 Time usually in The time taken to perform Indication of the SMEs
active repair hours or days. the repair of a component, productivity and
REs
time (MART) equipment, system or unit. work content of
For different
repair activities Maintenance
classes or types It is necessary that MART
of equipment follows the timeline princi-
ples given in Figure 4, and
Trends are
also ISO/TR 12489:2013,
shown over a
Figure 5 to 7.
period of time
One may introduce MDT
(Mean down time) if it is also
of interest to monitor the
preparation and delay times,
but such a KPI is not explicit-
ly included in this table.
5) Mean 6 to 8 Time usually in The time taken to prepare Indication of the SMEs
overall re- hours or days. and perform the repair of productivity and
REs
pairing time a component, equipment, work content of
For different
(MRT) system or unit. repair activities Maintenance
classes or types
of equipment It is necessary that MRT fol-
lows the timeline principles
Trends are
given in Figure 4, and also
shown over a
ISO/TR 12489:2013, Figure
period of time
5 to 7.
One may introduce MDT
(Mean down time) if it is also
of interest to monitor the
preparation and delay times,
but such a KPI is not explicit-
ly included in this table.
6) Worst 6 to 9 List of equip- Clear definition of which Provides focus As above
actors ment failure types are covered is for reliability
necessary (see Annex C). management and
List of List of frequent
root cause failure
frequently failure modes List of most frequently failed
analysis (RCA)
failed equip- equipment can also be gener-
Frequency of
ment ated by frequency of repairs. Product/quality
failure
development
List can also be used for
sub-supplier reliably man-
agement follow-up.
Restructure as to plant
impact.
b See Table E.2.
monitoring

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)


levels b
7) AO 6 % time Normally on equipment-unit Shows trend in SME
available for level. equipment avail-
Operational REs
operation of ability when both
availability
the equip- corrective and MM
ment when all preventive mainte-
maintenance nance is covered Operations
(corrective and
Input for produc- Maintenance
preventive) is
tion planning (see Inspection
included in the
C.2.3)
down time
8) AT 6 % time Normally on equipment-unit The key techni- SMEs
available for level. cal-availability
Technical REs
operation of indicator
availability
the equipment MM
Shows trend in
when correc-
equipment availa- Operations
tive mainte-
bility focusing on
nance only is
intrinsic reliability Maintenance
included in the
(see C.2.3) Inspection
down time
9) Safety 4 to 6 % of safety Top Quartile: 100%. Ensure all Safety Asset Manager
critical ele- critical equip- Critical Elements
Tracked Annually. Operations
ments with ment with as- requiring assur-
assurance surance tasks ance tasks have Maintenance
tasks in in the CMMS. them assigned in
CMMS the CMMS.
10) Safe- 4 to 6 % of Planned Top Quartile >98%. Measure safety Asset manager
ty critical Maintenance critical element
Tracked Monthly. Operations
element WOs for safety planned mainte-
planned critical equip- nance work com- Maintenance
maintenance ment outstand- pleted before last
compliance ing after the approved finished
(not beyond last scheduled date
latest allow- finish date.
able finish
date)
11) Safety 4 to 6 % of Corrective Top Quartile >98%. Measure safety Asset Manager
Critical Maintenance critical element
Tracked monthly Operations
Element WOs for safety corrective main-
Corrective critical equip- tenance work Maintenance
Maintenance ment outstand- completed before
compliance ing after the last approved
(not beyond last scheduled finished date
Latest finish date..
Allowable
Finish Date)
12) Preven- 4 to 6 % of total Total PM work order (WO) Indication of SMEs
tive mainte- maintenance man-hours divided by total amount of proac-
REs
nance (PM) man-hours WO man-hours, by equip- tive preventive
man-hours spent on PM ment classification or types. maintenance work Operations
ratio (not including
modifications) Maintenance
b See Table E.2.
monitoring

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)


levels b
13) Cor- 4 to 6 % of total main- Total corrective mainte- Indication of SMEs
rective tenance man- nance WO man-hours divid- amount of correc-
REs
maintenance hours spent ed by total WO man-hours, tive maintenance
c man-hours on corrective by equipment classification work Operations
ratio maintenance or types.
Maintenance
14) Overdue 4 to 6 Number of as- Top Quartile: 0 per Plant/Unit Check Safety Criti- Asset Manager
Assurance surance tasks cal Elements work
Tracked monthly. Operations
or Safety for safety crit- orders are not
Critical work ical equipment being rescheduled Maintenance
orders on that is beyond without appro-
Safety Criti- the Last Al- priate Technical
cal Elements lowable Finish approval.
without Date without
Technical Au- technical au-
thority (TA) thorisation.
approval
15) PMs 4 to 6 Number or % of Count of outstanding PM WOs Indication of Operations
overdue PM WOs over- by equipment classification outstanding PM
Maintenance
due by category or as a % of total PM WOs. backlog
One may also select only safe-
ty-critical equipment or pro-
duction-critical equipment to
differentiate into groups.
16) Predic- 4 to 6 Number or % Define which predic- Condition monitor- SMEs
tive mainte- PdM data col- tive-maintenance activities ing management
REs
nance (PdM) lection activi- to cover, individually or all.
complete ties completed Operations
For example, number of data
Completion points, routes or equipment Maintenance
of predictive that have PdM NDT data
maintenance collection carried out divided Inspection
(e.g. inspec- by total data points, routes or
tions, test- equipment, over a specified
ing, periodic period of time.
condition
(Vibration analysis data,
monitoring)
thickness readings, infrared
scans, motor performance
analysis).
17) Predic- 4 to 6 Number or % Define which predictive Indicates backlog SMEs
tive mainte- overdue predic- maintenance activities to of PdM type of ac-
REs
nance (PdM) tive mainte- cover, individually or all. tivities, e.g. NDT
overdue nance (PdM) Operations
Count or % of PdM NDT data
activities
points, routes or equipment Maintenance
that are outstanding over a
specified time period of time. Inspection
18) Cor- 4 to 6 Number of Top Quartile < 6 man weeks. Ensure number of Asset Manager
rective hours work hours of corrective
maintenance recorded for maintenance is
workload corrective under control. Maintenance
maintenance.
b See Table E.2.
monitoring

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)


levels b
19) Schedule 4 to 6 % of sched- Top Quartile >98%. Increase compli- Asset Manager
compliance uled total ance with weekly
maintenance schedule.
man-hours Maintenance
completed over
a rolling three
month period.
20) Un- 4 to 6 % of main- Top Quartile <2%. Ensure work is Asset Manager
scheduled/ tenance being scheduled
fill-in work man-hours and the resulting
consisting of plan adhered to. Maintenance
unscheduled/
fill in work over
a rolling three
month period.
21) Turn- 4 Time, usually in It is necessary to include run- Maintenance Operations
around days down and start-up in connec- planning
Maintenance
duration tion with turnarounds.
Modification op-
Prolonged turnarounds due portunities
to modifications may be
Outage planning
separated out in order not
to disturb comparison with Production plan-
year-to-year requirements ning
for major maintenance.
22) Time 4 to 5 Measured on Time between turnarounds. As above As above
between annual basis
turnarounds (number of
months, years)
23) Main- 4 to 6 % difference Top Quartile +/- 5%. Ensure historical Asset Manager
tenance between data is used in esti-
estimating planned and ac- mating (durations)
accuracy – tual man-hours Maintenance
hours for planned and
corrective WOs
24) Main- 4 to 6 % difference Top Quartile +/- 5%. Ensure historical Asset Manager
tenance between data is used in es-
estimating planned and timating (costs)
accuracy – actual costs for Maintenance
cost planned and
corrective WOs.
25) Repair 6 % of repairs Number of WOs that are Indication of work REs
rework ratio where rework reworked divided by total quality and pro-
Operations
is required fol- number of WOs. ductivity
lowing repair Maintenance
Classified by equipment type.
May be split into preventive
and corrective maintenance.
b See Table E.2.
monitoring

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)


levels b
26) CMMS 4 to 6 Time between Top Quartile 24 hours. Ensure history is Maintenance
Confirmed work com- written within a
Tracked monthly.
to Technical pletion and reasonable time
Completion technical close from the end of the
time out of the work activity (typically
order. with 72 hours).
27) Average 6 to 8 Time, usually in The time taken from when Repair manage- Maintenance
repair work- hours or days failed item is received at ment
shop cycle repair shop until it is ready
time for use again
28) Generic 4 to 6 % of material Top Quartile <10%. Ensure the Mate- Asset Manager
material items issued rial Catalogue is
ordering that are iden- complete.
tified in the Maintenance
CMMS.
29) Materi- 4 to 6 % of materials Top Quartile >95%. Reduce delays Asset Manager
als achieving delivered to to corrective
original site in com- and preventive
Required on pliance with work caused by Maintenance
Site (RoS) the original unavailability of
date required on materials.
site date.
30) Inven- 4 to 6 % of materials Top Quartile +/- 5%. Ensure commonly Asset Manager
tory service required for used materials
level maintenance for maintenance
satisfied from activities are held Maintenance
stock. in stock to reduce
time waiting for
materials.
31) Total 4 to 6 Per plant, Total cost for both corrective Trend analysis over Plant manage-
maintenance section or and preventive maintenance a period of time ment
cost equipment for including spare parts.
Operations
a given period
Does not include costs relat-
(e.g. annually) Maintenance
ed to down time with respect
to lost production.
b See Table E.2.
monitoring

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)


levels b
32) Mainte- 4 % of main- Top Quartile >50%. Non-value added Asset Manager
nance pro- tenance time is recorded
ductivity man-hours and there is a
consumed by focus on reducing Maintenance
non-productive or eliminating
activities, e.g. non-value added
awaiting mate- time.
rials, etc.
33) Cost of 4 to 6 Cost by differ- The cost of repair to equip- Trend in repair As above
repairs per ent equipment ment as represented by the cost over a period
work order types for vari- costs collected against equip- of time
ous geograph- ment work orders. Typically,
Identification of
ical locations, it includes labour (company
worst actors by
units or plants. and/or contract), materials
repair cost and/or
and equipment hire. Over-
equipment type
head can also be included.
34) Failure 6 Ratio Equipment subject to such Average unavail- Regulatory
fraction (see potential safety critical ability (PFDavg) Authorities
F.2.4, and failures can be identified due to dangerous
Asset manager
also ISO/TR within a plant and moni- undetected fail-
12489:2013, tored, and the ratio between ures is established Operations
3.2.4). the number of safety critical by using test
failures detected by periodic reports. Maintenance
tests and the corresponding
This common in-
number of tests performed.
dustry practice for
Tracked annually. several countries.
b See Table E.2.
monitoring

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Annex F
(informative)
Classification and definition of safety critical failures
F.1 General
The purpose of this Annex is to make the user of this International Standard aware of some specific
definitions and classifications applied for safety critical equipment. IEC has developed the functional
safety standards IEC 61508:2010 (all parts) and IEC 61511:2016 (all parts), which have been
implemented by many industries including the natural gas, petroleum and petrochemical industries.
The general principles described in IEC 61508:2010 (all parts) and IEC 61511:2016 (all parts) have been
further developed by national initiatives into guidelines and analysing methods for use in the petroleum
industry, for example in (The Norwegian Oil and Gas Association, 2016).
ISO/TR 12489:2013 provides guidance to reliability modelling and calculation of safety systems and is
an essential document when equipment reliability data covered by this standard is used. An overview
is given in F.2.
As part of this overall purpose, a recommended list of failure definitions for some safety systems and
components is given in Table F.1.
F.2 Reliability modelling and calculation of safety systems

ISO/TR 12489:2013 provides guidelines to reliability engineers who deal with probabilistic approaches,
which, in association with qualitative considerations, are increasingly used to design reliable safety
systems. This is encouraged by regulations (e.g. SEVESO III directive, 2012) or widely recognized
standards (e.g. the SIL approach recommended for safety instrumented systems by the IEC 61508:2010
mother standard and the sectorial derived standard like IEC 61511:2016 (all parts) which is focused on
process systems). This implies to meet various probability related requirements, but these probabilistic
matters are currently rather briefly documented in standards, and not satisfactorily addressed
in reliability textbooks. Therefore, ISO/TR 12489:2013 aims at closing this gap by establishing a
sound specific probabilistic background, helping the reliability engineers to properly deal with the
probabilistic modelling and calculations of any type of safety systems (e.g. ESD, High Integrity Pressure
Protection System, etc.). After gathering the relevant definitions and raising the typical difficulties, the
technical report explains in detail how to solve them. It analyses in detail how simplified formulae can
be established for simple safety systems and how the common standardized models - reliability block
diagrams (IEC 61078:2016), fault trees (IEC 61025:2006), Markovian approach (IEC 61165:2006) and
Petri nets (IEC 62551:2012) - may be used to deal with more complex situations. Moreover, ISO/TR
12489:2013 develops in detail the approaches mentioned in the IEC 61508:2010, part 6, Annex B, for
SIL related calculations. It also provides guidelines about the multiple safety systems mentioned in
Annex A in ISO/TR 12489:2013 provides a list of 31 systems with safety function, and also lists the
associated equipment classes in this International Standard, which are of relevance for collection or
estimation of reliability data when analysing such systems.
Annex D.5 provides a classification of reliability data sources for use when analysing such systems, but
the classification is also useful for reliability data collection and exchange in general.

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

F.3 Classification of failures of safety instrumented systems

F.3.1 General definitions
Safety Instrumented Systems (SIS) can have great influence on a plant’s safety and integrity, and failure
of these systems is, therefore, dealt with in a more dedicated way than for other equipment. As these
systems are frequently “dormant” in normal use and expected to function when called upon, it is of the
utmost importance to reveal any hidden failure before the function is called upon.
Further, it is also of prime interest to know the consequences of a failure of these systems with regard
to impact on safety.
Some general commonly used terms in this area are listed below with reference to where the definitions
can be found:
— Dangerous failure (see ISO/TR 12489:2013, 3.2.3). These failures impede a given safety action.
— Safe failure (see ISO/TR 12489:2013, 3.2.5). These failures favour a given safety action.
— No-effect failures are failures that have no impact on safety.
— Intrinsically fail safe systems; systems based on a design which favour the safe failures and for
which the probability of dangerous failures is negligible.
— Non-intrinsically fail safe system; systems where the probability of dangerous failures is not
negligible.
— Immediately revealed failures (see ISO/TR 12489:2013, 3.2.10).
— Hidden failures (see ISO/TR 12489:2013, 3.2.11). These failures may be detected by e.g. periodic tests.
F.3.2 SIS failure mode classification in reliability data collection and analysis
IEC 61508:2010 (all parts) introduces a failure classification that is adapted to SIS. Here the failures are
first divided into the two categories:
— random failures (see also definition in 3.79);
— systematic failures (see also definition in 3.90).
The random failures of components are in IEC 61508:2010 further categorized into these failure
mode groups:
— dangerous detected (DD);
— dangerous undetected (DU);
— safe detected (SD);
— safe undetected (SU).
Collected reliability data may not contain historic failure mode events within all these four categories,
and this will require caution and assumption when establishing failure rates for such “zero failure
history”. The physical equipment behaviour with respect to the failure modes that apply for a certain
component is also vital to understand, to ensure proper allocation of failure data onto these four
categories, whereof some perhaps need to be zero.
When collecting reliability data for SIS, two topics should be emphasised:
— common cause failures (see C.1.6 and ISO/TR 12489:2013, 3.2.14)
— test interval (periodic) for identifying dangerous undetected (DU) failures

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

When a safety/reliability study is performed as described in IEC 61508:2010 (all parts), it is important

that the relevant failure modes are classified as DD, DU, SD or SU. See also Table 5 with respect to
an information field to allow such data collection on a specific installation. Table B.15 indicates also
the demand related failure modes covered by Annex B for the equipment classes covered therein.
This supports the applicability of this International Standard to the specific analyses as described in
Some of the collected common cause failures can be systematic failures, and would thus not be
categorized as part of the random failure mode groups DU/DD/SD/SU above. Classification of systematic
failures is also reflected in ISO/TR 12489:2013, Figure B.5. See also B.2.3.2 in this International
Standard.
When recording and/or analysing failures for SIS, it is recommended to consult IEC 61508:2010 (all
parts), IEC 61511:2016 (all parts), ISO/TR 12489:2013, and additional national guidelines as deemed
relevant.
F.3.3 Downtime issues related to SIS reliability data collection and analysis
Downtime issues are important in reliability data collection and analysis of SIS. ISO/TR 12489:2013,
Figures 5 to 7 provide definitions and guidance on such matters, but some specific remarks are
given below.
Clause 3 defines the terms “mean overall repairing time (MRT)”, related to the repairs of failures after
they have been detected. Another used term is “mean time to restoration (MTTRes)”, which includes
both the fault detection and the repair times.
In any case, MTTRes = MFDT + MRT. The “mean fault detection time” (MFDT) of the dangerous detected
failures (e.g. detected by diagnostic tests) is generally negligible compared to the MRT, and it is
reasonable to assume that MTTRes and MRT have the same numerical values for dangerous detected
failures.
F.4 Definition of failures for safety systems

F.4.1 General
Risk management of safety systems does also require equipment reliability management and associated
data collection. The use by operators of the standard definitions given in Table F.1 would facilitate
comparison and benchmarking to enhance safety levels in the industry. Undetected failures are
typically called safety critical failures for safety function and such reporting practices exists involving
regulator.
According to ISO/TR 12489:2013. 3.2.4, the dangerous failures that disable a Safety Instrumented
Function (SIF) are labelled safety critical failures with regards to this SIF. The safety critical failures can
be identified within a plant and monitored, and the ratio between the number of safety critical failures
detected by periodic tests and the corresponding number of tests performed (commonly called “ failure
fraction”) is being used for that purpose. This indicator is the instantaneous unavailability (see ISO/TR
12489:2013, 3.1.11) at the time of the test, and it is a conservative estimate of the average unavailability
(PFDavg) (see ISO/TR 12489:2013, 3.1.14). It is thus important not to mix the “failure fraction” with
other reliability terms, such as e.g. the term “safe failure fraction” (see IEC 61508-4:2010, 3.6.15).
In this context it should be noted that the term “critical” has not the same meaning in ISO/TR 12489:2013
and in this International Standard:
— This International Standard: The term “critical” is related to the failure impact of a failure on an
equipment function(s) or on the plant (see 3.28). On the equipment level (taxonomy level 6, and

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

also underlying level), “critical” is one of the three failure impact classes (critical, degraded and
incipient). Thus, this term here is related to the degree of the failure itself.
— The non-critical failures are the degraded + incipient failures as defined by this International
Standard.
— ISO/TR 12489:2013: The term “critical” is related to the effect of the failure on the safety function.
It characterizes a failure completely disabling a safety instrumented function.
— In the context of functional safety, the non-critical failures are those which do not disable the
related SIF.
Let us consider a SIF implementing two redundant equipment items A and B:
— according to this International Standard, the dangerous failure of item A can be critical, degraded
or incipient independently of the state of item B;
— according to ISO/TR 12489:2013, the dangerous failure of item A is critical only if
— it is critical according to this International Standard and
— item B already has had a dangerous critical failure according to this International Standard.
Therefore, due to the above issues, the term critical and non-critical failures will thus require caution.
The analyst needs to carefully consider which failure modes of the equipment are relevant with regards
to the reliability analysis of the safety function. In this context the relevant items within the equipment
boundary necessary for the safety function needs to be covered (i.e. detection, decision and action).
F.4.2 Recommended definitions

The list below provides recommended definitions where also technical and operational criteria for
failure modes are given. The applicable failure modes are shown as elsewhere listed in Table B.15.
Note that the Table F.1 contains failures revealed during testing. Note that Table 5 mentions operational
and test activation.

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Table F.1 — Recommended definitions of failures for some safety systems/components

(revealed during testing)
System/ Equipment class Recommended failure definitions Applicable failure
component modes a,c,g
1. Fire detection Fire and gas detec- Detector
(smoke, flame, heat) tors b
Fire and gas logic does not receive signal from
detector, when detector is tested. NOO, LOO, FTF
2. Fire detection Input devices b Manual call point
(manual call point)
Fire and gas logic does not receive a signal from
the pushbutton when activated. NOO, LOO, FTF
3. Gas detection Fire and gas detec- Detector (catalytic, optical point, H2S and H2)
tors b
Fire and gas logic does not receive signal equiv-
alent to upper alarm limit when testing with
prescribed test gas. NOO, LOO, FTF
Detector (optical line)
Fire and gas logic does not receive signal equiv-
alent to upper alarm limit when testing with
prescribed test filter. NOO, LOO, FTF
Detector (acoustic)
Fire and gas logic does not receive signal
when tested. NOO, LOO, FTF
4. Active fire pro- Valves b Deluge valve
tection (deluge)
Deluge valve fails to open when tested. FTO, DOP
Nozzles Nozzle
More than 3 % of the nozzles are plugged/
choked.
Failures are reported per skid/loop. PLU
5. Active fire pro- Pumps b Function
tection (fire-fight-
Fire-fighting pump fails to start upon signal. FTS
ing pump)
Capacity
Fire-fighting pump delivers less than 90 % of
design capacity. LOO
6. Active fire pro- Valves b Function
tection (gaseous
Release valve fails to open upon test.
agent /Inergen)
Valve does not open on signal or agent pressure/
level is below specified minimum. FTO
7. Active fire pro- Valves b Function
tection (water mist)
Release valve fails to open upon test.
The system pressure upstream release valve
is not within specified value or nozzle does not
function properly. FTO
8. Active fire pro- Fire-fighting Function
tection (fire-fight- equipment
Water/foam does not reach fire area upon test.
ing foam) FTO, DOP, FTS
9. Active fire pro- Valves The valve does not open on test.
tection (Sprinkler
valve) FTO

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Table F.1 (continued)

10. Active fire pro- Fire-fighting The monitor does not operate/ oscillate, and/or
tection (Fire water equipment does not deliver water/foam to defined target
monitor – remotely area with expected amount
operating/ oscillat-
ing function) FTF
11. Active fire pro- Valves The valve does not open on signal.
tection (Fire water
monitor valve
(actuated)) FTO
12. Depressuriza- Valves b Valve
tion valves (blow-
Valve fails to open upon signal or within speci-
down)
fied time limit. FTO, DOP
13. PA system Emergency com- Loudspeaker announcement or sirens do not
(loudspeakers), munication sound, or signal light not activated in prescribed
sirens and signal area upon signal.
lights FTF
14. Blowout pre- Subsea BOP, Sur- Function
venters (BOP) face BOP
Valve fails to close upon signal or within a spec-
ified time limit. FTC, DOP
Leakage
Internal leakage higher than specified value at
first test. LCP
15. ESD (sectioning Valves b Function
valves defined as
safety-critical)
Leakage
Internal leakage higher than specified value. LCP
16. ESD (well isola- Subsea wellhead Function
tion) and X-mas tree.
Surface wellhead ified time limit. FTC, DOP
and X-mas tree b Leakage
Internal leakage higher than specified value at
first test. LCP
17. ESD (downhole DHSV b Function
safety valve)
Leakage f
18. Annulus safety Well completion Function
valve (ASV)
Leakage

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)


19. Gas lift valves Well completion Function
(GLV) h
Leakage
20. ESD (riser) Valves b Function
Leakage
21. ESD (push Input devices b Function
button)
The ESD logic does not receive a signal from the
push button when activated. NOO, LOO, FTF
22. ESD (electric Switchgear b The breaker does not open on demand ensuring
isolation/ISC) disconnection of electrical distribution boards
and/or main consumers (drives). FTO, FTF
23. Process safety Valves b Function
(sectioning valves)
ified time. FTC, DOP, LCP
24. Process safety Valves Function
(PSV)
Valve fails to open at the lesser of 120 % of set
pressure or at 5 MPa (50 bar) above set pressure. FTO
25. PSD (Non-re- Valves The valve has a higher internal leakage rate
turn valve, safety than the specified acceptance criterion
critical, leakage) LCP
26. PSD ( HIPPS Valves b Valve does not move to predefined safe position
valve, function) on signal within the specified permitted time FTO, FTC, DOP
27. PSD (HIPPS Valves b Valve has a higher internal leakage rate than the
valve) d specified acceptance criterion LCP, DOP
28. Input devices Input devices b Function
(pressure, temper-
Sensor does not give signal or gives erroneous
ature, level, flow,
signal (exceeding predefined acceptance limits).
etc.) NOO, ERO, LOO, HIO
29. Emergency Electric genera- Function
power (emergency tors b
Emergency generator fails to start or gives
generator)
wrong voltage upon start. FTS, LOO
30. Emergency Uninterruptible Function
power (central UPS power supply b
Battery capacity too low.
for SIS) LOC
31. Emergency Uninterruptible Function
power (UPS for power supply b
Battery capacity too low.
emergency lighting)
For emergency lights: When one or more emer-
gency lights within one area or circuit fails to
provide lighting for minimum 30 min. LOC
32. Fire damper e Fire-fighting Function
equipment b
Damper fails to close upon signal FTO, DOP, FTS, FTC

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)


33. Natural venti- HVAC b Function
lation and HVAC:
The safety trip/alarm logic does not receive
HVAC transmitters
a signal from the sensor when the measured
(air flow or pres-
process parameter is outside of the set point
sure differential),
limit, or sensor output signal deviates from true
safety related
air flow or pressure conditions (margins unless
specified otherwise, +/- 5 %). FTF
34. Natural venti- HVAC b Function
lation and HVAC:
The safety trip/alarm logic does not receive
HVAC switches (air
a signal from the sensor when the measured
flow or pressure
process parameter is outside of the set point
differential) safety
limit, or sensor output signal deviates from true
related
air flow or pressure conditions (margins unless
specified otherwise, +/- 5 %). FTF
35. Ballast system Valves b Function
(valves)
Valve fails to operate on signal. FTO, FTC, DOP
36. Ballast system Pumps b Function
(pumps)
Pump fails to start/stop on signal. FTS
37. Watertight Evacuation, escape The door does not close and latch on signal or
doors, closure and rescue the door gasket is not intact. FTF
38. Watertight Fire-fighting The damper does not close on signal.
damper (e.g. but- equipment b
terfly valve) FTC, DOP
39. Escape, evac- Lifeboats Lifeboat engines does not start on test
uation and rescue
(EER): Lifeboat
engine, start FTS
40. Escape, evac- Lifeboats Release function for lifeboat does not work on
uation and rescue test.
(EER): Lifeboat
free fall release
function FTF

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)


41. Escape, evac- Evacuation, escape Release/ lowering function for escape chute
uation and rescue and rescue does not work on test.
(EER): Escape chute
release function FTF
42. Escape, evac- Evacuation, escape MOB-boat engine does not start when operated.
uation and rescue and rescue
(EER): MOB-boat
engine, start FTS
a See Tables B.6 to B.14, and B.15 especially for definitions of abbreviations.
b IEC 61508:2010 (all parts) and/or IEC 61511:2016 (all parts) is/are applicable.
c Failures can occur upon any demand (both upon test demand as well as upon actual demand).
d Leakage; when safe state is closed (valve) and specific safety related leakage rates are specified
e Including related HVAC fans where relevant
f Leakage testing of DHSV/SCSSV is performed either by:
• observing and monitoring the pressure build-up in a void/cavity downstream of the valve closing mech-
anism during the test observation period
• by direct measurement of the observed leak rate across the closing mechanism
The method used to establish the leak rate should be documented (pressure vs. time relationship or direct
measurement). The initial leak rate is the one that should be reported, since the flow rate will be gradually reduced
as the pressure below/above the closing mechanism equalizes.
g The failure mode INL (Internal leakage) is meant to be internal leakage of utility fluids and needs not be
mixed with the failure mode LCP (Leakage in closed position) which involves hydrocarbon leakage through the
valve orifice. In case of fail-safe design, INL is not relevant in this table as it will not lead to dangerous failures.
h If the gas lift valve acts as a barrier and thus have a barrier function.

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

Bibliography
[1] ISO 2314:2009, Gas turbines — Acceptance tests

[2] ISO 3977 (all parts), Gas turbines — Procurement
[3] ISO 5208:2015, Industrial valves — Pressure testing of metallic valves
[4] ISO 8528-1, Reciprocating internal combustion engine driven alternating current generating sets —
Part 1: Application, ratings and performance
[5] ISO 8528-2, Reciprocating internal combustion engine driven alternating current generating
sets — Part 2: Engines
sets — Part 3: Alternating current generators for generating sets
sets — Part 4: Controlgear and switchgear
sets — Part 5: Generating sets
sets — Part 6: Test methods
[10] ISO 8528-7, Reciprocating internal combustion engine driven alternating current generating sets —
Part 7: Technical declarations for specification and design
sets — Part 8: Requirements and tests for low-power generating sets
[12] ISO 8528-9, Reciprocating internal combustion engine driven alternating current generating sets
— Part 9: Measurement and evaluation of mechanical vibrations
sets — Part 10: Measurement of airborne noise by the enveloping surface method
sets — Part 12: Emergency power supply to safety services
[15] ISO 10417:2004, Petroleum and natural gas industries — Subsurface safety valve systems — Design,
installation, operation and redress
[16] ISO 10418:1/Cor 1:2008, Petroleum and natural gas industries — Offshore production
installations — Analysis, design, installation and testing of basic surface process safety systems /
Technical Corrigendum 1
[17] ISO 10423:2009, Petroleum and natural gas industries — Drilling and production equipment —
Wellhead and christmas tree equipment
[18] ISO 10432:2004, Petroleum and natural gas industries — Downhole equipment — Subsurface
safety valve equipment
[19] ISO 10437:2003, Petroleum, petrochemical and natural gas industries — Steam turbines — Special-
purpose applications
[20] ISO 10439-1:2015, Petroleum, petrochemical and natural gas industries — Axial and centrifugal
compressors and expander-compressors — Part 1: General requirements

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

compressors and expander-compressors — Part 2: Non-integrally geared centrifugal and axial
compressors
compressors and expander-compressors — Part 3: Integrally geared centrifugal compressors
compressors and expander-compressors — Part 4: Expander-compressors
[24] ISO 10442:2002, Petroleum, chemical and gas service industries — Packaged, integrally geared
centrifugal air compressors
[25] ISO 11960:2014, Petroleum and natural gas industries — Steel pipes for use as casing or tubing
for wells
[26] ISO 11961:2008, Petroleum and natural gas industries — Steel drill pipe
[27] ISO 12211:2012, Petroleum, petrochemical and natural gas industries — Spiral plate heat
exchangers
[28] ISO 12212:2012, Petroleum, petrochemical and natural gas industries — Hairpin-type heat
exchangers
[29] ISO/TR 12489:2013, Petroleum, petrochemical and natural gas industries — Reliability modelling
and calculation of safety systems
[30] ISO/PAS 12835:2013, Qualification of casing connections for thermal wells
[31] ISO 13053 (all parts):2011, Quantitative methods in process improvement — Six Sigma
[32] ISO 13354:2014, Petroleum and natural gas industries — Drilling and production equipment —
Shallow gas diverter equipment
[33] ISO 13623:2009, Petroleum and natural gas industries — Pipeline transportation systems
[34] ISO 13624-1:2009, Petroleum and natural gas industries — Drilling and production equipment —
Part 1: Design and operation of marine drilling riser equipment
[35] ISO 13628-1:2005, Petroleum and natural gas industries — Design and operation of subsea
production systems -- Part 1: General requirements and recommendations
production systems — Part 4: Subsea wellhead and tree equipment
production systems — Part 5: Subsea umbilicals
production systems — Part 7: Completion/workover riser systems
production systems — Part 15: Subsea structures and manifolds
[40] ISO 13631:2002, Petroleum and natural gas industries — Packaged reciprocating gas compressors
[41] ISO 13679:2002, Petroleum and natural gas industries — Procedures for testing casing and tubing
connections
[42] ISO 13702:2015, Petroleum and natural gas industries — Control and mitigation of fires and
explosions on offshore production installations — Requirements and guidelines

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

[43] ISO 13703:2000, Petroleum and natural gas industries — Design and installation of piping systems
on offshore production platforms
[44] ISO 13706:2011, Petroleum, petrochemical and natural gas industries — Air-cooled heat exchangers
[45] ISO 13707:2000, Petroleum and natural gas industries — Reciprocating compressors
[46] ISO 13709:2009, Centrifugal pumps for petroleum, petrochemical and natural gas industries
[47] ISO 13710:2004, Petroleum, petrochemical and natural gas industries — Reciprocating positive
displacement pumps
[48] ISO 14001, Environmental management systems — Requirements with guidance for use
[49] ISO 14310:2008, Petroleum and natural gas industries — Downhole equipment — Packers and
bridge plugs
[50] ISO 14313:2007, Petroleum and natural gas industries — Pipeline transportation systems —
Pipeline valves
Subsea pipeline valves
[52] ISO 14998:2013, Petroleum and natural gas industries — Downhole equipment — Completion
accessories
[53] ISO 15136-1:2009, Petroleum and natural gas industries — Progressing cavity pump systems for
artificial lift — Part 1: Pumps
[54] ISO 15138:2007, Petroleum and natural gas industries — Offshore production installations —
Heating, ventilation and air-conditioning
[55] ISO 15544:2000, Petroleum and natural gas industries — Offshore production installations —
Requirements and guidelines for emergency response
[56] ISO 15547-1:2005, Petroleum, petrochemical and natural gas industries — Plate-type heat
exchangers — Part 1: Plate-and-frame heat exchangers
[57] ISO 15547-2:2005, Petroleum, petrochemical and natural gas industries — Plate-type heat
exchangers — Part 2: Brazed aluminium plate-fin heat exchangers
[58] ISO 15551-1:2015, Petroleum and natural gas industries — Drilling and production equipment —
Part 1: Electric submersible pump systems for artificial lift
[59] ISO 15649:2001, Petroleum and natural gas industries — Piping
[60] ISO 15663-1:2000, Petroleum and natural gas industries — Life cycle costing — Part 1: Methodology
[61] ISO 15663-2:2001, Petroleum and natural gas industries — Life-cycle costing — Part 2: Guidance
on application of methodology and calculation methods
[62] ISO 15663-3:2001, Petroleum and natural gas industries — Life-cycle costing — Part 3:
Implementation guidelines
[63] ISO 15926 (all parts), Industrial automation systems and integration — Integration of life-cycle
data for process plants including oil and gas production facilities
[64] ISO 16070:2005, Petroleum and natural gas industries — Downhole equipment — Lock mandrels
and landing nipples

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

[65] ISO 16530-1:—1), Petroleum and natural gas industries — Well integrity — Part 1: Life cycle
governance
Reliability-based limit state methods
[67] ISO 16812:2007, Petroleum, petrochemical and natural gas industries — Shell-and-tube heat
exchangers
[68] ISO 16904:2016, Petroleum and natural gas industries — Design and testing of LNG marine transfer
arms for conventional onshore terminals
[69] ISO 17776:20002), Petroleum and natural gas industries — Offshore production installations —
Guidelines on tools and techniques for hazard identification and risk assessment
[70] ISO 19008:2016, Standard cost coding system for oil and gas production and processing facilities
[71] ISO 19900:2013, Petroleum and natural gas industries — General requirements for offshore
structures
[72] ISO 19901-7:2013, Petroleum and natural gas industries — Specific requirements for offshore
structures — Part 7: Stationkeeping systems for floating offshore structures and mobile offshore units
[73] ISO 25457:2008, Petroleum, petrochemical and natural gas industries — Flare details for general
refinery and petrochemical service
[74] ISO 28300:2008, Petroleum, petrochemical and natural gas industries — Venting of atmospheric
and low-pressure storage tanks
[75] ISO 28460:2010, Petroleum and natural gas industries — Installation and equipment for liquefied
natural gas — Ship-to-shore interface and port operations
[76] ISO 31000:2009, Risk management — Principles and guidelines
[77] IEC 31010:2009, Risk management — Risk assessment techniques
[78] IEC 60034-1:2004, Rotating electrical machines — Part 1: Rating and performance
[79] IEC 60034-12:2002, Rotating electrical machines — Part 12: Starting performance of single-speed
three-phase cage induction motors
[80] IEC 60038:2009, IEC standard voltages
[81] IEC 60050-192:2015, International electrotechnical vocabulary — Part 192: Dependability
[82] IEC 60050-444:2002, International electrotechnical vocabulary — Part 444: Elementary relays
[83] IEC 60076-1:2000, Power transformers — Part 1: General
[84] IEC 60076-2:2011, Power transformers — Part 2: Temperature rise for liquid-immersed
transformers
[85] IEC 60076-3:2013, Power transformers — Part 3: Insulation levels, dialectric tests and external
clearances in air
[86] IEC 60076-4:2002, Power transformers — Part 4: Guide to the lightning impulse and switching
impulse testing — Power transformers and reactors
[87] IEC 60076-5:2006, Power transformers — Part 5: Ability to withstand short circuit
1) To be published.
2) Under revision. New title will be Petroleum and natural gas industries — Offshore production installations —
Major Accident hazard management during the design of new installations.

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

[88] IEC 60076-7:2005, Power transformers — Part 7: Loading guide for oil-immersed power
transformers
[89] IEC 60076-8:1997, Power transformers — Part 8: Application guide
[90] IEC 60076-10:2001, Power transformers — Part 10: Determination of sound levels
[91] IEC 60076-11:2004, Power transformers — Part 11: Dry-type transformers
[92] IEC 60076-12:2008, Power transformers — Part 12: Loading guide for dry-type power transformers
[93] IEC 60079 (all parts), Electrical apparatus for explosive gas atmospheres
[94] IEC 60085:2007, Electrical insulation — Thermal evaluation and designation
[95] IEC 60146-1:2009, Semiconductor converters - General requirements and line commutated
converters
[96] IEC 60227 (all parts), Polyvinyl chloride insulated cables of rated voltages up to and including
450/750 V
[97] IEC 60300-1:2014, Dependability management — Part 1: Guidance for management and application
[98] IEC 60300-2, Dependability management — Part 2: Dependability programme elements and tasks
[99] IEC 60300-3-1, Dependability management — Part 3: Application guide — Analysis techniques for
dependability — Guide on methodology
[100] IEC 60300-3-2, Dependability management — Part 3: Application guide — Collection of
dependability data from the field
[101] IEC 60300-3-3, Dependability management — Part 3: Application guide — Life cycle costing
[102] IEC 60300-3-4, Dependability management — Part 3: Application guide — Section 4: Guide to the
specification of dependability requirements
[103] IEC 60300-3-5, Dependability management — Part 3-5: Application guide — Reliability test
conditions and statistical test principles
[104] IEC 60300-3-10, Dependability management — Part 3‑10: Application guide — Maintainability
[105] IEC 60300-3-11, Dependability management — Part 3‑11: Application guide — Reliability centred
maintenance
[106] IEC 60300-3-12, Dependability management — Part 3‑12: Application guide — Integrated
logistic support
[107] IEC 60300-3-14:2004, Dependability management — Part 3-14: Application guide - Maintenance
and maintenance support
[108] IEC 60319, Presentation and specification of reliability data for electronic components
[109] IEC 60381-2, Analog signals for process control systems — Part 2: Direct voltage signals
[110] IEC 60470, High-voltage alternating current contactors and contactor-based motor-starters
[111] IEC 60502, Power cables with extruded insulation and their accessories for rated voltages from 1 kV
(Um = 1,2 kV) up to 30 kV (Um = 36 kV)
[112] IEC 60529:2001, Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP Code)
[113] IEC 60605-4, Equipment reliability testing — Part 4: Statistical procedures for exponential
distribution — Point estimates, confidence intervals, prediction intervals and tolerance intervals

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

[114] IEC 60605-6, Equipment reliability testing — Part 6: Test for the validity of the constant failure rate
or constant failure intensity assumptions
[115] IEC 60706-2, Guide on maintainability of equipment — Part 2: Maintainability studies during the
design phase
[116] IEC 60706-3, Guide on maintainability of equipment — Part 3: Verification and collection, analysis
and presentation of data
[117] IEC 60706-5, Guide on maintainability of equipment — Part 5: Diagnostic testing
[118] IEC 60812, Analysis techniques for system reliability — Procedure for failure mode and effects
analysis (FMEA)
[119] IEC 60840:2011, Power cables with extruded insulation and their accessories for rated voltages
above 30 kV (Um = 36 kV) up to 150 kV (Um = 170 kV) — Test methods and requirement
[120] IEC 60947-2:2006, Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear — Part 2: Circuit-breakers
[121] IEC 60947-3:2008, Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear — Part 3: Switches, disconnectors,
switch-disconnectors and fuse-combination units
[122] IEC 60947-4-1:2009, Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear — Part 4-1: Contactors and motor-
starters — Electromechanical contactors and motor-starters
[123] IEC 61000-4-7:2002, Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) — Part 4-7: Testing and measurement
techniques — General guide on harmonics and interharmonics measurements and instrumentation,
for power supply systems and equipment connected thereto
[124] IEC 61025:2006, Fault tree analysis (FTA)
[125] IEC 61070:1991, Compliance test procedures for steady-state availability
[126] IEC 61078:2016, Reliability block diagrams
[127] IEC 61123:1991, Reliability testing — Compliance test plans for success ratio
[128] IEC 61124:2012, Reliability testing — Compliance tests for constant failure rate and constant
failure intensity
[129] IEC 61131, Programmable controllers
[130] IEC 61163-1:2006, Reliability stress screening - Part 1: Repairable assemblies manufactured in lots
[131] IEC 61164:2004, Reliability growth — Statistical test and estimation methods
[132] IEC 61165:2006, Application of Markov techniques
[133] IEC 61439-1, Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies — Part 1: General rules
[134] IEC/TR 61508-0:2005, Functional safety of electrical/electronic/programmable electronic safety-
related systems - Part 0: Functional safety and IEC 61508
[135] IEC 61508-1:2010, Functional safety of electrical/electronic/programmable electronic safety-
related systems - Part 1: General requirements
related systems - Part 2: Requirements for electrical/electronic/programmable electronic safety-
related systems
related systems - Part 3: Software requirements

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)


related systems - Part 4: Definitions and abbreviations
related systems - Part 5: Examples of methods for the determination of safety integrity levels
related systems - Part 6: Guidelines on the application of IEC 61508-2 and IEC 61508-3
related systems - Part 7: Overview of techniques and measures
[142] IEC 61511-1:2016, Functional safety — Safety instrumented systems for the process industry sector
— Part 1: Framework, definitions, system, hardware and software requirements
[143] IEC 61511-2:2016, Functional safety — Safety instrumented systems for the process industry sector
— Part 2: Guidelines for the application of IEC 61511-1
[144] IEC 61511-3:2016, Functional safety - Safety instrumented systems for the process industry sector -
Part 3: Guidance for the determination of the required safety integrity levels
[145] IEC 61649:1997, Goodness-of-fit tests, confidence intervals and lower confidence limits for Weibull
distributed data
[146] IEC 61650:1997, Reliability data analysis techniques — Procedures for comparison of two constant
failure rates and two constant failure (event) intensities
[147] IEC 61703:2016, Mathematical expressions for reliability, availability, maintainability and
maintenance support terms
[148] IEC 61709:2011, Electric components — Reliability - Reference conditions for failure rates and
stress models for conversion
[149] IEC 61800-1:1997, Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems — Part 1: General requirements
- Rating specifications for low voltage adjustables speed d.c. power drive systems
[150] IEC 61800-2:2015, Adjustable Speed Electrical Power Drive Systems — Part 2: General requirements
— Rating specifications for low voltage adjustable frequency a.c. power drive systems
[151] IEC 61800-3:2004, Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems — Part 3: EMC requirements
and specific test methods
[152] IEC 61800-4:2002, Adjustable Speed Electrical Power Drive Systems — Part 4: General requirements
— Rating specifications for a.c. power drive systems above 1000V a.c. and not exceeding 35 kV
[153] IEC 61800-5-1:2007, Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems — Part 5-1: Safety
requirements — Electrical, thermal and energy
[154] IEC 61810-2: 2011, Electromechanical elementary relays — Part 2: Reliability
[155] IEC 62040-2:2005, Uninterruptible power systems (UPS) — Part 2: Electromagnetic compatibility
(EMC) requirements
[156] IEC 62040-3:2011, Uninterruptible power systems (UPS) — Part 3: Method of specifying the
performance and test requirements
[157] IEC 621143), Electrical insulation - Thermal evaluation and designation
[158] IEC 62271-1:2007, High-voltage switchgear and controlgear — Part 1: Common specifications
3) Withdrawn (replaced by IEC 60085).

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

[159] IEC 62271-100:2008, High-voltage switchgear and controlgear — Part 100: Alternating current
circuit-breakers
[160] IEC 62271-102:2001, High-voltage switchgear and controlgear — Part 102: Alternating current
disconnectors and earthing switches
[161] IEC 62271-200:2011, High-voltage switchgear and controlgear — Part 200: AC metal-enclosed
switchgear and controlgear for rated voltages above 1 kV and up to and including 52 kV
[162] IEC 62508:2010, Guidance on human aspects of dependability
[163] IEC 62551: 2012, Analysis techniques for dependability — Petri net techniques
[164] IEC 62740: 2015, Root cause analysis (RCA)
[165] EN 13306:2010, Maintenance — Maintenance terminology
[166] API RP 7C-11F, Recommended Practice for Installation, Maintenance, and Operation of Internal-
Combustion Engines
[167] API RP 11S, Recommended Practice for the Operation, Maintenance and Troubleshooting of Electric
Submersible Pump Installations
[168] API RP 14B, Design, Installation, Repair and Operation of Subsurface Safety Valve Systems,
Sixth Edition
[169] API RP 17B, Recommended Practice for Flexible Pipe, Fifth Edition (May 2014)
[170] API RP 17H, Remotely Operated Tools and Interfaces on Subsea Production Systems, Second
Edition, 2013
[171] API RP 554, Part 1, API Recommended Practice 554, Part 2: Process Control Systems — Process
Control Systems Functions and Functional Specification Development, Second Edition
[172] API RP 554, Part 2, API Recommended Practice 554, Part 2: Process Control Systems — Process
Control System Design, First Edition
[173] API RP 554, Part 3, API Recommended Practice 554, Part 3: Process Control Systems — Project
Execution and Process Control System Ownership, First Edition
[174] API RP 580, Risk-Based Inspection, Second Edition
[175] Spec API 5CT, Specification for Casing and Tubing
[176] Spec API 6A, Specification for Wellhead and Christmas Tree Equipment, Twentieth Edition
(ISO 10423:2009 Modification), Includes Errata (through Errata 7, December 2014), Addenda
1(Nov 2011), 2 (Nov 2012), 3 (March 2013)
[177] Spec API 6D, Specification for Pipeline and Piping Valves, Twenty-Fourth Edition (2014),
includes Errata 1 (2014), Errata 2 (2014), Errata 3 (2015), and Addendum 1 (2015), Errata 5
(2015), Errata 6 (2015), Errata 7 (2016), and Addendum 2 (2016)
[178] Spec API 7B-11C, Specification for Internal-Combustion Reciprocating Engines for Oil Field Service
[179] Spec API 12D, Specification for Field Welded Tanks for Storage of Production Liquids
[180] Spec API 12F, Specification for Shop Welded Tanks for Storage of Production Liquids, Twelfth
Edition
[181] Spec API 12P, Specification for Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Tanks, Third Edition
[182] Spec API 14A, Specification for Subsurface Safety Valve Equipment, Twelfth Edition, Includes
Errata (July, 2015)

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

[183] Spec API 14L, Specification for Lock Mandrels and Landing Nipples, Second Edition
[184] Spec API 16A, Specification for Drill Through Equipment. Includes Errata, Third Edition (2004)
[185] Spec API 16D, Specification for Control Systems for Drilling Well Control Equipment and Control
Systems for Diverter Equipment Second Edition
[186] Spec API 17J, Specification for Unbonded Flexible Pipe, Fourth Edition (May 2014)
[187] Spec API 19G2, Flow-control devices for side-pocket mandrels, twelfth Edition
[188] API/Std 17F, Standard for Subsea Production Control Systems, Third Edition
[189] API/Std 53, Blowout Prevention Equipment Systems for Drilling Wells, Fourth Edition
[190] API/Std 520, Part 1, Sizing, Selection, and Installation of Pressure-relieving Devices, Part I - Sizing
and Selection, Ninth Edition
[191] API/Std 520, Part 2, Sizing, Selection, and Installation of Pressure-Relieving Devices in Refineries-
Part II, Installation, Sixth Edition
[192] API/Std 521, Pressure-relieving and Depressuring Systems, Sixth Edition (2014)
[193] API/Std 526, Flanged Steel Pressure-relief Valves, Sixth Edition (Includes Errata 1, Errata 2)
[194] API/Std 537, Flare Details for General Refinery and Petrochemical Service, Second Edition
(ISO 25457:2008, Identical)
[195] API/Std 537, Datasheets, Datasheets for API 537, Second Edition
[196] API/Std 541, Form-wound Squirrel-Cage Induction Motors-500 Horsepower and Larger, Fifth Edition
[197] API/Std 541, Datasheets, Data sheets for API Std 541
[198] API/Std 547, General-Purpose Form-Wound Squirrel Cage Induction Motors 250 Horsepower and
Larger - First Edition
[199] API/Std 547, Datasheets, Datasheets for API Standard 547, General-Purpose Form Wound Squirrel
Cage Induction Motors - 250 Horsepower and Larger
[200] API/Std 560, Fired Heaters for General Refinery Service, Fourth Edition
[201] API/Std 560, Datasheets, Datasheets for Fired Heaters for General Refinery Services
[202] API/Std 594, Check Valves: Flanged, Lug, Wafer and Butt-welding
[203] API/Std 609, Butterfly Valves: Double-flanged, Lug- and Wafer-type
[204] API/Std 610, Centrifugal Pumps for Petroleum, Petrochemical and Natural Gas Industries, Eleventh
Edition (ISO 13709:2009 Identical Adoption), Includes Errata (July 2011)
[205] API/Std 610Datasheets, Datasheets for Centrifugal Pumps for Petroleum, Petrochemical and
Natural Gas Industries, Eleventh Edition
[206] API/Std 611, Datasheets, Datasheets for API Std 611, Fifth Edition
[207] API/Std 611, Datasheets, Datasheets for Centrifugal Pumps for Petroleum, Petrochemical and
Natural Gas Industries, Eleventh Edition
[208] API/Std 612, Petroleum, Petrochemical and Natural Gas Industries-Steam Turbines-Special-purpose
Applications, Seventh Edition
[209] API/Std 612, Datasheets, Datasheets for API Std 612

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

[210] API/Std 616, Gas Turbines for the Petroleum, Chemical, and Gas Industry Services, Fifth Edition
[211] API/Std 616, Datasheets, Datasheets for API Standard 616, Gas Turbines for the Petroleum, Chemical,
and Gas Industry Services
[212] API/Std 617, Axial and Centrifugal Compressors and Expander-compressors, Eighth Edition
[213] API/Std 617, Datasheets, Datasheets for API Standard 617, Axial and Centrifugal Compressors and
Expander-compressors, Eighth Edition
[214] API/Std 618, Reciprocating Compressors for Petroleum, Chemical, and Gas Industry Services, Fifth
Edition, Includes Errata 1 and 2 (2009 and 2010)
[215] API/Std 618, Datasheets, Datasheets for use with Std 618, Fifth Edition, Includes Errata (2009)
[216] API/Std 619, Rotary-Type Positive-Displacement Compressors for Petroleum, Petrochemical, and
Natural Gas Industries, Fifth Edition
[217] API/Std 619, Datasheets, Datasheets for API Std 619
[218] API/Std 620, Design and Construction of Large, Welded, Low-Pressure Storage Tanks, Twelfth Edition
[219] API/Std 650, Welded Tanks for Oil Storage, Twelfth Edition, Includes Errata 1 (2013), Errata 2
(2014), and Addendum 1 (2014)
[220] API/Std 650, Datasheets, Datasheets for API 650, Welded Steel Tanks for Oil Storage, 12th Edition
[221] API/Std 660, Shell-and-tube Heat Exchangers, Ninth Edition
[222] API/Std 660, Datasheets, Datasheets API Std 660
[223] API/Std 661, Petroleum, Petrochemical, and Natural Gas Industries - Air-cooled Heat Exchangers,
Seventh Edition
[224] API/Std 661, Datasheets, Datasheets for Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Services,
Sixth Edition - Adoption of ISO 13706-1:2005
[225] API/Std 662, Part 1, Plate Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Services - Part 1 - Plate-and-Frame
Heat Exchangers, First Edition - ISO Adoption from ISO 15547-1:2005
[226] API/Std 662, Part 2, Plate Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Services - Part 2 - Brazed
Alumninum Plate-fin Heat Exchangers First Edition - ISO Adoption from ISO 15547-2:2005
[227] API/Std 662, Datasheets, Datasheets for Plate Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Services,
Second Edition
[228] API/Std 673, Centrifugal Fans for Petroleum, Chemical and Gas Industry Services, Third Edition
[229] API/Std 673, Datasheets, Datasheets for Centrifugal Fans for Petroleum, Chemical and Gas Industry
Services, 3rd Edition
[230] API/Std 674, Positive Displacement Pumps - Reciprocating, Includes Errata (May 2014), Errata 2
(April 2015)
[231] API/Std 674, Datasheets, Datasheets for Positive Displacement Pumps - Reciprocating
[232] API/Std 676, Positive Displacement Pumps-Rotary, Third Edition
[233] API/Std 676, Datasheets, Datasheets for Positive Displacement Pumps – Rotary
[234] API/Std 2000, Venting Atmospheric and Low-pressure Storage Tanks. Seventh Edition
[235] API/Std 2610, Design, Construction, Operation, Maintenance, and Inspection of Terminal & Tank
Facilities, Second Edition

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

[236] NORSOK C-004:2013, Helicopter deck on offshore installations

[237] NORSOK D-002:2013, Well intervention equipment, Revision 2
[238] NORSOK D-010:2013, Well integrity in drilling and well operations
[239] NORSOK I-001:2010, Field instrumentation
[240] NORSOK N-001:2012, Integrity of offshore structures
[241] NORSOK R-002:2012, Lifting equipment
[242] NORSOK S-001:2008, Technical safety
[243] NORSOK T-001:2010, Telecom systems
[244] NORSOK T-100:2010, Telecom subsystems
[245] NORSOK U-100:2015, Manned underwater operations
[246] NORSOK Z-008: 2011, Risk based maintenance and consequence classification
[247] NORSOK Z-013:2010, Risk and emergency preparedness assessment
[248] DNV OS-F101:2013, Submarine Pipeline Systems
[249] DNV RP-F116:2015, Integrity Management of Submarine Pipeline Systems
[250] DNV-OS-E406:2010, Design of Free Fall Lifeboats
[251] ASME B31.3-2014, Process Piping
[252] ASME B16.34-2013, Valves - Flanged, Threaded and Welding End
[253] ASME: BPVC Section VIII-Rules for Construction of Pressure Vessels Division 1
[254] ASME: BPVC Section VIII-Rules for Construction of Pressure Vessels Division 2 - Alternative Rules
[255] BS 4778-3.1:1991, Quality vocabulary. Availability, reliability and maintainability terms. Guide to
concepts and related definitions
[256] BS 4999-140:1987, General requirements for rotating electrical machines Part 140. Voltage
regulation and parallel operation of A.C. synchronous generators
[257] CAN/CSA C88-M, Power Transformers and Reactors
[258] CSA FT4, Vertical Flame Test — Cables in Cable Trays
[259] CAN/CSA C68.3-97, Shielded and Concentric Neutral Power Cables Rated 5-46 kV (Includes GI
#2, #3, and Updates #4 and #5)
[260] FCC 47CFR15, Utility-Type Battery Chargers NEMA PE 5 Radio Frequency Devices
[261] ICEA S-93-639-2000, International safety guide for oil tankers and terminals Quality management
and quality assurance standards, Part1 – Part 4 ISO 9000 series 5-46 kV shielded power cable for
use in the transmission and distribution of electric energy
[262] IEEE 1202-2006, IEEE Standard for Flame-Propagation Testing of Wire & Cable
[263] IEEE C37.012-2014, IEEE Guide for the Application of Capacitance Current Switching for AC High-
Voltage Circuit Breakers Above 1000 V
[264] IEEE C37.101-2006, IEEE Guide for Generator Ground Protection
[265] IEEE C37.102-2007, IEEE Guide for AC Generator Protection

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

[266] IEEE C37.13.1-2006, IEEE Standard for Definite Purpose Switching Devices for Use in Metal-Enclosed
Low-Voltage Power Circuit Breaker Switchgear
[267] IEEE C37.20.7-2007, IEEE Guide for Testing Metal-Enclosed Switchgear Rated Up to 38 kV for
Internal Arcing Faults
[268] IEEE C37.20.7-2007/Cor 1-2010, IEEE Guide for Testing Metal-Enclosed Switchgear Rated up to 38
kV for Internal Arcing Faults Corrigendum 1
[269] IEEE C57.12.10-2010, IEEE Standard Requirements for Liquid-Immersed Power Transformers
[270] IEEE 1566-2005, IEEE Standard for Performance of Adjustable Speed AC Drives Rated 375 kW
and Larger
[271] IEEE C57.18.10-1998, IEEE Standard Practices and Requirements for Semiconductor Power Rectifier
Transformers
[272] NEMA 20C, Cable tray systems
[273] NEMA MG 1, Motors and generators
[274] NEMA PE 1, Uninterruptible Power Systems (UPS) — Specification and Performance Verification
[275] NEMA PE 5, Utility Type Battery Chargers
[276] NEMA PE 7, Communication Type Battery Chargers
[277] NEMA VE-1, Metal cable tray systems
[278] NEMA VE-2, Cable tray installation guidelines
[279] NFPA 13: Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems. National Fire Protection
Association, NFPA.
[280] NFPA 15: Standard for Water Spray Fixed Systems for Fire Protection. National Fire Protection
Association, NFPA.
[281] NFPA 16: Standard for the Installation of Foam-Water Sprinkler and Foam-Water Spray Systems.
National Fire Protection Association, NFPA.
[282] UL 1072, UL standard for safety medium-voltage power cables
[283] UL 1277, UL standard for safety electrical power and control tray cables with optional optical-
fiber members
[284] UL 1569, UL standard for safety metal-clad cables
[285] UL 2225, UL standard for safety cables and cable-fittings for use in hazardous (classified) locations
[286] UL 2250, UL standard for safety instrumentation tray cable
[287] IMO/COMSAR/Circ.32, Harmonization of GMDSS requirements for radio installations on board
SOLAS ships, 2004
[288] IMO. SOLAS. International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea (SOLAS), 1974
[289] IMO, SOLAS. MSC.48 (66): Life saving appliances code, 2010.
[290] IMO, SOLAS. MSC.81 (70): Testing and evaluation of life saving appliances, 2010.
[291] MIL-STD-1629A, Procedures for performing FMEA-analysis, 1980
[292] SAE JA1011:1999, Evaluation Criteria for RCM Processes

BS EN ISO 14224:2016
ISO 14224:2016(E)

[293] SAE JA1012:2002, A Guide to the Reliability Centered Maintenance (RCM) Standard

[294] Ascher H., & Feingold H. Repairable Systems Reliability. Marcel Dekker, New York, 1984
[295] Cooke R.M. Experts in Uncertainty: Expert Opinion and Subjective Probability in Science.
Oxford University Press, 1992
[296] Georgin J.P., & Signoret J.P. The maximum likelihood estimate from a confidence level point of
view – Proposition for an improved one. Reliab. Eng. 1981, 2 pp. 259–269
[297] Hernu M. Using benchmark data effectively, NPRA Maintenance conference May 2000 (Austin TX)
[298] Kirwan B. A guide to practical human reliability assessment. Taylor & Francis, UK, 1994
[299] Martz H.F., & Waller R.A. Bayesian Reliability and Analysis. John Wiley & Sons, 1982
[300] Moore-Ede M. The definition of human fatigue, white paper, Circadian Information Limited
Partnership, 2009.
[301] NPRA Maintenance Conference 2002, Identifying and implementing improvement opportunities,
through benchmarking, Workshop MC-02-88
[302] OREDA® (Offshore and Onshore Reliability Data): Joint oil and gas industry project for collection
of equipment reliability and maintenance data
[303] Reason J. Human Error. Cambridge University Press, UK, 1990
[304] Selvik J.T., & Aven T. A framework for reliability and risk centered maintenance. Reliab. Eng.
Syst. Saf. 2011, 96 (2) pp. 324–331
[305] SEVESO III directive: The European Parliament and the Council of the European Union, Directive
2012/18/EU of the European Parliament and the Council of 4 July 2012 on the control of major-
accident hazards involving dangerous substances, amending and subsequently repealing Council
Directive 96/82/EC.
[306] SINTEF and NTNU, Offshore and Onshore Reliability Data Handbook, Volume I & II, ed. 6,
April 2015
[307] The Norwegian Oil and Gas Association, 070 - Norwegian Oil and Gas Recommended Guidelines
for Application of IEC 61508 and IEC 61511 in the Norwegian Petroleum Industry, Draft version,
26 Feb 2016
[308] van Noortwijk J.M., Dekker R., Cooke M., Mazzucchi T.A Expert judgment in maintenance
optimization. IEEE Trans. Reliab. 1992, 41 (3) pp. 427–432
[309] WELLMASTER®: Joint oil and gas industry project for collection of well completion reliability
and maintenance data

NO COPYING WITHOUT BSI PERMISSION EXCEPT AS PERMITTED BY COPYRIGHT LAW
British Standards Institution (BSI)

BSI is the national body responsible for preparing British Standards and other
standards-related publications, information and services.
BSI is incorporated by Royal Charter. British Standards and other standardization
products are published by BSI Standards Limited.
About us Reproducing extracts

We bring together business, industry, government, consumers, innovators For permission to reproduce content from BSI publications contact the BSI
and others to shape their combined experience and expertise into standards Copyright & Licensing team.
-based solutions.
The knowledge embodied in our standards has been carefully assembled in Subscriptions
a dependable format and refined through our open consultation process. Our range of subscription services are designed to make using standards
Organizations of all sizes and across all sectors choose standards to help easier for you. For further information on our subscription products go to
them achieve their goals. bsigroup.com/subscriptions.
With British Standards Online (BSOL) you’ll have instant access to over 55,000
Information on standards British and adopted European and international standards from your desktop.
We can provide you with the knowledge that your organization needs It’s available 24/7 and is refreshed daily so you’ll always be up to date.
to succeed. Find out more about British Standards by visiting our website at You can keep in touch with standards developments and receive substantial
bsigroup.com/standards or contacting our Customer Services team or discounts on the purchase price of standards, both in single copy and subscription
Knowledge Centre. format, by becoming a BSI Subscribing Member.
PLUS is an updating service exclusive to BSI Subscribing Members. You will
Buying standards
automatically receive the latest hard copy of your standards when they’re
You can buy and download PDF versions of BSI publications, including British revised or replaced.
and adopted European and international standards, through our website at
To find out more about becoming a BSI Subscribing Member and the benefits
bsigroup.com/shop, where hard copies can also be purchased.
of membership, please visit bsigroup.com/shop.
If you need international and foreign standards from other Standards Development
With a Multi-User Network Licence (MUNL) you are able to host standards
Organizations, hard copies can be ordered from our Customer Services team.
publications on your intranet. Licences can cover as few or as many users as you
wish. With updates supplied as soon as they’re available, you can be sure your
Copyright in BSI publications
documentation is current. For further information, email [email protected].
All the content in BSI publications, including British Standards, is the property
of and copyrighted by BSI or some person or entity that owns copyright in the Revisions
information used (such as the international standardization bodies) and has
Our British Standards and other publications are updated by amendment or revision.
formally licensed such information to BSI for commercial publication and use.
We continually improve the quality of our products and services to benefit your
Save for the provisions below, you may not transfer, share or disseminate any
business. If you find an inaccuracy or ambiguity within a British Standard or other
portion of the standard to any other person. You may not adapt, distribute,
BSI publication please inform the Knowledge Centre.
commercially exploit, or publicly display the standard or any portion thereof in any
manner whatsoever without BSI’s prior written consent.
Useful Contacts
Storing and using standards Customer Services
Standards purchased in soft copy format: Tel: +44 345 086 9001
Email (orders): [email protected]
• A British Standard purchased in soft copy format is licensed to a sole named
user for personal or internal company use only. Email (enquiries): [email protected]
• The standard may be stored on more than 1 device provided that it is accessible Subscriptions
by the sole named user only and that only 1 copy is accessed at any one time. Tel: +44 345 086 9001
• A single paper copy may be printed for personal or internal company use only. Email: [email protected]
Standards purchased in hard copy format: Knowledge Centre

• A British Standard purchased in hard copy format is for personal or internal Tel: +44 20 8996 7004
company use only. Email: [email protected]
• It may not be further reproduced – in any format – to create an additional copy.
Copyright & Licensing
This includes scanning of the document.
Tel: +44 20 8996 7070
If you need more than 1 copy of the document, or if you wish to share the Email: [email protected]
document on an internal network, you can save money by choosing a subscription
product (see ‘Subscriptions’). BSI Group Headquarters
389 Chiswick High Road London W4 4AL UK

Iso 14224 2016 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Iso 14224 2016 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Iso 14224 2016 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

BS EN ISO 14224:2016

BSI Standards Publication

ICS 75.180.01; 75.200 Supersedes EN ISO 14224:2006

Petroleum, petrochemical and natural gas industries -

This European Standard was approved by CEN on 22 July 2016.

EUROPEAN COMMITTEE FOR STANDARDIZATION

CEN-CENELEC Management Centre: Avenue Marnix 17, B-1000 Brussels

This document supersedes EN ISO 14224:2006.

© ISO 2016 – All rights reserved ﻿ iii

Annex E (informative) Key performance indicators (KPIs) and benchmarking............................................... 238

iv ﻿ © ISO 2016 – All rights reserved

© ISO 2016 – All rights reserved ﻿ v

vi ﻿ © ISO 2016 – All rights reserved

Petroleum, petrochemical and natural gas industries —

© ISO 2016 – All rights reserved ﻿ 1

3 Terms and definitions

Note 2 to entry: Further terms are given in ISO/TR 12489:2013.

2 ﻿ © ISO 2016 – All rights reserved

Note 5 to entry: See also ISO/TR 12489:2013, 3.2.14 and 5.4.2.

Note 6 to entry: See also C.1.6

[SOURCE: IEC 60050-192:2015, 192-03-19, modified]

[SOURCE: IEC 60050-192:2015, 192-06-07, modified]

[SOURCE: IEC 60050-192:2015, 192-06-06, modified – Note 2 to entry has been added.]

© ISO 2016 – All rights reserved ﻿ 3

[SOURCE: ISO 20815:2008, 3.1.5]

Note 2 to entry: The adjectives “down” or “unavailable” designate an item in a down state.

Note 3 to entry: See also Table 4 and Figure 4.

Note 4 to entry: See also ISO/TR 12489:2013, Figures 5 and 6.

4 ﻿ © ISO 2016 – All rights reserved

Note 1 to entry: See also A.1.4 for further details.

© ISO 2016 – All rights reserved ﻿ 5

Note 4 to entry: See Table B.1, and also F.2 and F.3.

[SOURCE: IEC 60050-192:2015, 192-03-11, modified – Note 2 to entry has been added.]

[SOURCE: ISO/TR 12489:2013, modified – Note 1 to entry has been added.]

Note 2 to entry: See also ISO/TR 12489:2013, 3.1.22 and 3.1.23.

[SOURCE: ISO/TR 12489:2013, modified – Notes 1 and 2 to entry have been added.]

6 ﻿ © ISO 2016 – All rights reserved

[SOURCE: IEC 60050-192:2015, 192-03-12, modified – Note 2 to entry has been added.]

Note 3 to entry: See also definition on failure due to demand (3.26).

[SOURCE: ISO/TR 12489:2013, modified – Notes 1 through 5 to entry have been added.]

[SOURCE: ISO/TR 12489:2013, modified – Notes 1 and 2 to entry have been added.]

Note 3 to entry: See also ISO/TR 12489:2013, 3.2.2.

© ISO 2016 – All rights reserved ﻿ 7

Note 2 to entry: See definition with notes to entry in ISO/TR 12489:2013, 3.2.11.

Note 3 to entry: See also latent fault (3.44).

Note 4 to entry: See also IEC 62508:2010 for further details.

Note 5 to entry: See also ISO/TR 12489:2013, 5.5.2.

[SOURCE: Moore-Ede M.:2009, modified – Note 1 to entry has been added.]

[SOURCE: IEC 60050-192:2015, 192-02-14, modified – Note 3 to entry has been added.]

8 ﻿ © ISO 2016 – All rights reserved

[SOURCE: IEC 60050-192:2015, 192-01-01, modified – Note 3 to entry has been added.]

[SOURCE: IEC 60050-192:2015, 192-04-08, modified]

© ISO 2016 – All rights reserved ﻿ 9

Note 2 to entry: See also ISO/TR 12489:2013, Figure 5.

[SOURCE: IEC 60050-192:2015, 192-01-27, modified – Note 3 to entry has been added.]

[SOURCE: IEC 60050-192:2015, 192-06-01, modified – Note 1 to entry has been added.]

Note 2 to entry: See also ISO/TR 12489:2013, 3.4.2.

[SOURCE: IEC 60050-192:2015, 192-06-02, modified – Note 2 to entry has been added.]

Note 2 to entry: See also 9.6.3, Table 8.

© ISO 2016 – All rights reserved iii

iv © ISO 2016 – All rights reserved

© ISO 2016 – All rights reserved v

vi © ISO 2016 – All rights reserved

© ISO 2016 – All rights reserved 1

2 © ISO 2016 – All rights reserved

© ISO 2016 – All rights reserved 3

4 © ISO 2016 – All rights reserved

© ISO 2016 – All rights reserved 5

6 © ISO 2016 – All rights reserved

© ISO 2016 – All rights reserved 7

8 © ISO 2016 – All rights reserved

© ISO 2016 – All rights reserved 9

10 © ISO 2016 – All rights reserved

© ISO 2016 – All rights reserved 11

12 © ISO 2016 – All rights reserved

© ISO 2016 – All rights reserved 13

14 © ISO 2016 – All rights reserved

© ISO 2016 – All rights reserved 15

16 © ISO 2016 – All rights reserved

© ISO 2016 – All rights reserved 17

18 © ISO 2016 – All rights reserved